NextGen PM - Montgomery County ADAMHS

®
NextGen PM
System Configuration Training Workbook
Community Health Centers
Version 5.8
Copyright © 1994-2013 NextGen Healthcare Information Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
NextGen is a registered trademark and service mark of NextGen Healthcare Information Systems, Inc.
Notice:
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Microsoft, SQL Server, Windows, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, Office, Word, Excel and Outlook are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Although a
Microsoft trademark may appear in certain images within this document, Microsoft Corporation is not
responsible for warranty support on the NextGen® software products.
In as much as possible, default procedures in this guide were developed using the most current Microsoft
operating system and most current Microsoft server operating system. When required, procedures in this
guide were developed based on the Microsoft Windows 7 operating system and/or Windows Server 2008
and SQL Server 2008, unless otherwise noted. Screenshots in this document were primarily developed
using the Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 systems. Note: Other Windows
operating systems that support this product may work differently.
All other names and marks are the property of their respective owners.
The examples contained within this publication are strictly present to show functionality of the software
and are not intended to be guidelines for medical decisions or clinical approaches.
Although we have exercised great care in creating this publication, NextGen Healthcare Information
Systems, Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions that may appear in this publication and
reserves the right to change this publication at any time without notice.
Although NextGen Healthcare provides accurate documentation at the time of publication, it cannot
guarantee going forward that websites links to third-party vendors listed in this document do not become
obsolete. NextGen Healthcare is not responsible for the contents of any such linked sites or any link
contained in a link site, or any changes or updates to such sites. The inclusion of any link does not imply
endorsement by NextGen Healthcare of the site and is solely being provided to you as a convenience. Use
of any such linked web site is at the user’s own risk.
Notice:
The following are all registered trademarks or trademarks of NextGen Healthcare Information Systems,
Inc.:
NextGen® Ambulatory EHR
NextGen® EHR Connect
NextGen® Optical
Management
NextGen® Appointment
Scheduling
NextGen Financial Insight™
NextGen® Patient Portal
NextGen® Billing Service
Management
NextGen™ HIE
NextGen® Practice
Management
NextGen® CHC Reporting
Module
NextGen® HQM
NextGen® Real Time
Services
NextGen® Dashboard
NextGen® KBM
NextGen® Remote Patient
Chart Synchronization
NextGen® Document
Management
NextGen® Mobile
NextPen™
The following terms may be used interchangeably throughout this document:
NextGen Ambulatory EHR and NextGen EHR
NextGen Practice Management and NextGen EPM
NextGen Optical Management and NextGen Optik
NextGen Document Management and NextGen ICS
NextGen Patient Portal and NextMD
NextGen Remote Patient Chart Synchronization and NextGen PatientSync
NextGen CHS and NextGen HIE
Address comments concerning this document to: documentationfeedback@nextgen.com, Web site:
http://www.nextgen.com
NOTE: This EPM SCT Workbook was created using NextGen EPM version 5.8. Slight variations in the
steps performed, graphic images, and screens depicted may occur depending on the versions of the EPM
you are using. The fundamental concepts will remain the same.
Document Revision History
App
Version
Build
Number
Author*
Date
Document
Version
Summary of
Changes^
5.6
Corporate
Training
April 2010
1.0
Approved
5.6SP1
Corporate
Training
December 2010
2.0
Approved
5.7
Corporate
Training
August 2012
3.0
Approved
5.8
Corporate
Training
October 2013
4.0
Approved
This page is intentionally left blank.
NextGen Healthcare
Contents:
Preparation for System Configuration Training ___________________________________ 15
Getting Started ______________________________________________________________ 17
Application Launcher ................................................................................................................. 17
Create Shortcut/Menu Item ................................................................................................... 18
SetDB .................................................................................................................................... 19
License Manager .................................................................................................................. 20
System Administrator ............................................................................................................ 21
File Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 22
Understanding the NextGen System File Structure .................................................................. 23
System Level ........................................................................................................................ 24
Enterprise Level .................................................................................................................... 25
Practice Level ....................................................................................................................... 26
Location Level ....................................................................................................................... 27
Tax ID Numbers .................................................................................................................... 27
Association ............................................................................................................................ 28
System Basics ______________________________________________________________ 30
Login .......................................................................................................................................... 30
Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................................... 31
File Maintenance > Master Files > System ________________________________________ 32
Enterprises ................................................................................................................................ 32
Enterprise Preferences ......................................................................................................... 32
Enterprise Preferences > UDS Tab .................................................................................. 33
Enterprise Preferences > Client Defined Tab ................................................................... 34
Locations ................................................................................................................................... 36
Location Defaults Tab ........................................................................................................... 36
Defaults 2 Tab ....................................................................................................................... 38
Practice Tab .......................................................................................................................... 40
Credentialing Tab .................................................................................................................. 41
External Tab .......................................................................................................................... 42
Other Tabs ............................................................................................................................ 43
Practices .................................................................................................................................... 44
Practice Defaults Tab ............................................................................................................ 44
External Tab .......................................................................................................................... 46
Import Tab ............................................................................................................................. 47
Practice Preferences ............................................................................................................. 48
Practice Preferences > Chart Tab .................................................................................... 48
System Administrator ________________________________________________________ 49
Practice Level Security .............................................................................................................. 50
Groups .................................................................................................................................. 50
New Group........................................................................................................................ 50
New Group – General Tab ............................................................................................... 51
New Group - Rights Tab ................................................................................................... 52
Import Permissions ........................................................................................................... 54
Export Permissions ........................................................................................................... 56
Add Existing Groups ......................................................................................................... 58
Delete Group .................................................................................................................... 60
6
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Users ..................................................................................................................................... 61
New User – General Tab .................................................................................................. 62
New User – Practice Rights Tab ...................................................................................... 65
New User – Preferences Tab ........................................................................................... 66
New User – External Tab ................................................................................................. 67
New User – Locations Tab ............................................................................................... 68
New User – Location Restrictions Tab ............................................................................. 69
Add Existing User ............................................................................................................. 71
User/Group Assignment ................................................................................................... 72
Deactivate User ................................................................................................................ 74
Restore User..................................................................................................................... 75
System Level Security ............................................................................................................... 76
Edit Menu .............................................................................................................................. 76
Find ................................................................................................................................... 77
Association Maintenance .................................................................................................. 77
Full App Launcher Access ................................................................................................ 78
View Menu ............................................................................................................................ 79
Password Requirements .................................................................................................. 79
Significant Events ............................................................................................................. 80
File Maintenance > Master Lists ________________________________________________ 81
Address Type ............................................................................................................................ 81
Appointment Cancellation Reasons .......................................................................................... 82
Appointment Rescheduling Reasons ........................................................................................ 82
Appointment User Defined 5 – 8 ............................................................................................... 83
Bad Debt Statuses .................................................................................................................... 83
Blood Quantum ......................................................................................................................... 84
Case Category .......................................................................................................................... 84
Case Contact Role .................................................................................................................... 85
Case Markets ............................................................................................................................ 85
Church ....................................................................................................................................... 86
Classification/Beneficiary .......................................................................................................... 86
Community Code ....................................................................................................................... 87
Contact Preferences.................................................................................................................. 87
Contract Subgrouping ............................................................................................................... 88
Counties .................................................................................................................................... 88
Countries ................................................................................................................................... 89
Credentialing ............................................................................................................................. 89
Departments .............................................................................................................................. 90
Descendency............................................................................................................................. 90
Diagnosis Subgroupings ........................................................................................................... 91
Enterprise Client Defined 1 – 14 ............................................................................................... 91
Ethnicity ..................................................................................................................................... 92
Financial Classes ...................................................................................................................... 92
7
NextGen Healthcare
Homeless Status ....................................................................................................................... 93
IHS Eligibility Status .................................................................................................................. 93
Language .................................................................................................................................. 94
Language Barrier ....................................................................................................................... 94
Location Subgroupings ............................................................................................................. 95
Marketing Plan Sub-Groups ...................................................................................................... 95
Migrant Worker Status............................................................................................................... 96
Modalities .................................................................................................................................. 97
Name Prefix ............................................................................................................................... 97
Name Suffix ............................................................................................................................... 98
Occupations .............................................................................................................................. 98
Patient Status Change Reasons ............................................................................................... 99
Patient Types ............................................................................................................................ 99
Payer Subgroupings ................................................................................................................ 100
Privacy Notices ........................................................................................................................ 100
Provider Expiration Reasons ................................................................................................... 101
Provider Subgroupings ............................................................................................................ 101
Provider Types ........................................................................................................................ 102
Public Housing Primary Care .................................................................................................. 103
Race ........................................................................................................................................ 104
Reason Code Subgroupings ................................................................................................... 105
Religion ................................................................................................................................... 105
School Based Health Center ................................................................................................... 106
Service Type ........................................................................................................................... 106
Task Completion Reasons ...................................................................................................... 107
Task Subgroupings ................................................................................................................. 107
Tribal Affiliation ........................................................................................................................ 108
Type of Benefit ........................................................................................................................ 108
Vaccine Manufacturer ............................................................................................................. 109
XDS Tables ............................................................................................................................. 109
Zones ...................................................................................................................................... 109
File Maintenance > Master Files > System _______________________________________ 110
Transaction Codes .................................................................................................................. 110
System Generated Transaction Codes ............................................................................... 112
Pre-Installed Transaction Codes ........................................................................................ 113
Payers ..................................................................................................................................... 115
Payer Defaults-1 Tab .......................................................................................................... 116
Defaults-2 Tab .................................................................................................................... 118
System Tab ......................................................................................................................... 120
8
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Claims Sub-Tab .............................................................................................................. 120
Claims-2 Sub-Tab ........................................................................................................... 121
COB Electronic Claims Sub-Tab .................................................................................... 124
Practice Tab ........................................................................................................................ 125
Claims Sub-Tab .............................................................................................................. 125
Secondary References Sub-Tab .................................................................................... 127
Other Sub-Tab ................................................................................................................ 128
UB Sub-Tab .................................................................................................................... 132
Transactions Sub-Tab .................................................................................................... 138
Libraries Sub-Tab ........................................................................................................... 139
Alt (Alternate) Payer Tab .................................................................................................... 141
External Tab ........................................................................................................................ 142
Co-Pays Tab ....................................................................................................................... 143
Order Module Tab ............................................................................................................... 144
Payers - Other Functions .................................................................................................... 145
Import Practice Payer ..................................................................................................... 145
Print Payers .................................................................................................................... 146
Practice Access .............................................................................................................. 147
Setup for UB Claims ........................................................................................................... 148
Setup for Alternate Payer “Split Billing” .............................................................................. 152
Setup for “Wrap Payer” Billing ............................................................................................ 159
Setup for Dental Billing ....................................................................................................... 164
Setup for Dental Payers on ADA Claims ........................................................................ 168
Setup for Dental Payers on UB Claims .......................................................................... 173
File Maintenance > Master Files > Practice ______________________________________ 180
Groups ..................................................................................................................................... 180
File Maintenance > Master Files > System _______________________________________ 183
Providers ................................................................................................................................. 183
Demographics Tab.............................................................................................................. 183
System Tab ......................................................................................................................... 184
Notes Tab............................................................................................................................ 185
Elig/Ref Tab ........................................................................................................................ 186
Credentialing Tab ................................................................................................................ 187
Provider Types Tab ............................................................................................................. 188
Practice Tab ........................................................................................................................ 189
Categories Tab ................................................................................................................... 192
External Tab ........................................................................................................................ 193
EHR Tab ............................................................................................................................. 194
Chart Tracking Tab ............................................................................................................. 195
Order Module Tab ............................................................................................................... 196
Practice Access .................................................................................................................. 197
AutoFlow Sequences .............................................................................................................. 198
Budget Statement Messages .................................................................................................. 198
Case Contacts ......................................................................................................................... 199
CMN Information ..................................................................................................................... 200
Collection Agencies ................................................................................................................. 201
Counters .................................................................................................................................. 202
CPT4 Codes ............................................................................................................................ 203
Diagnosis Categories .............................................................................................................. 204
Practice Access .................................................................................................................. 205
9
NextGen Healthcare
DME Regions .......................................................................................................................... 206
System Tab ......................................................................................................................... 206
Practice Tab ........................................................................................................................ 208
Employers ............................................................................................................................... 209
Form Templates ...................................................................................................................... 210
Formats ................................................................................................................................... 211
ICD9CM Codes ....................................................................................................................... 212
Label Products ........................................................................................................................ 213
Label Templates ...................................................................................................................... 214
Locality Tax Rate..................................................................................................................... 215
Patient Responsibility .............................................................................................................. 217
Revenue Codes ....................................................................................................................... 218
Sliding Fee Schedules............................................................................................................. 219
Setup for Sliding Fee Schedules ........................................................................................ 219
Line Item Based vs. Encounter Based using Minimum Value Mode.............................. 226
Line Item Based vs. Encounter Based using Flat Rate Mode ........................................ 228
Practice Access .................................................................................................................. 230
Practice Preferences > Sliding Fee Tab ............................................................................. 231
Alternatives to Standard Sliding Fee Schedules ................................................................ 233
Sliding Fee Schedules for Flat Encounter Rate Co-Pay ................................................ 233
Payers with Contracts for Flat Encounter Rate Co-Pay ................................................. 236
Specialties ............................................................................................................................... 241
Statement Messages............................................................................................................... 242
Task Types .............................................................................................................................. 243
Taxonomy Codes .................................................................................................................... 244
User Notes Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 245
Zip Codes ................................................................................................................................ 246
File Maintenance > Master Files > Practice ______________________________________ 247
Appointment Reminders .......................................................................................................... 247
Default User Preferences – General ....................................................................................... 248
Default User Preferences – Locations .................................................................................... 249
Default User Preferences – Scheduling .................................................................................. 250
Dunning Messages.................................................................................................................. 251
Letters ..................................................................................................................................... 252
Marketing Plans ....................................................................................................................... 254
Patient Statuses ...................................................................................................................... 255
Recall Plans ............................................................................................................................ 256
Report Types ........................................................................................................................... 258
Statement Parameter Mappings ............................................................................................. 259
Task Approval Profiles ............................................................................................................ 260
10
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Task Workgroups .................................................................................................................... 261
Practices > Import Tab ............................................................................................................ 262
File Maintenance > Libraries __________________________________________________ 263
Library Concepts ..................................................................................................................... 263
Behavioral Health Billing ......................................................................................................... 265
Charge Options Tab............................................................................................................ 265
Claim Options Tab .............................................................................................................. 267
Budget Statement.................................................................................................................... 269
Claim Edits .............................................................................................................................. 270
Claim Modifiers ........................................................................................................................ 271
Anesthesia Modifier ............................................................................................................ 271
Rental Modifier .................................................................................................................... 272
Behavioral Health Modifier .................................................................................................. 273
Claim Printing .......................................................................................................................... 274
Common Rules Tab ............................................................................................................ 274
Exceptions When Payer is Primary/Secondary/Tertiary Tabs ............................................ 275
Claim Status Profiles ............................................................................................................... 276
Diagnosis Codes ..................................................................................................................... 277
General Tab ........................................................................................................................ 280
Payer Tab............................................................................................................................ 281
Other Tab ............................................................................................................................ 282
Add Codes from ICD Master File ........................................................................................ 283
GEMS Update ..................................................................................................................... 284
Eligibility Profiles ..................................................................................................................... 287
Encounter Rate Billing ............................................................................................................. 288
Setup for Encounter Rate Billing ......................................................................................... 290
GPCI Codes ............................................................................................................................ 317
GPCI Import ........................................................................................................................ 320
NDC ......................................................................................................................................... 321
NDC Import ......................................................................................................................... 323
Non-Coordinated SIM Library ................................................................................................. 326
Places of Service..................................................................................................................... 330
Reason Codes ......................................................................................................................... 331
HIPAA X12 Standard Reason Codes ................................................................................. 331
Reason Code Priority .......................................................................................................... 334
Remittance Profiles ................................................................................................................. 335
RVU ......................................................................................................................................... 336
RVU Import ......................................................................................................................... 339
Service Items........................................................................................................................... 340
General Tab ........................................................................................................................ 342
Other Tab ............................................................................................................................ 348
Payer Tab............................................................................................................................ 349
Setup for Roll-Up Billing ...................................................................................................... 351
Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code ................................................................................... 351
Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code ........................................................................................ 358
11
NextGen Healthcare
Labels Tab .......................................................................................................................... 366
Notes/Significant Events Tab .............................................................................................. 367
Drugs Tab ........................................................................................................................... 368
RVU Update ........................................................................................................................ 370
SIM Exceptions ................................................................................................................... 371
SIM Global Update .............................................................................................................. 374
SIM Groups ......................................................................................................................... 377
SIM Pricing Regions ................................................................................................................ 378
SIM Pricing Template .............................................................................................................. 379
Statement ................................................................................................................................ 380
Submitter Profiles .................................................................................................................... 381
Common Options Tab ......................................................................................................... 381
Exception Options Tab........................................................................................................ 382
Real Time Adjudication Tab ................................................................................................ 382
Tax Exemption ........................................................................................................................ 383
State Tab............................................................................................................................. 383
Location Tab ....................................................................................................................... 384
Tax Rate .................................................................................................................................. 385
Types of Service ...................................................................................................................... 388
Contracts ................................................................................................................................. 389
NextGen® Contract Utility ................................................................................................... 389
General Tab ........................................................................................................................ 390
Fee Schedule Tab ............................................................................................................... 393
Modifier Reimbursement Tab ............................................................................................. 396
Multiple Procedure Discounting Tab ................................................................................... 397
Link Contract to Payer(s) and Providers ............................................................................. 398
Contract Exceptions ............................................................................................................ 400
Link Contract Exception to Provider(s) ........................................................................... 402
Contract Global Update ...................................................................................................... 403
Contracts for Encounter Rate Billing ................................................................................... 406
Contract with 80% Adjustment and 20% Co-Pay ........................................................... 407
Contract with 100% Adjustment ..................................................................................... 411
Preferences ________________________________________________________________ 414
Enterprise Preferences............................................................................................................ 415
General Tab ........................................................................................................................ 415
UDS Tab ............................................................................................................................. 419
Autoflow Stored/Procedure Tab .......................................................................................... 421
Client Defined Tab .............................................................................................................. 422
ICS Tab ............................................................................................................................... 424
Libraries Tab ....................................................................................................................... 425
External Tab ........................................................................................................................ 426
Vendor Labels Tab .............................................................................................................. 427
Practice Preferences ............................................................................................................... 428
Alerts Tab ............................................................................................................................ 428
Appt Scheduling Tab ........................................................................................................... 432
AutoFlow Tab ...................................................................................................................... 437
Budget Accounts Tab .......................................................................................................... 438
Charge Entry Tab ................................................................................................................ 441
Chart Tab ............................................................................................................................ 445
Claims Tab .......................................................................................................................... 448
12
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contract Edits Tab .............................................................................................................. 451
Data\Fee Ticket Tab ........................................................................................................... 455
EHR Tab ............................................................................................................................. 458
Encounters Tab ................................................................................................................... 459
External Tab ........................................................................................................................ 464
Forms Tab ........................................................................................................................... 465
General Tab ........................................................................................................................ 467
Holidays Tab ....................................................................................................................... 471
Imaging Tab ........................................................................................................................ 473
Invoices Tab ........................................................................................................................ 474
Itemized Bills Tab ................................................................................................................ 476
Libraries Tab ....................................................................................................................... 478
Medication Tab ................................................................................................................... 480
NextGenEDI Uploading Tab ............................................................................................... 481
Order Module Tab ............................................................................................................... 482
Patient Information Bar Tab ................................................................................................ 483
Patient Pay Tab .................................................................................................................. 484
Payment Processing Tab .................................................................................................... 485
Printing Tab ......................................................................................................................... 486
Provider Tab ....................................................................................................................... 487
Reports Tab ........................................................................................................................ 488
Resources Tab .................................................................................................................... 489
RTS Tab .............................................................................................................................. 490
Sliding Fee Tab ................................................................................................................... 491
Statements Tab................................................................................................................... 493
Tasks Tab ........................................................................................................................... 500
Taxes Tab ........................................................................................................................... 502
Trans Codes Tab ................................................................................................................ 504
Transactions Tab ................................................................................................................ 506
Wait List Tab ....................................................................................................................... 510
File Maintenance > Code Tables _______________________________________________ 511
Code Tables ............................................................................................................................ 511
Scheduling Administration ___________________________________________________ 516
Practice Preferences > Appt Scheduling Tab ......................................................................... 516
Classes .................................................................................................................................... 517
Resources ............................................................................................................................... 518
General Tab ........................................................................................................................ 519
External Tab ........................................................................................................................ 520
Events ..................................................................................................................................... 521
Overrides Tab ..................................................................................................................... 523
Default Resource Tab ......................................................................................................... 524
Limits Tab............................................................................................................................ 525
SIMs Tab ............................................................................................................................. 526
Locations Tab ..................................................................................................................... 527
External Tab ........................................................................................................................ 528
Note Template Tab ............................................................................................................. 529
Event Chains ........................................................................................................................... 530
Categories ............................................................................................................................... 532
Weekly Templates ................................................................................................................... 533
Daily Templates ....................................................................................................................... 535
13
NextGen Healthcare
Apply Templates ...................................................................................................................... 537
Apply Weekly Templates .................................................................................................... 538
Apply Daily Templates ........................................................................................................ 539
Template Exceptions .......................................................................................................... 540
Fee Tickets ________________________________________________________________ 541
Example NextGen Fee Ticket ................................................................................................. 541
Fee Ticket Header and Footer ................................................................................................ 542
Fee Ticket Body ...................................................................................................................... 542
Example Fee Ticket Body in Microsoft® Excel ................................................................... 543
Supported File Formats ...................................................................................................... 543
Convert Excel Format to Supported Format using Microsoft® PowerPoint ................... 544
Convert Excel Format to Supported Format using Microsoft® Paint ............................. 548
Import Converted Fee Ticket into NextGen® EPM ................................................................. 552
Import a Fee Ticket for the Practice .................................................................................... 552
Import a Fee Ticket for a Practice > Provider ..................................................................... 552
Import a Fee Ticket for a Practice > Event > Provider ........................................................ 553
Import a Fee Ticket for a Practice > Location > Provider ................................................... 553
14
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Preparation for System Configuration Training
It is expected that all users participating in the NextGen System Configuration training will be
adept at using a computer, a mouse and basic Windows concepts.
The following is a list of items that each client should gather beforehand and have available
during System Configuration Training:

Clearinghouse and Direct Payer Enrollment:
 Has the enrollment process been initiated with a clearinghouse and/or direct to payer?
 If yes, has the enrollment been approved?
 If yes, have the appropriate Submitter ID numbers been received from the
clearinghouse/payer?

Current Fee Schedule: Complete listing of all services performed including the current price
for each.

Locations: Complete listing of all locations in which services are rendered. The list should
include the name, address and phone number information for each location.
 Offices
 Hospices
 Hospitals
 Labs
 Nursing Homes
 Ambulatory Surgery Centers
 Others

Rendering Providers: Complete listing of all rendering providers within the practice. The
list should include the following for each provider:
 Name
 Address / Phone
 Tax ID
 Taxonomy Code/Specialty
 NPI #
 UPIN #
 Payer specific provider numbers (eg: Medicare, Medicaid, etc.)

Referring Providers: Complete listing of all referring providers for the practice. The list
should include the following for each provider:
 Name
 Address / Phone
 NPI #
 UPIN #

Group Information: If the practice is a group (where charges are billed under a group
name), list the appropriate group information. Also indicate to which payers the group
designation is filed.
 Name
 Address / Phone
 Tax ID
 NPI #
 Group Payer specific group numbers (eg: Medicare, Medicaid, etc.)
15
NextGen Healthcare

Payers: Complete listing of all payers to which claims will be filed. The list should include
the following information:
 Payer Name
 Address / Phone
 Claim Type (1500, UB, ADA)
 Media Type (Electronic 837 or Paper)
 Clearinghouse ID #

Appointment Schedule Templates: Copies of current templates for all providers and
resources for which appointments are made.

Sliding Fee Schedules: Copies of schedules if the practice adjusts charges based on family
size and income for those patients that qualify for sliding fee discounts.

Fee Ticket(s): Paper copies of all fee tickets (super-bills, charge sheets) currently being
utilized.

Sample Claim Forms: Paper copies of actual claims (1500, UB, ADA) for large payers.
Also, paper copies of actual state specific claim forms, if applicable.

Letters, Forms and/or Labels: Paper copies of all applicable forms currently being utilized.

Users: Complete listing of names for all users and their role within the organization.
FOR ON-SITE TRAINING ONLY:
 Overhead projector (for NextGen Trainer)
 Overhead projection screen
 Computer workstation for each trainee
16
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Getting Started
This Workbook has been organized to follow the training agenda for System Configuration
Training (SCT).
Application Launcher
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Getting Started Setting Up NextGen
Application Launcher
The Application Launcher is used to access the various NextGen applications. From the list
displayed, click on the desired application to gain access to that application.
NOTE: System Configuration Training involves the applications circled below.
17
NextGen Healthcare
Create Shortcut/Menu Item
Shortcuts icons and menu items for the NextGen applications can be created from the Application
Launcher window. This is useful if it is desired to have some users access an application directly
from an icon on their desktop or from the NextGen menu as opposed to using the Application
Launcher window.
Click on the Create Shortcut/Menu Item in the lower right-hand corner of the Application
Launcher window.
Applications: Select the desired NextGen application(s) on the left
Applies To:
Select if the shortcut/menu item(s) should apply to the current user only or to all
users
Location:
Select where the shortcuts should be available; as icons on the desktop, as items
on the NextGen menu, or both
NOTE: Special considerations should be taken into account when using this function in a Citrix or
Terminal Services network environment.
18
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
SetDB
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Getting Started Setting Up NextGen
Set DB Application
The SetDB application is used to switch between NextGen databases. The initial installation of
the system will include four databases:




NGProd
NGTest
NGDemo
NGDevl
The database displayed in the upper right-hand corner is the one that is currently being
accessed. To change to another database, click on the desired database on the left and then
click the Set Database button in the lower right-hand corner.
Clients utilizing a Terminal Services environment where NextGen is hosted by a third-party
vendor, such as Dell, will not typically use SetDB. In a hosted environment, each database has
its own IP address and is setup with a separate shortcut icon on the remote desktop. To change
to another database, double-click on the desired icon.
IMPORTANT NOTE: All tables in File Maintenance should be built in the NGProd database.
This database will then be copied to the NGTest database just prior to Core Group Training. All
end user training and claims testing for NextGen® EPM will take place in the NGTest database.
19
NextGen Healthcare
License Manager
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Getting Started Setting Up NextGen
License Manager Application
The License Manager application will display NextGen products (applications) on the left. The
products displayed are those for which the system is licensed to use.
With a specific product highlighted on the left, the license Activation Date, Expiration Date,
License Limit and Current Usage for that product will be displayed on the right. The values
displayed are dependent on the database that is currently selected within SetDB (eg: NGDemo,
NGDevl, NGProd or NGTest).
A license Key will be applied when the NextGen system is initially installed. License Keys would
need to be updated under the following circumstances:

Additional practice and/or provider licenses have been purchased

A database is copied and restored into another database (eg: NGProd is copied and
restored into NGTest before Core Group Training).
NOTE: After copying NGProd and restoring it into NGTest, it will be necessary to change the file
locations in System Administrator > Universal Preferences to point to the NGTest database.
20
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
System Administrator
The System Administrator application provides IT and Management staff the ability to setup,
maintain and secure the NextGen system.
The following can be done in System Administrator:







Define Universal Preferences settings that apply to all users on the system
Define password requirements for all users on the system
Create practice level user groups and define security access rights for each group
Create users and assign each user to the appropriate group(s) within the appropriate
practice(s)
Restrict users from accessing specific patient records
Activate Knowledge Base Model (KBM) template sets for NextGen® EHR
Define Provider Approval Queue (PAQ) parameters for NextGen® EHR
21
NextGen Healthcare
File Maintenance
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
File Maintenance
Using File Maintenance
File Maintenance consists of the various tables that are needed in the setup and configuration of
the NextGen® EHR, EPM, ICS, NextMD and Optik applications.
The information entered in these tables will include data that is used for maintaining patient
clinical records, entering charges and payments, billing and submitting claims, collections, and
reporting.
The structure within File Maintenance divides all tables into five categories:





22
Code Tables
Libraries
System Master Files
Practice Master Files
Master Lists
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Understanding the NextGen System File Structure
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Introduction to NextGen Organizational Levels
Determining and Assigning Your Organizational Levels
NOTE: The information outlined below is intended to serve as an introduction to the hierarchy at
which data is stored in the NextGen applications. It is not an all-inclusive list of every data
element within the applications.
23
NextGen Healthcare
System Level
A NextGen System is equivalent to a database. The System consists of one or more Enterprises.
Some data is stored at the System Level, which means the data exists for all users within the
System.
System Level Information:

File Maintenance > Code Tables

File Maintenance > Master Files > System

File Maintenance > Master Lists
o All except those from Enterprise Preferences > Client Defined tab

System Administrator > Users

NextGen® EHR Knowledge Base Model (KBM)

Master Person Index (MPI)
o Person MPI information includes demographics (name, DOB, gender, address, etc.)
and the insurance attached to the demographic record. By default, the MPI is
defined at the System Level. This implies that all users on the System access a
common patient MPI record. Changes made to that common patient MPI record are
seen by all users on the System. In this definition, System is synonymous to MPI
access.
Optional System Level Information:

24
File Maintenance > Libraries
o System level only if all practices from all enterprises have been given Practice
Access
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Enterprise Level
An Enterprise is a grouping of one or more Practices. Some data is stored at the Enterprise
Level, which means the data exists for all users within the same Enterprise.
Enterprise Level Information:

Enterprise Preferences

File Maintenance > Master Lists
o Only those from Enterprise Preferences > Client Defined tab

NextGen® EHR Drug Utilization Review (DUR)

Demographic Interfaces between NextGen and External Systems
Optional Enterprise Level Information:

Master Person Index (MPI)
o If a single person MPI record cannot be shared by all users on the System, an
additional MPI record is needed. This can be achieved by configuring the System
with multiple Enterprises, each Enterprise having a separate MPI record. This
configuration must be done by NextGen Support. By changing from a single
System level MPI record to separate Enterprise level MPI records, the Enterprise is
synonymous to MPI access.

File Maintenance > Libraries
o Enterprise level only if all practices within the same enterprise have been given
Practice Access

NextGen® EHR Enterprise Chart
o Enterprise level only if Enterprise Preferences > General tab > “Enterprise Chart” is
enabled
 The following EHR chart information is shared between Practices within the
same Enterprise:
- Allergies, Procedures, Diagnoses (read only), Images (read only),
Documents (read only), Medical Records Templates (read only), Lab Order
Results (read only), Medications, To Do Tasks (read only), Case
Management
Reports
o By default, reports include only the Practice in which they are created. Reports can
be Enterprise level only if users with security access rights select Practices within the
same Enterprise and/or from another Enterprise on the report.

25
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Level
A Practice is equivalent to a business entity that shares patient information. Each Practice
maintains its own clinical chart (EHR) and financial chart (EPM) for each patient. A Practice
consists of one or more Locations. Some data is stored at the Practice Level, which means the
data exists for all users within the same Practice.
Practice Level Information:














Practice Preferences
File Maintenance > Libraries
File Maintenance > Master Files > System
o Only those System Level tables that include Practice Level Information (Practice tab)
 DME Regions
 Locations
 Payers
 Providers
 Task Types
File Maintenance > Master Files > Practice
Scheduling Administration
Appointments
NextGen® EPM Chart
NextGen® EHR Chart
NextGen® EHR Workflow
Encounters
Case Management
Reports
o
By default, reports include only the Practice in which they are created
System Administrator > Groups > Security Rights
Interfaces between NextGen and External Systems
o Appointments
o Charges
o Labs
Optional Practice Level Information:

26
File Maintenance > Master Files > System
o Only if Enterprise Preferences > General tab > “Practice Access” is enabled
 Payers
 Providers
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Location Level
A Location is equivalent to a place where patients are seen by providers and at which services
are rendered. Locations are used for billing, clinical and reporting purposes. Each Location is
typically a separate physical location with a unique address. However, multiple locations can be
created for the same address (eg: Family Practice, Pediatrics, OB/Gyn, etc. within a MultiSpecialty clinic). Locations may include Clinics, Hospitals, Nursing Homes, Ambulatory Surgery
Centers, etc.
The Locations table in File Maintenance is a System Level table, which means any one Location
can be associated to multiple Practices.
Tax ID Numbers
For billing purposes, Tax ID Numbers can be setup in File Maintenance at the following levels:




Practice
Location
Provider Group
Individual Provider
Reporting by Tax ID can be accomplished by filtering reports at the following levels:




Practice
Location
Provider Subgrouping
Individual Provider
27
NextGen Healthcare
Association
An Association is a means of limiting access to patient Master Person Index (MPI) information to
a subset of Practices within the same Enterprise. By default, all Practices belong to the same
Association. If needed, additional Associations can be created in System Administrator and
assigned to the appropriate Practice(s). Practices within the same Association can access and
share patient MPI information. Practices outside of an Association can only access a patient’s
MPI information from within another Association by using the “Secured Patient Lookup” feature.
In the example below, Practice 2 and Practice 3 initially belonged to the same Association and
were able to access and share patient MPI information.
Association A
28
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
In the next example below, Practice 2 and Practice 3 have been put into separate Associations.
Therefore, each practice no longer has access to patient MPI information in the other practice
unless a “secure patient lookup” is performed.
Association A
Association B
29
NextGen Healthcare
System Basics
Login
Users can login to a NextGen application by entering their User Name and Password from
System Administrator.
An Enterprise and a Practice must be selected upon login.
The upper right-hand side of the Login window displays the NextGen Database and the current
Version of software running. The NextGen Disclaimer is displayed at the bottom of the window.
30
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Keyboard Shortcuts
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Alt + F4 - Closes the NextGen application
2. Ctrl + F4 - Closes the active window within the NextGen application
3. Alt + Underlined Letter - Selects an option (eg: Alt + N selects Next)
4. Alt + Down Arrow - Drops down the pick list options
5. Down Arrow to highlight, then Space bar - Selects/deselects an option from a pick list
6. Alt + Tab - Switches between open applications
7. Ctrl + Tab - Switches between one open window and another within the NextGen application
8. Shift + Tab - Tabs back to the previous field
9. Ctrl + C – Copies text
10. Ctrl + V - Pastes copied text
11. Esc – Closes alerts within the NextGen application
*These are basic Microsoft Windows commands and may not all work with some remotely
connected systems.
31
NextGen Healthcare
File Maintenance > Master Files > System
Enterprises
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Introduction To NextGen Organizational Levels
Creating Enterprises
Enterprises are used in NextGen to group one or more practices. Practices within the same
enterprise are able to share person/patient demographic information and many of the tables
within File Maintenance.
Each new NETXGEN installation comes with a pre-defined Enterprise called “Default Enterprise”.
It has a system assigned Enterprise ID of 00001.
Enterprise ID:
This is a system assigned number that cannot be modified.
Name:
Change the name “Default Enterprise” to the actual name of the enterprise being defined.
Enterprise Licensing:
Select the NextGen applications to be used in the enterprise being defined. Each application
selected uses an enterprise license within the License Manager application.
Enterprise Preferences
Enterprise Preferences can be accessed from the Preferences button. These preference
settings will affect all practices within the enterprise.
32
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Enterprise Preferences > UDS Tab
Required Fields for UDS (Uniform Data System) Report:
NextGen Consulting Services provides a separate application external to the NextGen application
that retrieves data from EPM that is needed for UDS reporting.
In order for the UDS application to retrieve the following information from EPM, the corresponding
tables must be created in File Maintenance. Refer to the File Maintenance > Master Lists
section of this work book for more information on the setup of these tables.
Display person UDS fields:
Must be selected in order to have the following fields display on the patient demographics screen;
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Homeless Status
Migrant Worker Status
Language Barrier
Primary Medical Coverage
Public Housing Primary Care
School Based Health Center
Tribal Affiliation (Indian Health Services only)
Blood Quantum (Indian Health Services only)
Head of Household
IHS Eligibility Status (Indian Health Services only)
Classification/Beneficiary (Indian Health Services only)
Descendency (Indian Health Services only)
Family Information
Veteran Status
Any or all of the above fields can be made required in patient demographics by selecting the
appropriate check-box.
NOTE: Making these fields required in Enterprise Preferences will make them a required
entry for patients in all practices in the enterprise. If the fields should be required for only
specific practices within the enterprise, then they should instead be made required in
Practice Preferences on the Appt Scheduling and/or Chart tabs.
33
NextGen Healthcare
Enterprise Preferences > Client Defined Tab
Fourteen custom client defined fields can be created as needed for capturing additional
information as part of person/patient demographics. Though these custom fields are not used for
UDS reporting, they can be included on other reports.
A corresponding table must be created in File Maintenance for each client defined field. Refer to
the File Maintenance > Master Lists section of this work book for more information on the setup
of these Enterprise Client Defined tables.
Any or all of the client defined fields can be made Required Always (people and patients) or
Required on Chart Creation (patients only) in demographics by selecting the appropriate
column.
NOTE: Making these fields required in Enterprise Preferences will make them a required
entry for people/patients in all practices in the enterprise. If the fields should be required
for only specific practices within the enterprise, then they should instead be made
required in Practice Preferences on the Appt Scheduling and/or Chart tabs.
34
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Enterprise Preferences > Client Defined Tab (continued)
Race, Language, Religion, Church and/or Ethnicity can be made Required Always (people
and patients) in demographics by selecting the column.
NOTE: Making these fields required in Enterprise Preferences will make them a required
entry for people/patients in all practices in the enterprise. If the fields should be required
for only specific practices within the enterprise, then they should instead be made
required in Practice Preferences on the Appt Scheduling and/or Chart tabs.
In addition Race and Ethnicity can be set to display on the General demographics tab or the on
UDS tab on the Add/Modify Patient Information window in EPM.
35
NextGen Healthcare
Locations
eLearning Curriculum 1:
eLearning Course 1:
Introduction To NextGen Organizational Levels
Creating Locations
eLearning Curriculum 2:
eLearning Course 2:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master File – Locations
Locations are used in NextGen to indicate where patients have services rendered by a provider.
Locations are linked to one or more practices in the Practices table. Examples might include
doctor’s offices, hospitals, nursing homes, ambulatory surgery centers, etc.
Multiple locations can be created for a single address. This may be useful for purposes of
reporting by location.
For example:
Northside Office – Medical
Northside Office – Dental
Northside Office – Behavioral Health
Each new NETXGEN installation comes with a pre-defined Location called “Default Location”.
Change the name to the actual name of the location being defined. Create additional locations as
needed.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load this table.
Location Defaults Tab
36
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Location Name:
Change the name “Default Location” to the actual name of the location being defined.
Address:
Enter the address, city, state, zip, county and country for the location being defined.
NOTE: Electronic claims in ASC X12 Version 5010 format require locations to have a
9 digit zip code.
Location Type:
This is used only for HL7 interfaces to external systems.
B = Bed
L = Other Location
C = Clinic
N = Nursing Home
D = Department
O = operating Room
E = Exam Room
R = Room
Associated Color:
Select a color for the location being defined as it should appear in the appointment book.
Place of Service:
Enter the place of service that is needed for charges in Box 24B on 1500 claims for services
performed at the location being defined.
NOTE: Place of service can be defined for each SIM code in the Service Item Library. If
POS is blank for a SIM code, the POS defined for the location will be used. If POS is
blank for the SIM code and for the location, then POS is a required entry to the end user
during charge posting.
Internal Location:
The Internal Location setting is used to setup location/provider cross references for use in
NextGen® EHR. A location must be selected as an internal location in order to cross-reference
the location with providers in the Providers table.
Display in Scheduling:
Select this check-box to have the location display in NextGen® EPM as an available Service
Location option when creating scheduling templates in Scheduling Administration.
Facility Location:
Select this check-box to have the location appear as an available Facility in the Create Encounter
and Encounter Maintenance screens.
NOTE: The HCFA Box 32 check-box on the Defaults-2 tab must also be selected for this
to appear as a Facility in NextGen® EPM.
Location Level SubGrouping One and SubGrouping Two:
Select one or two Location Subgroupings. These are used to group Locations for reporting
purposes in EPM.
NOTE: The captions for these two fields can be changed in Enterprise Preferences >
General tab. The subgroups listed and available for selection in these fields are from the
Location Subgroupings master list table in File Maintenance.
Practices:
Each location must be attached to the Practice(s) in which it will be used.
37
NextGen Healthcare
Defaults 2 Tab
The Defaults-2 tab allows for entry of additional information that may be needed on claims for the
location being defined.
National Provider ID:
Leave blank unless the location being defined is external and not part of the practice (eg: Hospital,
Nursing Home, etc.). Otherwise, enter the NPI number needed on claims for the external location.
Facility Entity ID:
Enter Service Location for all locations being defined unless instructed otherwise by a NextGen
EDI/Claims Analyst during claims testing.
CLIA ID:
Enter the CLIA number (Clinical Laboratory Improvement Amendment) that is needed on claims
for lab services performed in the location being defined, if applicable.
Mammo Certification:
Enter the Mammography Certification number that is needed on claims for mammography
services performed in the location being defined, if applicable.
Location Tax ID:
Enter the Tax ID for the location being defined, if different from the Tax ID defined for the
practice. This can be included on electronic 837I Institutional/UB claims if selected in the
Submitter Profile Library.
38
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
DME Provider Nbr:
If the practice does Durable Medical Equipment billing, enter the DME Provider Number needed
on DMERC claims for the location being defined. If blank, the DME Provider Number defined for
the practice will be used on claims.
DME NPI:
If the practice does Durable Medical Equipment billing, enter the National Provider ID needed on
DMERC claims for the location being defined. If blank, the DME NPI defined for the practice will
be used on claims.
HCFA Box 32:
Select this check-box to have the location name and address appear in box 32 on 1500 claims.
NOTE: This check-box must also be selected for the location to appear as a Facility in
the Create Encounter and Encounter Maintenance screens.
Medicare / BCBS / Medicaid / Other Payer Facility ID:
Enter the payer specific Facility ID numbers that are needed in Box 32 on 1500 claims for the
location being defined, if applicable.
39
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Tab
For clients with multiple practices using the same location, the Practice Tab allows for entry of
information specific to the location being defined that may be needed on claims for the current
practice only. Information entered here for the current practice will override the information
entered on the Defaults-2 tab for all other practices.
In addition, an alternate Remit To address can be defined for the location that will appear on
statements.
Use practice level claims data:
Select this check-box to enter practice specific information needed on claims for the location
being defined.
NOTE: Any information entered here will override the information defined on the
Location Defaults-1 Tab for all other practices.
Use alternate “Remit To” address:
Enter the name/address that should appear on statements in place of the name/address defined
for the practice.
NOTE: The alternate name/address is used only if the “Print One Statement for Each
Location” option is selected when the statements are printed.
40
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Credentialing Tab
The Credentialing Tab allows for entry of information specific to the various credentials for the
location being defined.
NOTE: The options available for selection in the Credentialing Type field must first be
created in File Maintenance > Master Lists > Credentialing.
41
NextGen Healthcare
External Tab
The External tab is used when interfaces will be implemented between NextGen and one or more
external systems. This tab allows a cross-reference to be defined between the NextGen location
and the external system location.
External ID:
Enter the ID for the location as it is known on the external system.
External System:
Select the external system to which NextGen will be interfaced.
42
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Other Tabs
Chart Tracking Tab:
The Chart Tracking tab displays only if the system is licensed for the NextGen® Chart Tracking
module.
NOTE: Chart Tracking is a legacy module that is no longer available to clients.
Optik Tab:
The Optik tab displays only if the system is licensed for the NextGen® Optical Management
application. This tab is used in the setup of a VisionWeb interface by downloading the VisionWeb
catalog and supplier accounts prior to implementing Optical Management.
NOTE: Training on Optical Management is covered in separate training sessions.
Order Module Tab:
The Order Module tab is used in the setup of Medical Necessity in NextGen® EHR. Medicare
Part A or Part B and the state for the location can be defined. These parameters are then used
with Medical Necessity checks in EHR when lab orders are entered for Medicare patients.
NOTE: Training on Medical Necessity in EHR is covered in a separate training session.
Payment Processing Tab:
The Payment Processing tab is used in the setup of credit card and electronic check transactions
in NextGen® EPM. Location specific credentials assigned by TransFirst or InstaMed (transaction
processing vendors) can be defined. These credentials are then included in patient payment
transactions submitted from EPM to the vendor for real-time approval/denial results.
NOTE: Training on credit card transactions in EPM is covered in a separate WebEx training
session.
43
NextGen Healthcare
Practices
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Introduction To NextGen Organizational Levels
Creating Practices
A Practice is typically an entity of providers, locations, etc. that share a common Tax ID number.
Each practice consists of one or more locations from the Locations table. Practices within the
same enterprise are able to share person/patient demographic information and many of the
tables within File Maintenance.
Each new NETXGEN installation comes with a pre-defined Practice called “Default Practice”. It
has a system assigned Practice ID of 0001.
Practice Defaults Tab
Practice ID:
This is a system assigned number that cannot be modified.
Practice Name:
Change the name “Default Practice” to the actual name of the practice being defined.
44
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Address:
Enter the address for the practice as it should appear on Statements, Fee Tickets, Invoices,
Encounter Bills, Budget Letters and Demand Account/Encounter Letters.
Remit To Address:
If applicable, enter an alternate address for the practice as it should appear in the “Remit To”
section on Statements, Fee Tickets, Invoices, Encounter Bills, Budget Letters and Demand
Account/Encounter Letters.
Tax ID Nbr:
Enter the Tax ID number for the practice being defined.
DME Provider Nbr:
If the practice does Durable Medical Equipment billing, enter the DME Provider Number needed
on DMERC claims.
DME NPI:
If the practice does Durable Medical Equipment billing, enter the National Provider ID needed on
DMERC claims.
Practice Licensing:
Select the NextGen applications to be used in the practice being defined. Each application
selected uses a practice license within the License Manager application.
Locations:
From the yellow folder, select from the list of available Locations on the left those that should be
included in this practice by moving each location to the right with the blue arrow.
NOTE: At least one “schedulable” location must be included in every practice.
45
NextGen Healthcare
External Tab
The External tab is used when interfaces will be implemented between NextGen and one or more
external systems. This tab allows a cross-reference to be defined between the NextGen practice
and the external system practice/enterprise.
External Practice ID:
Enter the ID for the practice as it is known on the external system.
External Enterprise ID:
Enter the ID for the enterprise as it is known on the external system.
External System:
Select the external system to which NextGen will be interfaced.
Effective Date:
Enter the effective date for the items selected below to be exported through the interface.
Export Options:
Select the items to be exported through the interface.
46
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Import Tab
For clients with multiple practices using the same Practice Level Tables, the Import Tab allows
selected tables to be imported from one practice into another practice.
Choose practice to import from:
Select the practice from which the tables will be imported.
Choose data to import:
Select the tables to be imported from the above practice and click the Import button.
47
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Preferences
Practice Preferences can be accessed from the Preferences button. These preference settings
will affect only the current practice.
Practice Preferences > Chart Tab
Chart User Defined 1-8 Name:
Eight custom client defined fields can be created as needed for capturing additional information
as part of a patient’s chart. These fields can be included on reports. They are free text fields in
the chart.
Any or all of the above fields can be made required in a patient’s chart by selecting the
appropriate check-box.
Required Fields:
Any or all of the UDS related fields can also be made required in a patient’s chart by selecting
the appropriate check-boxes.
48
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
System Administrator
eLearning Curriculum:
Setting Up System Security
System Administrator allows for the management of security Groups and Users within each
practice. In addition, several system level options are available that pertain to all users in all
practices in all enterprises.
49
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Level Security
Groups
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Security
Security - Creating and Managing User Groups
New Group
Groups are created within each practice for Users with similar roles that require the same security
access rights. Groups must be created before users can be created. The group defines the
security access rights for the users that will be assigned to that group. Users are then added the
appropriate group(s).
To create a new Group, right-click on the Practice for which the new group is to be created and
select New Group from the menu.
NOTE: Several Groups come pre-installed. These Groups should be reviewed and modified as
needed before creating additional Groups. Refer to the “5.x Security Groups – Access Options
and Descriptions” document provided by your NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
50
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
New Group – General Tab
Name:
Enter a name for the group being defined.
Description:
Enter a description for the group being defined.
EPM User Prefs - General:
Select the desired user preferences created in the Default User Prefs - General table in File
Maintenance for the group being defined.
EPM User Prefs - Locations:
Select the desired user preferences created in the Default User Prefs - Locations table in File
Maintenance for the group being defined.
EPM User Prefs - Scheduling:
Select the desired user preferences created in the Default User Prefs - Scheduling table in File
Maintenance for the group being defined.
NOTE: Setup of the Default User Prefs – General, Locations and Scheduling tables will
be covered during Core Group Training.
View Deactivated:
Enables users to view deactivated users from the specified group.
Save:
Click the Save button to save the new group being defined.
51
NextGen Healthcare
New Group - Rights Tab
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Security
Security – Rights and Permissions
By default, a newly created Group has full security access rights to all options available in all
NextGen applications.
To customize the security access rights for the new Group being defined, it is necessary to
evaluate each of the available options listed under the +Modules and +Operations categories to
determine how each option should be set for the new Group.
NOTE: Refer to the “5.x Security Groups - Access Options and Descriptions” document provided
by your NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
52
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
+Modules:
Items listed under this category have five security access rights options available.
Security access rights may be granted to the entire category or separately to any sub-category.
For example, security access rights may be granted at the following levels:



+Modules
+Modules > +File Maintenance
+Modules > +File Maintenance > Locations
View:
Allows users to view existing items
Add:
Allows users to add new items
Update:
Allows users to update/modify existing items
Delete:
Allows users to delete/hide existing items
Print:
Allows user to print existing items
(Category)
(Sub-category)
(Sub-sub-category)
+Operations:
Items listed under this category have two security access rights options available.
Security access rights may be granted to the entire category or separately to any sub-category.
For example, security access rights may be granted at the following levels:



+Operations
+Operations > +Charge Entry
+Operations > +Charge Entry > Charge Price Override
Yes:
Users are able to perform the function
No:
Users are not able to perform the function
(Category)
(Sub-category)
(Sub-sub-category)
53
NextGen Healthcare
Import Permissions
Security access rights for an existing group can be imported into another group. This can be a
time saver when multiple groups are to be created. Instead of setting all security access rights for
each group individually, the following options might be considered.
Highest to Lowest:
 Create the first group with the most security access rights
 Import Permissions from the first group into the second group
 Modify the second group by taking away additional security access rights
 Import Permissions from the second group into the third group
 Modify the third group by taking away additional security access rights
 Etc.
Lowest to Highest:
 Create the first group with the fewest security access rights
 Import Permissions from the first group into the second group
 Modify the second group by adding security access rights
 Import Permissions from the second group into the third group
 Modify the third group by adding security access rights
 Etc.
To import permissions:



54
Select a group to import permissions into on the left side of the window
Select the Rights tab
Click the Import Permissions button
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8



The Select Group window displays
Select a group to import permissions from
Click Add

An alert displays asking if the user wants to import the permissions



Click Yes to import the rights and permissions
Click No to exit the Select Group dialog box without making any changes
Click Save to save all changes made
55
NextGen Healthcare
Export Permissions
Security access rights for an existing group can be exported into one or more groups. This can
be a time saver when multiple groups are to be created. Instead of setting all security access
rights for each group individually, the following options might be considered.
Highest to Lowest:
 Create the first group with the most security access rights
 Export Permissions from the first group into the second group
 Modify the second group by taking away additional security access rights
 Export Permissions from the second group into the third group
 Modify the third group by taking away additional security access rights
 Etc.
Lowest to Highest:
 Create the first group with the fewest security access rights
 Export Permissions from the first group into the second group
 Modify the second group by adding security access rights
 Export Permissions from the second group into the third group
 Modify the third group by adding security access rights
 Etc.
To export permissions:



56
Select a group to export permissions from on the left side of the window
Select the Rights tab
Click the Export Permissions button
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8

The Find Groups window displays





Enter part of the group name in the Group Name Contains field
The list of groups matching the filter criteria displays
Select one or more groups to export permissions into
Click OK
An alert displays asking if the user wants to export the permissions to the selected
groups



Click Yes to export the rights and permissions
Click No to exit the window without making any changes
Click Save to save all changes made
57
NextGen Healthcare
Add Existing Groups
The Add Existing Groups option allows a group that exists in one practice to be added into a
second practice. The group’s Name, Description, and security access Rights are copied into the
second practice, but the Users are not.
To Add Existing Groups:


58
Right-click on the practice into which the existing group(s) will be added.
Select Add Existing Groups from the menu.
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8

The Select Groups window displays



Select the existing Group(s) from one or more practices to be added into the practice
Click the Add button
A prompt displays asking the User if they are sure to add the selected group(s)


Click Yes to continue with adding the existing group(s) into the selected practice.
Click No to exit the window without making any changes
59
NextGen Healthcare
Delete Group
An existing group can be deleted as long as there are no active users within the group, and no
deactivated users that were once assigned to the group.
Steps to Delete Group:


Right-click on the group to be deleted
Select Delete from the menu.

The following prompt is displayed:

Click the Yes button to continue with deleting the existing group.
NOTE: If there are active users assigned and/or deactivated users that were once assigned to
the group being deleted, the following prompt is displayed.
60
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Users
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Security
Security - Creating and Managing Users
Users are added to existing groups. Each user must belong to at least one group. They can be
added to multiple groups if needed. Each user will have the security access rights defined for the
group(s) to which they were added. It is not possible to modify security access rights at the user
level, only at the group level.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load this table.
To create a new User, right-click on the Practice/Group to which the new user is to be added and
select New User from the menu.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The Admin NextGen user (User ID = 0) comes pre-installed. This user
should not be modified or deactivated.
61
NextGen Healthcare
New User – General Tab
Last / First / Middle Names:
Enter the name of the user being defined.
Privacy Level:
Enter a Privacy Level of 0 – 5 for the user being defined.
NOTE: Privacy level is used in NextGen® EHR. Patients can be assigned a privacy
level on the demographics template. Users with a privacy level lower than that of the
patient will not have access to that patient’s clinical record.
Employee Nbr:
Enter an employee number for the user being defined. This can be an internal number assigned
by the client and is for informational purposes only.
Credentials:
Enter credentials, if any, for a user that is not a provider. This field can be included on
documents and reports in NextGen® EHR.
User ID:
A system defined User ID number is assigned to each user. The number cannot be modified.
62
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Assigned Provider / Provider Relationship / Provider Start/End Dates:
Select the rendering provider for which the user being defined should have access to the PAQ
(Provider Approval Queue) in NextGen® EHR.
NOTE: This also affects receiving results from lab interfaces and tasking from NextGen®
ICS to EHR.
E-Mail Address / E-Mail Profile Name / E-Mail Password:
Enter the user's e-mail address, account profile name and password for the external e-mail system,
such as Microsoft® Outlook, that is to be used with the Workflow module in NextGen® EHR.
User can change password:
Select this check-box if the user being defined should be able to change their password.
Force new password at next login:
Select this check-box if the user being defined should be forced to change their password the
next time they login to an application. This is useful when the same generic password is initially
assigned to all users.
Password Expires / Date:
Select this check-box and enter a date if the password for the user being defined should expire
on a specific date. This is useful when temporary employees have been hired.
Logon Name:
Enter a Logon Name for the user being defined. The name must be at least 6 characters long
and will be entered in the User field when logging into a NextGen application.
NOTE: This is a required entry for all users.
Password / Confirm Password:
Enter a Password for the user being defined. The password will be entered when logging into a
NextGen application.
NOTE: This is a required entry for all users. HIPAA requires passwords to be a
minimum length of 6 characters.
Members:
Defaults to the Group selected when the new user is created. If needed, additional groups can
be selected for the user.
User Licensing:
Select all NextGen applications to which the user being defined should have access. Each
application selected uses a user license within the License Manager application.
63
NextGen Healthcare
Inclusion/Exclusion List:
By default, all users have access to all patients in the NextGen applications. This option enables
patient information to be included or excluded for the user being defined.
Inclusion:
Select this check-box to create a list of patients that are to be the ONLY
patients to which the user being defined will have access.
Exclusion:
Select this check-box to create a list of patients that are to be the ONLY
patients to which the user being defined will not have access.
NOTE: Once inclusion/exclusion lists have been created for one user from the Modify
button, the lists can be shared with other users, security groups, or task workgroups from
the Share button.
Optik User:
If the system is licensed for the NextGen® Optical Management application and the user is an
optician or technician, select this check-box. In Optical Management, the user's name will
display and be available for selection in the User/Tech field when entering information for an
optical order.
App Launcher Application Access:
Defaults to the NextGen applications that have been selected for all users under the Edit > Full
App Launcher Access menu option. Select additional applications to which the user being
defined should have access to from the Application Launcher window.
64
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
New User – Practice Rights Tab
The Rights tab is “read-only”. It displays the security access rights that apply to the selected
user. The rights were defined for the Group to which the user belongs. Security access rights
cannot be modified for the selected user. They must be modified for the Group.
65
NextGen Healthcare
New User – Preferences Tab
Preferences are set for all users in all practices in all enterprises on the system from the View >
Universal Preferences menu option. Some of those preferences can be set differently for
individual users on the User > Preferences tab. Settings made for the selected user will override
the settings made in Universal Preferences.
To modify a preference setting for the selected user, open the preference option by doubleclicking on it.
EPM User Prefs - General:
Select the desired user preferences created in the Default User Prefs - General table in File
Maintenance for the user being defined.
EPM User Prefs - Locations:
Select the desired user preferences created in the Default User Prefs - Locations table in File
Maintenance for the user being defined.
EPM User Prefs - Scheduling:
Select the desired user preferences created in the Default User Prefs - Scheduling table in File
Maintenance for the user being defined.
NOTE: Setup of the Default User Prefs – General, Locations and Scheduling tables will
be covered during Core Group Training.
66
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
New User – External Tab
The External tab is used when interfaces will be implemented between NextGen and one or more
external systems. This tab allows a cross-reference to be defined between the NextGen user and
the external system user.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load information on this tab.
67
NextGen Healthcare
New User – Locations Tab
The Locations tab defines “Preferred Locations” for the selected user. The Preferred Locations
can then be put into a specific display order for the user. Additional settings are available that
determine how locations will work for the user in lookup windows and on reports in the EPM and
EHR applications.
NOTES:
Appointment Scheduling is not affected by Preferred Location setup. In the Appointment
Book, if users are able to access and view Resources with Non-Preferred Locations built into
their templates, the users will be able to add/update appointments at those locations.
Users are able to view all encounters in patient Charts regardless of their Preferred Location
setup. However, they may not be able to perform certain functions on encounters at NonPreferred Locations based on their security restrictions settings in System Admin > Loc
Restrict tab.
Preferred Locations:
Select the “Preferred Locations” for the user. Locations that are not selected are considered
“Non-Preferred Locations” for the user.
Limit Lists of EPM Locations to only Preferred Locations:
If this option is selected, only Preferred Locations will display to the user in drop-down fields
within EPM.
Limit EPM Reporting to only Preferred Locations:
If selected, only data associated with the user’s Preferred Locations will display on reports
generated by the user in EPM.
68
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
New User – Location Restrictions Tab
The Location Restrictions tab displays the user’s practice level security access rights for the listed
functions in EPM. Security access can be further restricted so that the user is not able to perform
some or all of the listed functions at Non-Preferred Locations.
NOTE: Security restriction settings for Non-Preferred Locations are practice-specific and do
not dictate what the user can or cannot do at Non-Preferred Locations within another
practice.
Non-Preferred Location Restrictions:
Select a security item to be further restricted for the user. Security access rights granted to the
user at the practice level can only be removed here, not added. The removal of security applies
to the user at all Non-Preferred Locations.
Add/Update/Delete security access rights are available for the following options:

Modules > Charge Entry
Controls access to adding/updating/deleting charges on encounters for Non-Preferred
Locations.
NOTE: The Add and Update security access options for Charge Entry work in
conjunction with each other and cannot have different values. If one is enabled, the
other is enabled. If one is disabled, the other is disabled. Therefore, the user can
add and update charges at Non-Preferred Locations or they cannot do either.
69
NextGen Healthcare

Modules > Transactions > Balance Control
Controls access to Balance Control on encounters for Non-Preferred Locations.

Modules > Transactions > Transaction Adjustments/Refunds
Controls access to adding/updating/deleting adjustments and/or refunds within a
transaction batch on encounters for Non-Preferred Locations.

Modules > Transactions > Transaction Payments
Controls access to adding/updating/deleting payments within a transaction batch on
encounters for Non-Preferred Locations.
Yes/No security access rights are available for the following options:

Operations > Encounters > Add Patient Encounter
Controls access to creating new encounters for Non-Preferred Locations.

Operations > Encounters > Delete Patient Encounter
Controls access to deleting encounters for Non-Preferred Locations.

Operations > Encounters > Update Patient Encounter
Controls access to updating all fields on the Encounter Maintenance window for NonPreferred Locations.
Non-Preferred Locations:
This section displays (read-only) all practice level Non-Preferred Locations for the user. NonPreferred Locations are those that are not selected as Preferred on the Locations tab. This section
cannot be edited.
Non-Preferred Location Rights Override:
This section displays the user’s current access rights for the highlighted security item at all NonPreferred Locations. The initial settings are derived from the Practice Rights tab for the Group.
Further restrictions can be made by deselecting the desired rights. Deselected items can be
reselected. However, Non-Preferred Location level security settings cannot have greater access than
what is defined at the practice level.
Non-Preferred Location Rights:
This section displays (read-only) the user’s current access rights for the highlighted security item
at all Non-Preferred Locations. The settings are derived from the Practice Rights tab in
conjunction with the Non-Preferred Location Rights Override settings above. This section cannot
be edited.
70
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Add Existing User
The Add Existing User option allows a user that exists in a group in one practice to be added into
a group in a second practice.
Steps to Add Existing User:
1. Right-click on the group into which the existing user is to be added. Select Add Existing
User from the menu.
2. On the Select User window, highlight the user under the practice in which they exist.
3. Click the Add button. The following prompt is displayed:
4. Click the Yes button to continue with adding the existing user into the second practice.
5. Click the Exit button on the Select User window.
71
NextGen Healthcare
User/Group Assignment
Users can be assigned to multiple groups in multiple enterprises and/or practices.
To assign a user to multiple group(s) in multiple enterprises and/or practices:


72
Select the Practice > Group > User to which security groups are to be assigned
Right-click and select User/Group Assignment from the menu
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8

The Find Groups window displays

Select the Enterprise(s) > Practice(s) > Group(s) to which the user is to be
assigned
Click the OK button
A prompt displays asking the user if they are sure
o Click the Yes button to assign the user to the selected Group(s)
o Click the No button to cancel


73
NextGen Healthcare
Deactivate User
The Deactivate User option allows a user that exists in one or more groups in one or more
practices to be deactivated so they are no longer able to login to a NextGen application. Once
deactivated, the user goes into the Deactivated Users bin.
Steps to Deactivate User:
1. Right-click on the user to be deactivated and select Deactivate from the menu. The
following prompt is displayed:
2. Click the Yes button to continue with deactivating the existing user.
NOTE: Users cannot be deactivated if they have one or more incomplete tasks assigned to them
in EPM and/or EHR. The tasks must first be reassigned to other users.
74
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Restore User
The Restore User option allows a user that was previously deactivated and that currently exists in
the Deactivated Users bin to be restored to all of the practice(s) and group(s) in which they
originally existed.
Steps to Restore User:
1. Right-click on the user to be restored and select Restore from the menu.
75
NextGen Healthcare
System Level Security
The following options are system level. Therefore, they pertain to all NextGen users in all
practices in all enterprises on the system.
Edit Menu
76
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Find
The Find option allows an existing user to be found by Last Name, First Name or User ID. Once
found, the user is listed with the practice name(s) and group name(s) under which they currently
exist.
Association Maintenance
Association Maintenance is a means of restricting the sharing of patient demographics
information (or Master Person Index (MPI)) to a subset of Practices within the same Enterprise.
Associations are designed to meet HIPAA’s privacy regulations by limiting access to MPI records
when appropriate. Practices outside of an Association can still access a patient’s MPI record
from within another Association by using a “Secured Patient Lookup”.
NOTE: Association Maintenance should only be implemented after extensive discussion with a
NextGen Project Manager/Coordinator and/or other representative(s) to ensure the functionality is
used correctly to meet the specific business requirements of your organization.
77
NextGen Healthcare
Full App Launcher Access
The Full App Launcher Access option defines the NextGen applications that will be available to
all users from the Application Launcher window. All applications are selected by default. To
restrict certain applications from being available to all users, deselect those applications here.
For example, it may not be desirable for all users to have the ability to access License Manager,
SetDB, System Administrator, etc.
For users that will need access to one or more of the applications deselected here, add the
appropriate application(s) to those specific users in the App Launcher Application Access field as
seen below.
78
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
View Menu
Password Requirements
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Security
Security – Password Requirements for Users
Password Requirements can be defined for all NextGen users.
79
NextGen Healthcare
Significant Events
Significant Events are items that can be tracked in NextGen. All events listed are either
enterprise level or system level and are selected by default. Therefore, all events will be
recorded. If it is desired that specific events not be recorded, they can be deselected here.
The Significant Events report within NextGen® EPM can be used to review specific events that
have been recorded.
NOTE: All Significant Events are pre-selected in the base installation of the NextGen
applications. The options can be modified as needed. New options may become available with
each version upgrade. These new options are not pre-selected in the version upgrade and should
be reviewed and selected as needed.
80
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
File Maintenance > Master Lists
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Master Lists
Master Lists
Master Lists are a set of System Level tables that define a variety of information that can be
documented on patients within the NextGen applications. This information is commonly used for
reporting purposes.
Individual items within a Master List table can be flagged to Show in EPM and/or Show in EMR.
Most Master Lists are used primarily in NextGen® EPM. The items within each table will display
in alphabetic order to the end users.
Items flagged to Show in EMR can be used in template pick-lists within NextGen® EHR. The
display order of the items within a template pick-list can be controlled by “sequencing” the items
within each table with the blue up/down arrows.
Address Type
Address Type can be entered as part of a patient’s demographic information to capture the type
of address being entered. It is used primarily with a demographic interface between NextGen
and an external system that requires address type.
81
NextGen Healthcare
Appointment Cancellation Reasons
Appointment Cancellation Reasons are used in NextGen® EPM to document the reason an
appointment is cancelled.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Appointment Rescheduling Reasons
Appointment Rescheduling Reasons are used in NextGen® EPM to document the reason an
appointment is rescheduled.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
82
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Appointment User Defined 5 – 8
There are 4 user defined fields available that can be named and used to capture additional
appointment information that is not already a standard field within the NextGen® EPM
application. Once a user defined field is named in Practice Preferences > Appointment
Scheduling tab, a new Master List table by that name becomes available. These tables are
practice level, not system or enterprise level.
Bad Debt Statuses
Bad Debt Statuses are used in NextGen® EPM to document the reason one or more encounters
for an account are being pre-listed to a collection agency.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
83
NextGen Healthcare
Blood Quantum
Blood Quantum can be entered by Indian Health Services clinics as a part of a patient’s
demographic information to reflect the patient’s Indian heritage.
Case Category
Case Categories are used with case management in NextGen® EHR. They make up the
individual components of Case Types. Refer to File Maintenance > System Master Files > EMR
> Case Types table.
84
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Case Contact Role
Case Contact Roles are used with case management. They identify the roles of the individuals
that may be involved in a patient’s case.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Case Markets
Case Markets are used with case management in NextGen® EHR. Users can be restricted from
accessing cases for specific markets. Refer to System Administrator > Groups > Case
Management tab > Market Restrictions.
85
NextGen Healthcare
Church
Church can be entered as part of a patient’s demographic information.
Classification/Beneficiary
Classification/Beneficiary can be entered by Indian Health Services clinics as part of a patient’s
demographic information.
NOTE: This table can be installed by using the IHS Report Export Utility provided by NextGen
Consulting Services.
86
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Community Code
Community Code can be entered by Indian Health Services clinics as part of a patient’s
demographic information.
NOTE: This table can be installed by using the IHS Report Export Utility provided by NextGen
Consulting Services.
Contact Preferences
Contact Preference can be entered as part of a patient’s demographic information. It indicates
the method by which a person/patient prefers to be contacted.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
87
NextGen Healthcare
Contract Subgrouping
Contract Subgroupings are linked to payer Contracts created in File Maintenance > Libraries.
They are a way to group contracts, and then used to link participating providers to those groups
of contracts.
Counties
Counties are used in any NextGen application whenever an address is entered. For
example, person/patient’s address, payer’s address, provider’s address, etc.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. New entries can be built “on-the-fly” by users.
88
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Countries
Countries are used in any NextGen application whenever an address is entered. For
example, person/patient’s address, payer’s address, provider’s address, etc.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. New entries can be built “on-the-fly” by users.
Credentialing
Credentialing types are used in the Providers and/or Locations tables in File Maintenance.
They are a way to record and store credential related information and notes for a specific
provider or location.
89
NextGen Healthcare
Departments
Departments are used in NextGen® EPM to group codes in the Service Item Library for reporting
purposes.
Departments are used in NextGen® EHR to determine the flow of templates in the Navigational
Toolbar and the predetermined global values for E&M coding.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed with codes for EHR. The pre-installed codes have a
Sequence = 0 and should not be modified. Departments should be added for reporting purposes
in EPM.
Descendency
Descendency can be entered by Indian Health Services clinics as part of a patient’s demographic
information.
90
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Diagnosis Subgroupings
Diagnosis Subgroupings are used to group diagnosis codes for reporting purposes in NextGen®
EPM. They are linked to ICD codes in the Diagnosis Codes library.
Enterprise Client Defined 1 – 14
There are 14 Client Defined fields available that can be named and used to capture additional
patient information that is not already a standard field within the NextGen application. Once a
client defined field is named in Enterprise Preferences > Client Defined tab, a new Master List
table by that name becomes available. These tables are enterprise level, not system level
91
NextGen Healthcare
Ethnicity
Ethnicity can be entered as part of a patient’s demographic information. It is also used for
Meaningful Use and UDS reporting.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Recommended Entries for UDS:
Declined to Specify
Hispanic or Latino
Not Hispanic or Latino
Unknown / Not Reported
Financial Classes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Master Lists
Master Lists – Financial Classes
Financial Classes are used to group payers for reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM. It is a
required entry in the Payers system master file and also corresponds to UDS table 9.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
92
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Homeless Status
Homeless Status can be entered by CHC clinics as a part of a patient’s demographic information
for UDS and/or state specific reporting.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Recommended Entries for UDS:
Doubling Up
Not Homeless
Shelter
Street
Transitional
Unknown/Unreported
IHS Eligibility Status
IHS Eligibility Status can be entered by Indian Health Services clinics as part of a patient’s
demographic information.
93
NextGen Healthcare
Language
Preferred Language can be entered as part of a patient’s demographic information. It is also
used for Meaningful Use.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Language Barrier
Language Barrier can be entered by CHC clinics as a part of a patient’s demographic information
for UDS and/or state specific reporting.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Recommended Entries for UDS:
94
No
Yes
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Location Subgroupings
Location Subgroupings are used to group locations for reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM.
They are linked in the Locations table > Location Defaults tab.
Marketing Plan Sub-Groups
Marketing Plan Sub-Groups are used in patient charts in NextGen® EPM to document how
patients learned of or heard about the practice. This table is used in conjunction with the
Marketing Plans table found in File Maintenance > Practice Master Files.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
95
NextGen Healthcare
Migrant Worker Status
Migrant Worker Status can be entered by CHC clinics as a part of a patient’s demographic
information for UDS and/or state specific reporting.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Recommended Entries for UDS:
96
Migrant
Not a Farm Worker
Seasonal
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Modalities
Modalities are used in NextGen® EPM to group codes in the Service Item Library for reporting
purposes. They are a further breakdown of the Departments listed above.
Examples:
Department = Consult
Modalities = New Patient, Established Patient
Department = Radiology
Modalities = X-Ray, MRI, CT Scan
Name Prefix
Name Prefix can be entered as a part of a patient’s demographics information.
97
NextGen Healthcare
Name Suffix
Name Suffix can be entered as a part of a patient’s demographics information.
Occupations
Occupations can be entered as part of a patient’s employer information. They indicate the type of
work the patient does for their employer. New entries for this table can be built “on-the-fly” by
users entering employer information
.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed with codes for EHR. The pre-installed codes have a
Sequence = 0 and should not be modified.
98
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Patient Status Change Reasons
Patient Statuses are used in NextGen® EPM to alert users when they access a particular type of
patient. Patient Status Change Reasons can be used to document why a patient’s status was
changed from one status to another.
Patient Types
Patient Types are linked to encounters for encounter level reporting in NextGen® EPM. They are
assigned on the Encounter Maintenance window. A default Patient Type can be set in Practice
Preferences > Encounters tab. Patient Type can also be made required on all encounters.
99
NextGen Healthcare
Payer Subgroupings
Payer Subgroupings are used to group payers for reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM. This is
in addition to Financial Classes which are already in place as a payer grouping reporting
mechanism. They are linked in the Payers table > Defaults-2 tab.
Privacy Notices
Privacy Notices can be entered as part of a patient’s HIPAA privacy notice information within the
chart.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
100
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Provider Expiration Reasons
Provider Expiration Reasons are used in NextGen® EPM. There is an option available in
Practice Preferences > Provider tab that enables a practice to document up to 12 types of
providers for their patients during person/patient information entry. For example, a family practice
might be interested in documenting the various specialists that a patient sees. Provider
Expiration Reasons can be used to document why a patient no longer sees a particular provider.
Provider Subgroupings
Provider Subgroupings are used to group providers for reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM.
They are linked in the Providers table > System tab.
101
NextGen Healthcare
Provider Types
Provider Types are used by CHC clinics to classify providers for UDS and/or state specific
reporting. They are linked to providers in the Providers table > Practice tab and they correspond
to UDS table 5.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Recommended Entries for UDS include but are not limited to the following:
Dentist
Family Practitioner
General Practitioner
Internist
Mental Health Practitioner
Nurse
Nurse Practitioner
OB/Gyn
Other Professional Services
Outreach
Pediatrician
Pharmacy
Physician Assistant
102
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Public Housing Primary Care
Public Housing Primary Care can be entered by CHC clinics as part of a patient’s demographic
information for UDS and/or state specific reporting.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Recommended Entries for UDS:
No
Other
Public Housing
Tenant Based Voucher
103
NextGen Healthcare
Race
Race can be entered as part of a patient’s demographic information. It is also used for
Meaningful Use.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed with codes for EHR. The pre-installed codes have a
Sequence = 0 and should not be modified.
Recommended Entries for UDS:
104
American Indian/Alaskan Native
Asian
Black/African American
Declined to Specify
More than one Race
Native Hawaiian
Other Pacific Islander
Unknown/Unreported
White
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Reason Code Subgroupings
Reason Code Sub-Groupings are used to group reason codes for reporting purposes in
NextGen® EPM. They are linked in the Reason Code Library.
Religion
Religion can be entered as part of a patient’s demographic information.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed with codes for EHR. The pre-installed codes have a
Sequence = 0 and should not be modified.
105
NextGen Healthcare
School Based Health Center
School Based Health Center can be entered by CHC clinics as part of a patient’s demographic
information for UDS Reporting.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Recommended Entries for UDS:
Yes
No
Service Type
Service Types are linked to encounters for encounter level reporting in NextGen® EPM. They
are assigned on the Encounter Maintenance window.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
106
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Task Completion Reasons
Task Completion Reasons are used in NextGen® EPM to document why tasks are completed
within the Worklog Manager module.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Worklog Manager will be covered during Advanced
Training or during a separate WebEx training session.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Task Subgroupings
Task Subgroupings are used to group task types for task management and reporting purposes in
NextGen® EPM. They are linked in the Task Types table.
107
NextGen Healthcare
Tribal Affiliation
Tribal Affiliation can be entered by Indian Health Services clinics as a part of a patient’s
demographic information.
NOTE: This table can be installed by using the IHS Report Export Utility provided by NextGen
Consulting Services.
Type of Benefit
Type of Benefit is used on the Insurance Maintenance screen when entering Eligibility and
Benefit information for a patient’s insurance.
108
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Vaccine Manufacturer
Vaccine Manufacturer is used only for interfaces between NextGen and an external state
immunization registry.
XDS Tables
The XDS Class Code, XDS Confidentiality, XDS Format, XDS Healthcare XDS Facility, XDS
Practice and XDS Type tables are used in the setup of Continuity of Care Documents for the
NextGen® HIE (Health Information Exchange) application.
Zones
Zones were once used in NextGen® EHR in the Referral Module. They were a way to group
Referring Providers by geographic region for searching purposes. Up to three zones could be
linked to a referring provider in the Providers table > EHR tab.
NOTE: This table is not used in the current EHR “Referral” template.
109
NextGen Healthcare
File Maintenance > Master Files > System
Transaction Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Transaction Codes
Transaction Codes are used in NextGen® EPM during Payment Entry. They are used
extensively for reporting purposes. They are also the main method of tracking and
separating the various types of payments and adjustments on the UDS Report Table 9.
The table should include codes for all types of payments, adjustments and refunds that
might be posted against patient charges.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
110
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Transaction Description:
Enter a description for the code being defined.
Type:
Select Adjustment, Payment or Refund for the code being defined.
Source:
Select either Patient or Third Party (Insurance) for the code being defined.
Sign Type:
Select Positive (+) if the balance on a charge should increase when this code is used.
Select Negative (-) if the balance on a charge should decrease when this code is used.
Bad Debt Only:
Select this check-box if the code being defined should only be available for use on encounters
that have been turned to a collection agency and have a status of Bad Debt.
Allow Sign Override:
Select this check-box to allow the code being defined to be used with the opposite “sign type”
from that defined above. This is useful when reversing a transaction entered in error.
Optical Transaction:
Select this check-box if the adjustment code being defined should be available for use in the
Optik application.
NOTE: This check-box displays only if the system is licensed for the NextGen® Optical
Management application.
111
NextGen Healthcare
Do not use in Payment Entry:
Select this check-box if the Adjustment code being defined should not be available for user
selection on the Payment Entry screen. For example, this might be used with contract autoadjustment transaction codes, where the adjustment should only take place based on contract
setup.
NOTE: This functionality is currently only available for Adjustment transaction codes.
Exclude from In Progress Encounter:
Select this check-box if the code being defined should not be available for use on encounters that
have a status of In Progress.
Users / Groups Blocked Access:
Select individual Users and/or Groups of users from System Administrator that should not have
access to the code being defined, if applicable.
System Generated Transaction Codes
Several (9) transactions codes must exist in this table that will be used automatically by the
system when working with unapplied credits, bad debt and voiding charges in NextGen® EPM.
It is NextGen’s best practice to begin the description of these codes begin with the letter “Z” so
that they fall alphabetically at the bottom of the list of codes to users. This also serves as a
reminder to users to not select a code starting with “Z” when entering transactions.
These codes must be entered in Practice Preferences > Trans Codes tab.
NOTE: These codes come pre-installed and they should not be modified or hidden.
112
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Pre-Installed Transaction Codes
Below is a list of Transaction Codes that are pre-installed.
IMPORTANT NOTE: All codes should be reviewed thoroughly. Additional codes should be
added if needed for reporting purposes. For example, it may be desirable to track Medicare A
payments/adjustments separately from Medicare B payments/adjustments. Other codes should
be modified or hidden as needed.
Description
Bad Debt Agency Fee (Adj)
Bad Debt Agency Payment
Bad Debt Final Write Off
Bad Debt Insurance Payment
Bad Debt Patient Payment
Bad Debt Recovery
Balance Forward – Insurance
Balance Forward – Patient
Bankruptcy Write Off
BCBS Adjustment
BCBC Payment
Budget Adjustment
Budget Payment Cash
Budget Payment Check
Budget Payment Credit Card
Capitation Adjustment
Capitation Payment
Cash Discount
Champus/Tricare Adjustment
Champus/Tricare Payment
Charity Write Off
Commercial Adjustment
Commercial Payment
Copay Cash
Copay Check
Copay Credit Card
Courtesy Adjustment
Dental Insurance Adjustment
Dental Insurance Payment
Employee Discount
Encounter Rate Adjustment
Interest Offset Adjustment
Interest Payment
Invoice Adjustment
Invoice Payment
Medicaid Adjustment
Medicaid Payment
Medicare Adjustment
Medicare Payment
MVA Adjustment
MVA Payment
Type
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Pmt
Pmt
Adj
Adj
Adj
Adj
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Adj
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Adj
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Adj
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Source
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Third Party
Patient
Patient
Third Party
Third Party
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Third Party
Third Party
Patient
Third Party
Third Party
Patient
Third Party
Third Party
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Third Party
Third Party
Patient
Third Party
Third Party
Third Party
Patient
Patient
Third Party
Third Party
Third Party
Third Party
Third Party
Third Party
Sign Type
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Pos (+)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
113
NextGen Healthcare
NSF Check Reversal
Patient Payment Cash
Patient Payment Check
Patient Payment Credit Card
Refund Insurance
Refund Patient
Sliding Fee Adjustment
Sliding Fee Payment
Small Balance Write Off Insurance
Small Balance Write Off Patient
Transfer Insurance Payment
Transfer Patient Payment
Withhold
Work Comp Adjustment
Work Comp Payment
Returned Check
ZApplied Account Credit
ZApplied Account Debit
ZApplied Encounter / Invoice Credit
ZApplied Encounter / Invoice Debit
ZBad Debt Credit
ZBad Debt Debit
ZReceived Credit On Account
ZTransfer Credit To Account
ZVoid Charge
ZWrite Off Remaining Patient Bal
ZWrite Off Remaining Payer Bal
114
Adj
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Ref
Ref
Adj
Pmt
Adj
Adj
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Adj
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Pmt
Adj
Adj
Pmt
Pmt
Adj
Adj
Adj
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Third Party
Patient
Patient
Patient
Third Party
Patient
Third Party
Patient
Third Party
Third Party
Third Party
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Patient
Third Party
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Pos (+)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Pos (+)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
Neg (-)
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Payers
eLearning Curriculum 1:
eLearning Course 1:
Overview of Payers and Providers
Overview of the Payers System Master File
eLearning Curriculum 2:
eLearning Course 2:
eLearning Course 3:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Payers Part One
System Master Files – Payers Part Two
Payers are used in NextGen® EPM for filing insurance claims. Payers are linked to the person
that is the subscriber of the policy. The payer(s) can then be linked to patient encounters for
billing.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load this table.
115
NextGen Healthcare
Payer Defaults-1 Tab
Payer Name:
Enter the name of the payer being defined as it should appear to users and on claim forms.
NEIC/Payer Number:
This field should be left blank unless instructed otherwise by a NextGen EDI/Claims Analyst
during claims testing.
Plan Number:
Enter a plan number only if all patients with this payer have the same plan number on their
insurance card. If blank, plan number can be entered at the patient level.
Payer Alias Name:
Enter an alternate name for the payer to be used on claims.
Group Name:
Enter a group name only if all patients with this payer have the same group name on their
insurance card. If blank, group name can be entered at the patient level.
Group Number:
Enter a group number only if all patients with this payer have the same group number on their
insurance card. If blank, group number can be entered at the patient level.
116
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Plan Type:
Plan Type is needed for lab interfaces to Quest and LabCorp. Below are guidelines to use for the
setup of each payer.
Payer
Medicare
Medicaid
BC/BS
HMO Payers
All Other Payers
Plan Type
Medicare Number
Medicaid Number
Blue Shield Number
HMO Number
Private Number
Main Address:
Enter the mailing address for the payer as it should appear on paper claims.
Refund Address:
Enter the refund address for the payer if different from the main address.
Contact Phone:
Enter the phone number for the payer.
Source of Signature:
Select if the verbiage “Signature on File” should appear on paper 1500 claims in Box 12 only (12),
Box 13 only (13) or both Boxes 12 and 13 (12,13)
NOTE: Electronic claims in ASC X12 Version 5010 format no longer include this
information. Since it is a required field for paper claims, it is recommended that the
“Signature authorization (12, 13)” option be selected for all payers.
Payer Website:
Enter the website address for the payer. This will give end users in NextGen® EPM direct access
to the payer’s website from within the patient’s insurance information.
117
NextGen Healthcare
Defaults-2 Tab
Cross-over:
If selected and the payer being defined is secondary to Medicare, the remaining balance after the
Medicare payment will be “Forwarded to Secondary”. Therefore, a claim will not be generated
from NextGen® EPM for the secondary payer.
If not selected and the payer being defined is secondary to Medicare, the remaining balance after
the Medicare payment will be “Settled to Secondary”. Therefore, a claim will be generated from
NextGen® EPM for the secondary payer.
NOTE: It is suggested to clients that will be processing ERA files from Medicare, to not
select this check-box on payers that could be secondary to Medicare. This allows either
Forwarded or Settled to be selected based on information provided in the ERA file.
Dental payer:
Select this check-box for all dental payers that are to be filed on an ADA or UB claim form.
Require policy number:
Select this check-box for all payers.
Require group number:
Select this check-box for payers that always have a group number.
Policy Number Format:
If a specific format was created in the Formats table, select it here.
Group Number Format:
If a specific format was created in the Formats table, select it here.
118
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Display override policy number and co-pay:
Select this check-box for payers where a single policy may cover multiple family members and
each family member may have a different policy number and/or copay.
Example: John Smith is the subscriber of an Aetna policy that covers his entire family.
The policy number for each family member is the same as John’s except for the two-digit
suffix. The suffix differentiates the policy number for each dependent. With this option
selected for the payer, the Encounter Maintenance screen in EPM will display two fields;
one for the subscriber’s policy number/copay, and another for the dependent’s policy
number/copay.
Family Member
John/Dad (Subscriber)
Carol/Mom
Greg/Child
Policy #
12345678900
12345678901
12345678902
Copay
$20.00
$20.00
$10.00
Prevent modifying plan name on insurance maint:
Select this check-box for all payers to prevent users from modifying the Payer Name after
selecting the payer for a patient.
119
NextGen Healthcare
System Tab
Claims Sub-Tab
NOTE: The UB Claims sub-tabs in the Provider Secondary References and Provider Paper
Qualifiers sections only display if the UB Claim Form options have been setup in Practice
Preferences > Claims tab.
Process as Claim Type:
Select as indicated on the “Provider Secondary Reference Qualifiers” document provided by your
NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
Financial Class:
Select the appropriate financial class for the payer being defined for reporting purposes.
Insurance Type Code:
Select as indicated on the “Provider Secondary Reference Qualifiers” document provided by your
NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
Provider Secondary References > 1500 Claims Tab:
The six tabs (Billing, Referring, Rendering, Service Facility, Supervising, Payer Billing) for
electronic 837P (1500) claims will automatically populate based on the Process as Claim Type
selected above.
Provider Secondary References > UB Claims Tab:
The six tabs (Billing, Attending, Other, Service Facility, Referring, Payer Billing) for electronic 837I
(UB) claims will automatically populate based on the Process as Claim Type selected above.
120
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Provider Secondary References > ADA Claims Tab:
The five tabs (Billing, Referring, Rendering, Service Facility, Payer Billing) for electronic 837D
(ADA) claims will automatically populate based on the Process as Claim Type selected above.
Claims-2 Sub-Tab
The options on the Claims-2 sub-tab are used to accommodate electronic 837 requirements for
the payer.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Most options on this tab should not be enabled unless the payer requires
them. Rejections can occur if segments are populated on an electronic claim that the payer does
not require.
Enable NDC coding for electronic claims:
Select this check-box to include the National Drug Code (NDC) on electronic claims for
the payer. NDC information is defined in the NDC Library which then defaults to the SIM
Library > Drugs tab.
Populate 2410 CTP segment:
Select this option to include NDC “Drug Unit Count” and “Basis of Measure” on electronic
claims for the payer. NDC information is defined in the NDC Library which then defaults
to the SIM Library > Drugs tab.
Populate 2400 PS1 purchase service segment:
Select this check-box to populate the Purchase Service Amount in the 2400 loop/PS1
segment for electronic claims.
121
NextGen Healthcare
Populate foreign country code in subscriber loop:
Select this check-box to populate Patient and Subscriber loops with a two-character
country code in electronic claims. Currently, this setting only supports Canada and
Mexico as valid foreign countries.
Populate PCP in 2310A loop (professional only):
Select this check-box to create the 2310A PCP iteration of the 837P electronic file and
populate it with the referring provider's information.
Populate PRV in 2000A with group taxonomy for group claims:
Select this check-box and, if there is a taxonomy code in the Group master file, the group
taxonomy code is used in the 2000A PRV segment in the 837P and in the 837I.
You might need to select this check-box, for example, if the taxonomy code is required
but your practice bills as a group and each group has a taxonomy code. This check-box
enables you to use the group taxonomy code in the 2000A PRV segment.
Populate 2300 CN1 if group billing:
Select this option for group billed claims, to create a CN1 segment when the 837
professional claim file is generated for the payer.
NOTE: This option is specifically for Oklahoma Medicaid and generates as
follows: CN1*09**G~.
Populate CLIA number on claims:
Select this option to populate the CLIA number in the electronic file for this payer even if
the payer is not a Medicare or Medicaid claim type.
Enable Health Safety Net EDI:
Select this option to enable Health Safety Net Office. Along with this option, the Payer
Alias Name field on the Payer Defaults -1 tab must have an entry of HSNO.
Enable NPI on electronic claims:
Select how you want to handle enabling the NPI from the options below. For more
detailed information about enabling the NPI, see the National Provider ID Dual
Submission Setup white paper available from www.NextGen.com.
<none> / Blank:
This setting is the default and indicates that the NPI is enabled or disabled
according to the setting at the next higher level. For example, if the practice level
setting is <none>, but the system level setting is Enabled, then the NPI is used.
Disable:
NPI is off. This setting overrides the submitter profile setting.
Enable:
NPI is on. This setting overrides the Submitter Profile setting. If either the payer
system or practice level setting is enabled, the NPI is also enabled for the
alternate payer.
Suppress Rendering/Attending Loop:
Select the option to determine whether the Attending (2310A) and Rendering (2310B)
loops should be suppressed. See the NextGen® EPM Claims Guide for more information
about suppressing the 2310A Attending and 2310B Rendering loops.
122
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Suppress Facility Loop (2310D):
To suppress the 2310D loop for a place of service (POS), select the one of the following
place of service (POS) or combination POS options:






<none>
Home (12) only
Home (12) or Office (11)
Home (12) or Office (11) or Outpatient (22)
Office (11) only
Outpatient (22) only
NOTE: This setting overrides the setting for the Submitter Profile library > Common
Options tab > Suppress service facility loop for place(s) of service option. However, if
<none> is selected for the Payer master file setting, the Submitter Profile library option is
used.
123
NextGen Healthcare
COB Electronic Claims Sub-Tab
The options on the COB Electronic Claims sub-tab are used to accommodate secondary 837
requirements for the payer.
NOTE: These options should not be enabled unless the payer requires them. Rejections can
occur if segments are populated on an electronic claim that the payer does not require.
124
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Practice Tab
For clients with multiple practices using the same payer, the Practice Tab and all of its sub-tabs
allow for entry of information specific to the payer being defined for the current practice only.
The Practice tab also includes the Claims, Secondary References, Other, UB, Transactions and
Libraries sub-tabs at the bottom of the window.
Claims Sub-Tab
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load some of the information on this tab.
Form Template:
If you have used a form template to replace your HCFA or UB paper claims, then click
the drop-down arrow and select the appropriate form template for the payer.
1500 Claims / UB Claims / ADA Claims Tabs
Submitter Profile:
Select the appropriate Submitter Profile to be used when creating electronic 1500 / UB / ADA
claims for the payer. This is not needed for payers that will generate paper claims to be
printed in-house.
Electronic Transmitter ID:
Enter the Electronic Transmitter ID number for 1500 / UB / ADA claims for the payer.
Refer to the Payer Listing provided by the clearinghouse.
NOTE: This field only displays when a Submitter Profile has been selected.
125
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Payer Opt Val:
Enter the practice/payer-specific value.
Payer Alias:
Enter an alternative payer name when a name that differs from the name that appears in
the payer's Payer master file is required.
Primary Media Type:
Select Electronic for those payers that should generate electronic primary claims. Select
Paper for those payers that should generate paper primary claims.
Secondary Media Type:
Select Electronic for those payers that can accept electronic secondary claims. Select
Paper for those payers that should generate paper secondary claims.
Tertiary Media Type:
Select Electronic for those payers that can accept electronic tertiary claims. Select
Paper for those payers that should generate paper tertiary claims.
When Primary, force Secondary claims to paper:
Do not select this check-box. This option is no longer used.
When Secondary, force Tertiary claims to paper:
Do not select this check-box. This option is no longer used.
Suppress Claim:
Select this box to suppress claims for this payer when creating claims in batch mode
only.
Exclude Patient Paid Amount from Claim:
Select this check-box for all payers to exclude patient payments from the claim.
Flag All Prior Claim Line Items for Rebill:
Select this option to include line items with a $0.00 amount with the other line item
charges when you rebill an archived claim.
Suppress Claim for Non-Qualifying Encounter:
Select this check-box to suppress claims for this payer when creating claims for nonqualifying encounters to a federally qualified health center.
126
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Secondary References Sub-Tab
For clients with multiple practices using the same payer, the Secondary References Sub-Tab
allows for entry of Provider Secondary References specific to the payer being defined for the
current practice only.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Information entered here for the current practice will override the
information entered on the System tab for all other practices.
1500 Claims Tab
Complete the six tabs (Billing, Referring, Rendering, Service Facility, Supervising, Payer Billing)
for electronic 837P (1500) claims only if the current practice requires different secondary
references on claims from those already defined on the System tab for all practices.
UB Claims Tab
Complete the six tabs (Billing, Attending, Other, Service Facility, Referring, Payer Billing) for
electronic 837I (UB) claims only if the current practice requires secondary references on claims
that are different from those defined on the System tab for all practices.
ADA Claims Tab
Complete the five tabs (Billing, Referring, Rendering, Service Facility, Payer Billing) for electronic
837D (ADA) claims only if the current practice requires secondary references on claims that are
different from those defined on the System tab for all practices.
127
NextGen Healthcare
Other Sub-Tab
Note Template:
Select the note template to use when a user creates an encounter during check-in. A new note
will be created based on this template.
NOTE: Before you can select a note template, you must first select the Prompt for note
during check-in of encounter check-box below.
Auto Delay Reason Code:
Select a delay reason code to be used by the payer as a default delay reason code. A delay
reason code set at the claim/encounter level overrides a delay reason code set at the payer level.
This field works in conjunction with the Auto Delay Reason Code Days field.
Auto Delay Reason Code Days:
Set this number to control when the Auto Delay Reason Code is applied to a claim. When the
number of days elapsed between the billing date and the encounter date is greater than the Auto
Delay Reason Code Days, then it is applied to the claim.
Delay Billing [0-365] Days From Enc. Date:
Enter the number of days to hold batch billing starting from the encounter date. This setting
allows charges billed to a non-Medicare payer to be held for the specified number of days before
claims are generated. For example, if the encounter date is July 1 and the hold days are set to 5,
then the hold date is July 6. The hold date is calculated when a user attaches insurance to an
unbilled encounter. The hold date then displays in the Hold Until Date field on the Billing &
Collections tab in Encounter Maintenance in EPM.
128
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
NOTES:
Even though this setting works only with batch billing, users can still force billing with
demand billing for specific encounters.
If an encounter is still within the allotted hold days, it does not display during encounter
lookup and, therefore, is not in the list for batch billing.
You can also delay Medicare billing. However, note that the delay billing setting for a
specific payer overrides delayed Medicare billing.
Enable NPI on electronic claims:
Select how you want to handle enabling the NPI from the options below. For more detailed
information about enabling the NPI, see the National Provider ID Dual Submission Setup white
paper available from www.NextGen.com.
<none>:
This setting is the default and indicates that the NPI is enabled or
disabled according to the setting at the next higher level. For example, if
the practice level setting is <none>, but the system level setting is
Enabled, then the NPI is used.
Disable:
NPI is off. This setting overrides the submitter profile setting.
Enable:
NPI is on. This setting overrides the submitter profile setting. If either the
payer system or practice level setting is enabled, the NPI is also enabled
for the alternate payer.
The payer master file setting on the Practice > Other tab overrides both the submitter profile
setting and the system level setting.
Authorization Required:
Select this check-box for the payer being defined only if an authorization is required on every
claim for every encounter for every patient with this insurance. (Example: HMO insurances at a
specialty clinic)
Verification Required:
Select this check-box for the payer being defined only if verification of coverage is required on
every encounter for every patient with this insurance. (Example: Medicaid)
Referral Support and Eligibility Support:
These check-boxes display only if the “Enable Eligibility\Referral” option has been selected in
Practice Preferences > General Tab.
This will be used in the NextGen® RTS (Real-Time Transaction Server) module. RTS provides
the following functionalities:




Real-Time Referral Requests/Responses
Real-Time Referral History Requests/Responses
Real-Time Eligibility Requests/Responses
Real-Time Claim Status Requests/Responses
NOTE: Setup and training for the RTS module will be covered in a separate training session by a
NextGen® RTS representative.
Do not print statements:
Check this check-box to exclude printing encounters on statements for this payer. This option
only applies to batch mode for those encounters where the check-box is checked for the primary
payer and the encounter has a zero patient balance. An encounter will print on a statement even
if this check-box is checked for the primary payer, if there is a balance in the patient bucket.
129
NextGen Healthcare
Accept financial responsibility of primary copay amount:
Select this check-box if the copay from a patient’s primary insurance should be billed to the payer
being defined (as the patient’s secondary insurance) instead of billed to the patient.
Force rendering provider from primary claim as rendering on secondary claim:
Select this check-box to use the rendering provider from the primary claim to create the
secondary claim, regardless of the provider being credentialed.
Enable medical necessity check at appointment:
Select this check-box to trigger a medical necessity check for specified payers during
appointment creation and for payers who are added at check-in.
Notification required:
Select this check-box if the payer requires notification.
Copay percent calc:
Select this check-box give users the choice of entering either a dollar amount or a percentage on
the Insurance Maintenance dialog box in EPM.
Encounter Copay Required:
Select this check-box to make the encounter Co-pay Amt field required.
Use allowed amount on paper/electronic claims:
Select this check-box to bill the allowed amount instead of the charge amount on paper and
electronic claims. The amount is related to contracts. If you select this check-box, you must also
setup the allowed amount in a contract to pull on the claim.
Default Accept Assignment to No:
Select this check-box to set the default assignment of benefits to No for all encounters for this
payer when the rendering provider is a non-participating provider on the contract associated with
the insurance. This check-box is unchecked by default. When this option is selected, the first line
in the Verification section of the Patient Chart - encounters/Insurance tab will display Benefits
NOT Assigned. In Addition, on the paper and electronic claim, Accept Assignment will be set to
No. The Default Accept Assignment to No option will always have priority over the Default NonParticipating Provider's Accept Assignment to No option. When this option is selected, the Default
Non-Participating Provider's Accept Assignment to No option will automatically be checked and
disabled.
Prompt for note during checkin of encounter:
Select this check-box so that a new note is automatically created when a user creates an
encounter during the check-in process. When you select this check-box, the Note Template field
becomes available. The note is based on the selected template in the Note Template field. The
note is not required; the user can close the note without saving it.
Require case management:
Select this check-box to require case management in EPM. When this payer is attached to an
encounter, a case is required.
Populate 2400 CLIA ID (Professional Only):
Select this check-box to send the CLIA number at the line level for SIMs that have been
designated as purchased services. Because this option applies only to Medicaid and Medicare
claims, you must also select either Medicaid or Medicare in the Process as Claim Type field on
the System tab > Claims tab. If this option is not selected, then CLIA will populate in the 2300
loop.
130
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Auto create referral based on RTS results:
Select this option to automatically create a referral from the RTS results when a 278 is
successfully returned.
Bill encounter diagnoses:
Select this option and the Enable billing of encounter diagnoses option in practice preference
to fill in any "empty" diagnosis slots on the claim header during billing with encounter diagnoses
not already present on the claim.
Always bill as primary:
Select this check-box if you want all claims billed at this practice with this payer in the secondary
or tertiary encounter payer COB position to bill as primary and to have no information on any
other payers included on the claim.
Bill with primary:
Select this check-box if you want charges created for this payer at this practice to automatically
flag this payer's COB to be billed along with the primary payer's COB when the primary payer's
COB flag is checked on.
Ignore modifiers on roll-up:
When selected, the Ignore modifiers on roll-up check-box ignores modifiers when charges are
billed and roll-up is enabled. For example, the ignored modifiers do not print on claims.
Referral required:
Select this check-box to require a referral. When this check-box is selected, the Referral Required
check-box is enabled on the Insurance Maintenance dialog box in EPM.
131
NextGen Healthcare
UB Sub-Tab
This sub-tab displays only if the UB Claim Form parameters have been set in Practice
Preferences > Claims tab. Completing these parameters will enable UB related setup options
within File Maintenance, and UB related functionality within NextGen® EPM. In addition, it
defines the 3-digit code that will populate Field Locator 4 (Type of Bill) on UB claims.
Type of Facility:
The selected Type of Facility prints in the first position of Field Locator 4 on UB claims. It also
sets the default on the Payers > Practice tab > UB sub-tab in File Maintenance and on the
Encounter Maintenance > UB tab in NextGen® EPM.
Bill Classification:
The selected Bill Classification prints in the second position of Field Locator 4 on UB claims. It
also sets the default on the Payers > Practice tab > UB sub-tab in File Maintenance and on the
Encounter Maintenance > UB tab in NextGen® EPM.
Frequency of Bill:
The selected Frequency of Bill prints in the third position of Field Locator 4 on UB claims. It also
sets the default on the Payers > Practice tab > UB sub-tab in File Maintenance and on the
Encounter Maintenance > UB tab in NextGen® EPM.
NOTE: For regular UB billing, this field is usually set to 1. For recurring UB claims
billing, this field must be blank. This will allow the application to apply the proper
frequency based on where the encounter lies in the sequence of recurring encounters.
Source of Admission:
This setting populates Field Locator 15 on UB claims. The selected Source of Admission sets the
default on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab in NextGen® EPM.
NOTE: “Source of Admission” is required on electronic UB / 837I claims in ASC X12 Version
5010 format.
132
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
The setup of the UB Sub-Tab is specific to each location within the current practice.
Refer to the “Setup for UB Claims” section of this workbook for more information.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load information on this tab.
Location:
The Location field only displays when the practice has multiple locations.



Select a practice location.
For multiple location practices, the Location field must be populated before any of the
fields on the UB tab are enabled
For single location practices, the Location field does not display and all of the fields on
the UB tab are automatically enabled
Field Locator 1 Name:
The Field Locator 1 Name field is a free-form text entry field. The default for this field is blank.
If the field is left blank, the name that defaults to Field Locator 1 on the UB claim depends on how
the provider for this claim is setup for billing.
 If the provider is setup in a group, then the group name on the Group Information dialog
box displays on the UB claim form.
 If the provider is not setup in a group, then the provider name on the Modify Provider
Information dialog box displays on the UB claim form.
 If the payer requires a name on the UB claim form that is different from what defaults
from the Group Information dialog box or the Modify Provider Information dialog box, then
use this field to enter the name that must display on the UB claim form.
The address information that displays on the UB claim form cannot be changed. This information
automatically defaults from the Group Information dialog box or the Modify Provider Information
dialog box to the UB claim based on how the provider is setup for billing.
133
NextGen Healthcare
Default Hold Date:
If this check-box is checked, the hold date will default to the Hold Date field located on the
Encounter Maintenance dialog box on the UB tab. The default hold date is generated by the
system and is based on the last day of the month of the encounter date, plus any grace days that
were set in the Grace Days field on the Service Location Information dialog box. For example, if
the last day of the month of the encounter date is June 30th and the Grace Days field is set to 3,
then the hold date would be July 3rd.
Include CPT4 Modifiers:
The default for this check-box is unchecked. If left unchecked, Field Locator 44 on the UB claim
form only populates with the CPT4 code. If this check-box is checked, Field Locator 44
populates with the CPT4 code, Modifier 1, and Modifier 2.
Populate Locator 17:
When the Populate Admission Date check-box is selected, Field Locator 17, Field Locator 18,
and Field Locator 21 on the UB92 claim form are affected:
 Field Locator 17 on the UB claim form populates with the Admit Date from the Create
Encounter Maintenance dialog box
 Field Locator 18 and Field Locator 21 on the UB claim form populate with the value 99,
which cannot be changed.
Field Locator 7 (UB92 only):
Field Locator 6 and Field Locator 7 on the UB claim form are affected by the option you choose
here. Use the drop-down arrow to make the appropriate selection based on the following
descriptions:
The <none> option and the default for this field, which is a blank field, populates Field Locator 6
on the claim form with the Svc Dates (from and to) of the first line item charge from the Charge
Posting dialog box. Field Locator 7 on the claim form will be blank.
The Total Days in billing cycle option will populate the From section of Field Locator 6 on the
claim form with the first (from) Svc Dates of the first line item charge on the Charge Posting dialog
box. The Through section of Field Locator 6 on the claim form populates with the second
(through) Svc Dates of the last line item charge listed on the Charge Posting dialog box. Field
Locator 7 on the claim form populates with the total number of service days, which is calculated
from the two dates in Field Locator 6 on the claim form.
The Total Units in billing cycle option will populate the From and Through sections of Field
Locator 6 on the claim form with the Svc Dates (from and through) of the first line item charge on
the Charge Posting dialog box. Field Locator 7 on the claim form populates with a value based on
the sum of all the units listed in the Field Locator 46 column of the UB claim form.
Admission Type:
Support for Field Locator 19 includes the Type of Admission code table. These codes are used to
setup the Type of Admission at the payer master level, which defaults to the encounter level.
Once the Field Locator 19 is configured appropriately on the Payer Information dialog box, the
default for the Encounter Information dialog box assumes the same default. In other words, you
can change the type of admission code on a per encounter basis by changing the default
admission code type on the UB tab of the Encounter Information dialog box. The following table
lists the standard UB Type of Admission codes:
 Elective - 3
 Emergency - 1
 Information Not Available - 9
 Newborn - 4
 Urgent – 2
134
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Code Description:
Select the drop-down arrow to make the appropriate selection based on the following
descriptions:
 <none> option and the default for this field, which is a blank field, populates Field Locator
43 on the UB claim with the CPT4 Description.
 CPT4 Description option prints the CPT4 or alternate CPT4 description on the UB claim.
 Revenue Code Description option prints the revenue code description on the UB claim.
Payer Additional FL50:
Support for Field Locator 50 includes this free form text field, Payer Locator FL50, on the UB tab
of the Add/Modify Payer Information dialog box. This field is limited to a 2-character,alphanumeric
entry, which defaults to the UB claim form in combination with the payer's name and is the
Source of Payment code associated with the payer.
Field Locator 51:
This is a free-form text entry field. This is a required field for Enhanced UB users. You must use
this field to enter the number provided to you by the payer when creating a UB claim. The default
for this field is blank. If you are an Enhanced UB user and you leave this field blank and generate
a UB claim, an edit will occur during the claims process that reads: Loc 51 Provider Number is
missing.
National Provider ID:
Enter the National Provider Identifier (NPI) for the payer.
NOTE: The NPI is the standard unique identifier for health care providers to use in filing
and processing health care claims and other transactions. For more information about
entering NPIs see Entering the NPI in the Master Files.
Other Prov ID:
This is a 13-character, free-form text field. Any information is entered in this field for a particular
payer displays in the Field Locator 56 box on the UB paper claim forms.
Field Locator 61:
Select the drop-down arrow to make the appropriate selection based on the following
descriptions:
 <none> option, and the default for this field, which is a blank field, prints nothing in the
Field Locator 61 box on the UB claim form.
 Group Name option prints the group name from the Group Name field on the patient's
Insurance Maintenance dialog box in the Field Locator 61 box on the UB claim form.
 Payer Name option prints the payer's name in the Field Locator 61 box on the UB claim
form.
Field Locator 79 (UB92 only):
Select the drop-down arrow to make the appropriate selection based on the following
descriptions:
 <none> option and the default for this field, which is a blank field, populates Field Locator
79 on the UB claim with the value 4. This value corresponds to the CPT4 coding method.
 CPT4 Coding Method option displays the value 4 on the UB claim.
 ICD-9 Coding Method option displays the value 9 on the UB claim.
135
NextGen Healthcare
Attending Provider:
Select the drop-down arrow to make the appropriate selection based on the following
descriptions:
 <none> option and the default for this field, which is a blank field, will populate Field
Locator 82 on the UB claim with the Rendering Physician and UPIN that is attached to
the first line item charge on the Charge Posting dialog box.
 1st Consult, 2nd Consult, Admitting, Referring, Rendering, and Supervisor options
default from the corresponding fields on the Create Encounter Maintenance dialog box.
Field Locator 82 on the UB claim populates with the doctor's name and UPIN that is
entered in that field. If, on the Create Encounter Maintenance dialog box the field that
corresponds to the option you selected is blank or the provider is not setup as a provider
with the payer, an edit will occur during the claims process, which reads: Provider for
Loc82 was not found on NSF.
Operating Provider (UB04 only):
This field is available for electronic institutional claims and for paper UB04 claims.
If you select a provider in the Operating Provider field, the Operating Provider's information is
used to create the 2310B loop.
If you select a provider in the Operating Provider field and the Claim Print library option is
enabled, the appropriate information prints in FL77 on the UB04 form.
If you do not select a provider in the Operating Provider field, the 2310B Operating loop does not
automatically create. Creation of the loop then falls to the Submitter Profile option.
The submitter profile option Populate Operating Physician information if applicable only creates
the 2310B loop if a provider is selected in the Other Provider field on the UB tab of the Payer
master file.
Other Provider:
Select the drop-down arrow to make the appropriate selection based on the following
descriptions:
 <none> option is the default for this field, which is a blank field, will leave Field Locator
83 on the UB claim blank.
 1st Consult, 2nd Consult, Admitting, Referring, Rendering, and Supervisor options
default from the corresponding fields on the Create Encounter Maintenance dialog box.
Field Locator 83 on the UB claim populates with the doctor's name and UPIN that is
entered in that field. If, on the Create Encounter Maintenance dialog box, the field that
corresponds to the option you selected is blank or the provider is not setup as a provider
with the payer, an edit will occur during the claims process, which reads: Provider for
Loc83 was not found on NSF.
Field Locator 85 (UB92 only):
Select the drop-down arrow to make the appropriate selection based on the following
descriptions:
 <none> option and the default for this field, which is a blank field, populates Field Locator
85 on the UB92 claim with the rendering physician, but no UPIN, that is attached to the
first line item of the charges on the Charge Posting dialog box.
 1st Consult, 2nd Consult, Admitting, Referring, Rendering, and Supervisor options
default from the corresponding fields on the Create Encounter Maintenance dialog box.
Field Locator 85 on the UB92 claim populates with the doctor's name, but no UPIN, that
is entered in that field. If, on the Create Encounter Maintenance dialog box, the field that
corresponds to the option you selected is blank or the provider is not setup as a provider
with the payer, an edit will occur during the claims process, which reads: Provider for
Loc85 was not found on NSF
136
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Bill Classification:
The Bill Classification field is also located on the Practice Preferences dialog box, Claims tab,
which was discussed at the beginning.
The default for this field displays the entry from the Bill Classification field on the Claims tab of the
Practice Preferences dialog box. If nothing is entered in the field on the Claims tab, the field on
the UB tab automatically fills in with a value based on other criteria. To override the default value
and description, select another value from the list. If you override the default that displays in this
field, the override only affects encounters attached to this payer for Enhanced UB users. The
value that displays in this field automatically populates the second digit on Field Locator 4 on the
UB claim form. This field must be populated with the value 4 (Outpatient Rehab Facility), if you
want to use the automated UB claims process.
Type of Facility:
The Type of Facility field is also located on the Claims tab of the Practice Preferences dialog box.
The default for this field displays what was entered in the Type of Facility field on the Claims tab
of the Practice Preferences dialog box. To override the default value and description, select
another value from the list. If you override the default that displays in this field, the override only
affects encounters attached to this payer for Enhanced UB users. The value that displays in this
field automatically populates the first digit in Field Locator 4 on the UB claim form. This field must
be populated with the value 7 (Clinic) if you want to use the automated UB claims process.
Rendering Provider:
Select the appropriate rendering provider or providers that are available in the drop-down list.
All the rendering providers configured as rendering providers for the practice display in the dropdown list. Check the check-box next to each provider name set as a UB rendering provider for
this payer. The selected doctors always have a UB claim generated when charges are billed to
this payer. If the Field Locator 51 field is populated, any doctor that is selected in this field always
has a UB claim generated, regardless of the Service Item Form setting, when they have charges
that are being billed to this payer.
Bill Frequency:
This field corresponds to the field located on the Claims tab of the Practice Preferences dialog
box labeled Frequency of Bill. The default for this field is the value entered in the Frequency of
Bill field on the Practice Preferences dialog box, Claims tab. If the Frequency of Bill field is left
blank, this field is also blank. To override the default, select another value from the list. If you
override the default that displays in this field, the override only affects encounters attached to this
payer for Enhanced UB users. The value that displays in this field automatically populates the
third digit in Field Locator 4 on the UB claim form. This field must be left blank if you want to use
the automated UB claims process.
Taxonomy Code:
Select the taxonomy code to use for group billing of UB claims. If a taxonomy code is selected in
the Group master file, the code selected here overrides it.
CPT4 Field Locator 51:
The CPT4 Field Locator 51 is a required field.
Click the Open Menu button to the left of the field box to open the Field Loc 51 for a CPT4 Range
dialog box. Then, select the beginning CPT4 code for the range. The question mark button to
the right of the range boxes enables you to search for specific codes. Repeat this for the Thru
CPT4 ending range box. The CPT4 range boxes are required entries. You must enter a provider
number in the Field Locator 51 field. This is required. If no provider number is entered, there is no
CPT4 codes associated with a provider rendering billing impossible.
137
NextGen Healthcare
Transactions Sub-Tab
Default Payment:
Enter the transaction code from the Transaction Codes table that should default onto the
Payment Entry screen in NextGen® EPM when entering payments from the payer being defined.
NOTE: This is a required entry.
Default Adjustment:
Enter the transaction code from the Transaction Codes table that should default onto the
Payment Entry screen in NextGen® EPM when entering adjustments from the payer being
defined. NOTE: This is a required entry.
Default Payment/Adjustment for Bad Debt:
Enter the transaction codes from the Transaction Codes table that should default onto the
Payment Entry screen in NextGen® EPM when entering bad debt payments/adjustments from
the payer being defined.
NOTE: Training on Bad Debt will be covered during Advanced Training or in a separate
WebEx training session.
Reason Code Library:
If a specific Reason Code Library has been created for the payer being defined, select it here. If
blank, the default library from Practice Preferences > Transactions tab will be used.
Additional Transaction 1 – 6:
Enter any additional transaction codes that should default onto the Payment Entry screen when
entering transactions from the payer being defined.
138
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Libraries Sub-Tab
Claim Edit Library:
If a specific Claim Edit Library has been created for the payer being defined, select it here. If
blank, the default library from Practice Preferences > Libraries tab will be used.
Type of Service Library:
If a specific Type of Service Library has been created for the payer being defined, select it here.
If blank, the standard TOS codes from Code Tables > Type of Service will be used.
Place of Service Library:
If a specific Place of Service Library has been created for the payer being defined, select it here.
If blank, the standard POS codes from Code Tables > Places of Service will be used.
Claim Print Library:
If a specific Claim Printing Library has been created for the payer being defined, select it here. If
blank, the default library from Practice Preferences > Libraries tab will be used.
Managed Care Contract:
If a specific Contract Library has been created for the payer being defined, select it here
Participating Providers:
If a Contract Library has been selected for the payer being defined, select all rendering
providers that participate with the contract.
Remittance Profile Library:
If a specific Remittance Profile Library has been created for ERA for the payer being defined,
select it here. If blank, the default library from Practice Preferences > Libraries tab will be used.
139
NextGen Healthcare
Behavioral Health Billing Library:
If a specific Behavioral Health Billing Library has been created for the payer being defined, select
it here. If blank, the default library from Practice Preferences > Libraries tab will be used.
Statement Library:
Select the statement libraries to use when the associated payer is the primary, secondary, and
tertiary payer.
NOTE: These payer-specific settings override the ones in the Statement Parameter
Mappings master file.
Eligibility Profile Library:
Select an Eligibility Profiles library to attach to the payer. The Eligibility Profiles library is required
for submitting eligibility inquiries in batch mode. This library enables you to setup rules to
automatically complete the required fields and additional data for batch mode that you would
manually enter when running an eligibility status check in real-time mode. For more information,
see the NextGen® EPM Real-time Transaction Server Guide.
Claim Status Profile Library:
Select a Claim Status Profiles library to attach to the payer. The Claim Status Profile library is
required for submitting claim status inquiries. This library enables you to setup rules to
automatically complete the required fields and additional data for batch mode processing. For
more information, see the NextGen® EPM Real-time Transaction Server Guide.
Modifiers Library:
If a specific Claim Modifiers Library has been created for anesthesia, recurring rental and/or
behavioral health billing for the payer being defined, select it here. If blank, the default library
from Practice Preferences > Libraries tab will be used.
140
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Alt (Alternate) Payer Tab
The Alternate Payer tab is used for “Split Billing”. This is needed when the charges on a single
encounter are to be billed to two different payers on two different types of claim forms.
Example:
When billing Medicare, most services are to be billed to Medicare A on a UB claim and other
services (eg: labs, x-ray, injections) are to be billed to Medicare B on a 1500 claim.
Refer to the “Setup for Alternate Payer Split Billing” section of this workbook for more
information.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load information on this tab.
141
NextGen Healthcare
External Tab
The External tab is used when interfaces will be implemented between NextGen and one or more
external systems. This tab allows a cross-reference to be defined between the NextGen payer
and the external system payer.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load information on this tab.
External ID:
Enter the ID for the payer as it is known on the external system.
External System:
Select the external system to which NextGen will be interfaced.
142
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Co-Pays Tab
This tab only displays if the “Enable multiple co-pays” option has been activated in Enterprise
Preferences > General Tab.
The tab allows for the entry of standard co-pay amounts for the payer being defined that are
based on provider specialty. Specialty is linked to each rendering provider in the Providers table
> Practice tab.
The appropriate co-pay amount will default onto patient encounters in NextGen® EPM dependent
on the rendering provider selected on the encounter. The default co-pay amount can be
overridden if the “Allow Override” check-box is selected. Additional co-pay amounts can be
created at the patient level.
Description:
Enter a description for the co-pay being defined.
Default Co-Pay Amount:
Enter an amount for the co-pay being defined.
Allow Override:
Select this check-box if users should be able to override the default co-pay amount.
Default this Co-Pay into the Enc Co-Pay for these Specialties:
Select the provider specialties to which the co-pay being defined should apply.
143
NextGen Healthcare
Order Module Tab
This tab is used to designate one or more preferred vendors of lab and/or radiology services for
the payer being defined. The designated vendors will default to the Orders module in NextGen®
EHR.
NOTE: Setup and training of the Order Module tab will be covered in SCT Training for NextGen®
EHR.
144
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Payers - Other Functions
Import Practice Payer
For clients with multiple practices using the same payer, the Practice Tab and all of its sub-tabs
allow for entry of information specific to the payer being defined for the current practice only.
NOTE: The Practice tab includes the Claims, Secondary References, Other, UB, Transactions
and Libraries sub-tabs.
The Import Practice Payer option can be accessed by right-clicking on a payer. It enables the
practice specific information defined for the payer on the Practice tab for one practice to be
copied to the Practice tab for another practice. Practice Access information will also be copied.
145
NextGen Healthcare
Print Payers
Payer Listing reports can be accessed by right-clicking on a payer from the Payers List and
selecting Print from the menu. There are seven reports available.
146
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Practice Access
For clients with multiple practices, the Practice Access option allows the ability to control which
practice(s) can see and have access to specific Payers.
The “Practice access for payer master file” option must be enabled in Enterprise Preferences
> General tab.
Once enabled, the Practice Access option can be accessed by right-clicking on a Payer. Select
the practice(s) that should see and have access to the selected payer.
147
NextGen Healthcare
Setup for UB Claims
Step 1: System Tab > Claims Sub-Tab > UB Claims Sub-Tab
Define the following parameters for each UB payer:
Process as Claim Type:
Select as indicated on the “Provider Secondary Reference Qualifiers” document provided by your
NextGen EPM Implementation Specialist.
Force Medicare Part A on Inst Claims:
Select this check-box only if the Process as Claim Type field is set to Medicare Part B
(MB). This ensures that Medicare Part A is sent as the claim type (instead of Medicare
Part B) on UB (837I) claims.
Financial Class:
Select the appropriate financial class for the payer being defined for reporting purposes.
Insurance Type Code:
Select as indicated on the “Provider Secondary Reference Qualifiers” document provided by your
NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
Provider Secondary References > UB Claims Tab:
The six tabs (Billing, Attending, Other, Service Facility, Referring, Payer Billing) for electronic 837I
(UB) claims will automatically populate based on the Process as Claim Type selected above.
148
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 2: Practice Tab > Claims Sub-Tab > UB Claims Sub-Tab
Define the following parameters for each UB payer:
Submitter Profile:
Select the appropriate Submitter Profile to be used when creating electronic UB claims for the payer.
This is not needed for payers that will generate paper claims to be printed in-house.
Electronic Transmitter ID:
Enter the Electronic Transmitter ID number for UB claims for the payer. Refer to the Payer
Listing provided by the clearinghouse.
NOTE: This field only displays when a Submitter Profile has been selected.
Primary / Secondary / Tertiary Media Type:
Select either Electronic or Paper for each type of UB claim for the payer being defined.
149
NextGen Healthcare
Step 3: Practice Tab > UB Sub-Tab
Define the following parameters defined for each location that is to create UB claims.
IMPORTANT NOTE: All check-boxes and fields on this tab should be considered and completed
where appropriate in order to create proper UB claims for the payer being defined. Some fields
are specific to the old UB92 form and can be ignored.
NOTE: The NextGen® Import Wizard can be used for this step.
Location:
Select a location that should create UB claims. This will make all other fields on this tab available
for selection.
NOTE: Each location that should create UB claims for this payer must be set up
separately. If a location is not set up to create UB claims, a 1500 claim will be created for
the payer/location.
Field Locator 1 Name:
Leave blank to use the Group Name defined in the Groups master file in File Maintenance for Field
Locator 1 (paper) and 2010AA, NM103 (electronic). Otherwise, enter a name to override the Group
Name.
Admission Type:
Select the Admission Type for Field Locator 14.
NOTE: “Admission Type” is required on electronic UB / 837I claims in ASC X12 Version
5010 format.
150
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Code Description:
Select CPT4 Description or Revenue Code Description for Field Locator 43 (paper only)
Field Locator 51:
Enter the legacy Payer ID or Tax ID for Field Locator 51 (paper) and 2010AA, REF02 (electronic).
NOTE: This is a required entry.
National Provider ID:
Enter the NPI number for Field Locator 56 (paper) and 2010AA, NM109 (electronic). An NPI
number entered here will override numbers defined at the Group and Provider levels.
Field Locator 61:
Select Group Name or Payer Name from the Insurance Maintenance window for Field Locator 61
(paper only).
Attending Provider:
Select Rendering for Field Locator 76 (paper) and 2310A, NM103-04 (electronic).
Operating Provider:
Select the encounter Provider, if applicable, for Field Locator 77 (paper) and 2310B, NM103-04
(electronic).
Other Provider:
Select the encounter Provider, if applicable, for Field Locator 78 (paper) and 2310C, NM102-04
(electronic).
NOTE: The above providers pull from the Encounter Maintenance window. Options include:
st
nd
1 Consult, 2 Consult, Admitting, Referring, Rendering, and Supervisor.
Bill Classification:
Defaults for Field Locator 4 (paper) and 2300 CLM05-2 (electronic).
Type of Facility:
Defaults for Field Locator 4 (paper) and 2300 CLM05-1 (electronic).
Bill Frequency:
Defaults for Field Locator 4 (paper) and 2300 CLM05-3 (electronic).
NOTE: The above three fields create the 3-digit code for Field Locator 4. The defaults
were defined in Practice Preferences > Claims tab. The defaults can be changed for the
payer if needed.
Rendering Provider:
Select all rendering providers that should have UB claims created for this payer/location.
NOTE: If a provider is not selected, a 1500 form will be created for the
provider/payer/location, unless there is additional UB specific setup in the SIM Library.
151
NextGen Healthcare
Setup for Alternate Payer “Split Billing”
At times, it may be necessary to bill services on a single encounter to multiple payers at the same
time.
Example:
When billing Medicare, some services are covered under Medicare’s encounter rate
reimbursement and they must be filed to Medicare Part A on a UB (837I) claim form. Other
services are not covered under the encounter rate reimbursement and they must be filed to
Medicare Part B as fee-for-service on a 1500 (837P) claim form.
The services that are filed to Medicare Part B are known as “carve-outs”. Common examples of
carve-out services may include labs, x-rays, injections, etc.
A single payer can be setup in File Maintenance as Medicare Part A for UB claims. Within that
payer is an Alternate Payer setup for Medicare Part B that will force carve-out SIM codes to a
1500 claim.
This setup allows a single insurance to be attached to encounters for Medicare patients that will
automatically split services to separate claims based in SIM code.
Step 1: Payer Defaults-1 Tab
Define all parameters on the Payer Defaults-1 tab as needed for Medicare Part A on UB (837I) claims.
Step 2: Defaults-2 Tab
Define all parameters on the Defatuls-2 tab as needed for Medicare Part A on UB (837I) claims.
152
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 3: System Tab > Claims Sub-Tab
Define all parameters on the System tab > Claims sub-tab as needed for Medicare Part A and
for Medicare Part B.
NOTE: Select the “Force Medicare Part A on Inst Claims” check-box if the Process as
Claim Type field is set to Medicare Part B (MB). This ensures that Medicare Part A is
sent as the claim type (instead of Medicare Part B) on UB (837I) claims.
Provider Secondary Reference settings on the 1500 Claims sub-tab are for Medicare Part B
electronic 1500 (837P) claims.
Provider Secondary Reference settings on the UB Claims sub-tab are for Medicare Part A electronic
UB (837I) claims.
153
NextGen Healthcare
Step 4: Practice Tab > Claims Sub-Tab
Define all parameters on the Practice tab > Claims sub- tab as needed for Medicare Part A and
for Medicare Part B.
Settings on the 1500 Claims sub-tab are for Medicare Part B 1500 (837P) claims.
Settings on the UB Claims sub-tab are for Medicare Part A UB (837I) claims.
154
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 5: Practice Tab > Other Sub-Tab
Define all parameters on the Practice tab > Other sub-tab as needed for Medicare Part A on UB claims.
Step 6: Practice Tab > UB Sub-Tab
Define all parameters on the Practice tab > UB sub-tab as needed for Medicare Part A on UB claims.
155
NextGen Healthcare
Step 7: Practice Tab > Transactions Sub-Tab
Define all parameters on the Practice tab > Transactions sub-tab as needed for Medicare Part A on UB claims.
Step 8: Practice Tab > Libraries Sub-Tab
Define all parameters on the Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab as needed for Medicare Part A on UB claims.
156
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 9: Alt Payer Tab
Define all parameters on the Alt Payer tab as needed for Medicare Part B on 1500 claims.
Payer Name:
Enter Medicare Part B
Address:
Enter the address for claims
Submitter Profile Library:
Select the Submitter Profile to be used for electronic
1500 (837P) claims
Claim Edit Library:
Select the Claim Edit Library to be used for Medicare Part B
Claim Print Library:
Select the Claim Print Library to be used for Medicare Part B
Default Payment/Adjustment: Select the default Transactions Codes to be used for
Medicare Part B
Default Reason Code:
Select the default Reason Code to be used for Medicare Part B
Media Type:
Select Electronic
Form:
Select 1500
ERA Reason Code Library:
Select the Reason Code Library to be used for Medicare Part B
Electronic Trans ID:
Enter the Electronic Transmitter ID number for Medicare Part B
157
NextGen Healthcare
Location:
Select a location that should create 1500 claims. This will make all
fields in the Location Specific Information section available for selection.
NOTE: Each location that should create 1500 claims for the alternate payer
must be setup separately. If a location is not setup to create 1500 claims, a UB
claim will be created for the alternate payer/location.
Provider Number:
Enter the legacy location specific group # for Medicare Part B
National Provider ID (NPI):
Enter the location specific NPI number
Valid Alternate Payer Service Items: Enter the individual SIM codes SIM code ranges
for the carve-out services. It is recommended
that each SIM code be entered as an individual
range. (eg: J3465 – J3465)
NOTE: The NextGen® Import Wizard can be used for this step. The wizard will
overwrite the alternate Payer Name and Address, so enter that information after
importing the carve-out codes.
158
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Setup for “Wrap Payer” Billing
The advent of Managed Care programs to privatize Medicare, and in some states Medicaid,
brings with it some special billing considerations.
Some patients may have a Medicare or Medicaid Managed Care program as their primary
insurance. Therefore, claims for the patient’s encounters will be filed to the managed care payer.
Some Managed Care programs will be billed as fee-for-service. Other programs will require the
health center to bill the claim as they would for the true Medicare NGS and/or Medicaid
counterpart.
Medicare
With Medicare managed care programs that reimburse on a fee for service or capitated basis,
Medicare will allow health centers to bill an additional claim to Medicare NGS for what is referred
to as a “wrap payment”. The purpose of a wrap payment is to ensure that the health center will
get reimbursed their full Medicare per diem/encounter rate, since the managed care program may
reimburse less than that amount.
In order to file a claim for a wrap payment to Medicare NGS, they must have the contract for the
managed care program on file. The Medicare NGS wrap claim must appear as if it were a
primary claim.
Medicaid
In states where Medicaid managed care programs are prevalent (eg: NY, CA, TX), Medicaid will
allow health centers to bill an additional claim to their local Medicaid carrier for a “wrap payment”.
The purpose of a wrap payment is to ensure that the health center will get reimbursed their full
Medicaid per diem/encounter rate, since the managed care may reimburse less than that amount.
A claim for a wrap payment to Medicaid may or may not need to appear as if it were a primary
claim. It may also need to be filed at the same time the claim is filed to the managed care plan.
NOTE: If the claim for the wrap payer is filed at the same time the claim is filed to the
primary managed care plan, there will be no primary payment information on the claim for
the wrap payer.
159
NextGen Healthcare
Tips for Setup of Wrap Payers:

The wrap payer should always be set-up as a separate payer (eg: Medicaid Wrap
Payer). This ensures that wrap payments will be separated and accurately reported in
the financials on the UDS Report – Table 9C.

The Medicare/Medicaid payer and the Medicare/Medicaid wrap payer should be setup in
File Maintenance to have the same functionality. (eg: Encounter Rate Billing, Roll-Up
Billing, etc.)

If the Medicare/Medicaid payer uses Encounter Rate Billing, then a separate Encounter
Rate Billing Library must be setup for the Medicare/Medicaid wrap payer.

Verify with Medicare/Medicaid as to whether they expect the wrap claim to appear as if it
were a primary claim or as a secondary claim.

Depending on the state, the claim for the Medicare/Medicaid wrap payer may need to
look slightly different than the claim for the Medicare/Medicaid managed care plan.
For example, California follows these guidelines:

160
o
If the Medicare payer is setup for Encounter Rate Billing using code 0521 (or Roll-Up
Billing by Revenue Code 0521), then the Medicare wrap payer should be setup to
use code 0519.
o
If the CA Medi-Cal payer is setup for Encounter Rate Billing using code 01 with the
encounter rate amount, the Medi-Cal wrap payer should be setup to use code 18 with
the encounter rate amount.
A Payer Alert can be tied to the Medicare/Medicaid payer in File Maintenance to remind
users to also select the Medicare/Medicaid wrap payer as a secondary insurance for the
patient. The alert can be setup in Practice Preferences > Alerts tab to display during
check-in and/or check-out.
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
NOTE: The wrap payer setup below is for example purposes only. The actual setup of each tab
in the Payers table for a wrap payer may be different for every client.
Step 1: Payers > Payer Defaults–1 Tab
Define all parameters on this tab as needed for the wrap payer.
Step 2: Payers > Defaults –2 Tab
Define all parameters on this tab as needed for the wrap payer.
161
NextGen Healthcare
Step 3: Payers > System Tab
Define all parameters on this tab as needed for the wrap payer. If the wrap payer will be billed on a
1500 claim form, complete the Provider Secondary References on the Claims tab > 1500 Claims
sub-tab for electronic 837P claims. If the wrap payer will be billed on a UB claim form, complete the
Provider Secondary References on the Claims tab > UB Claims sub-tab for electronic 837I claims.
Step 4: Payers > Practice Tab
Define all parameters on this tab and sub-tabs as needed for the wrap payer. If the wrap payer
will be billed on a 1500 claim form, complete the Claims tab > 1500 Claims sub-tab. If the wrap
payer will be billed on a UB claim form, complete the Claims tab > UB Claims sub-tab.
162
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 5: Payers > Practice Tab > Other Sub-Tab
Define all parameters on this tab as needed for the wrap payer.
Always bill as primary:
Select this check-box if the secondary claim for the wrap payer
should appear as if it were a primary claim
Bill with prior payer:
Select this check-box if the secondary claim for the wrap payer should be
filed at the same time the claim is filed to the primary managed care plan
Step 6: Payers > Practice Tab > UB Sub-Tab
If the wrap payer will be billed on a UB claim form, define the appropriate parameters on the UB
sub-tab for each location.
163
NextGen Healthcare
Setup for Dental Billing
Dental Payers can be setup in NextGen® EPM to be billed on 1500, ADA, or UB claim forms.
The type of form to be used is dependent on each payer.
The following claim formats are supported:
Electronic 1500:
Paper 1500:
837P
CMS 1500 Form (2005)
Electronic ADA:
Paper ADA:
837D
ADA Form (2006)
Electronic UB:
Paper UB:
837I
UB04 Form (2004)
Step 1: Practice Preferences
Practice Preferences > Charge Entry Tab
The following fields must be enabled in order to enter dental related information on the Charge
Posting window in NextGen® EPM.
164
Display tooth, surface, quadrant:
Select this check-box to enable the Tooth,
Surface and Quadrant fields on the Charge
Posting window
Allow multiple tooth Surfaces:
Select this check-box to allow the selection of
multiple tooth Surfaces on the Charge Posting
window
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 2: Code Tables
File Maintenance > Code Tables
Code Tables are a set of system level tables that come pre-installed in the NextGen application.
They are defined to meet standard specifications. Within each table, new items cannot be
created. However, the description for existing items can be modified and items can be hidden as
needed.
The Tooth, Surface and Quadrants code tables are pre-installed with standard ADA codes and
descriptions used for dental billing.
Code Tables > Tooth
Code Tables > Surface
Code Tables > Quadrants
165
NextGen Healthcare
Step 3: CPT4 Codes
Dental codes are not pre-installed. All codes needed for dental billing must be added in the CPT4
Codes table before they can be used in the Service Item Library.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Dental codes can be loaded by a NextGen EDI/Claims Analyst.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > CPT4 Codes
Define dental CPT4 codes as follows:
166
Code:
Enter the code as it should appear on claims
Description:
Enter the description as it should appear on claims
Type of Service:
Select Other Medical
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 4: Service Item Library
File Maintenance > Libraries > Service Items > General Tab
Define the following parameters for each dental SIM code:
Place of Service:
Component:
Department:
Revenue Code:
Form:
Select Office
Select Global or Professional
Select the Department for reports
Select the appropriate Revenue Code for UB claims
Select ADA
NOTE: This field must be set to ADA for all dental SIM codes. The “Dental
Payer” checkbox in the Payers table > Defaults-2 tab determines which payers will
create ADA claims. The “Form” field in the SIM Library > Payer tab determines which
payers will create 1500 or UB claims.
Non-Facility and Facility Price:
Enter the price
Self-pay Qualifying Encounter:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being
defined is considered a “face-to-face” encounter with a qualified provider for patients with
no insurance and it should be counted as a qualifying encounter.
Sliding Fee Qualifying Encounter:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being
defined is considered a “face-to-face” encounter with a qualified provider for patients on a
sliding fee schedule and it should be counted as a qualifying encounter.
Qualifying Encounter for all payers: Select this check-box if the SIM code being
defined is considered a “face-to-face” encounter with a qualified provider for patients with
insurance and it should be counted as a qualifying encounter.
167
NextGen Healthcare
Setup for Dental Payers on ADA Claims
Create a separate Payer for each ADA dental payer.
NOTE: The dental payer setup below is for example purposes only. The actual setup of each
tab in the Payers table for a dental payer may be different for every client.
Step 1: Payers > Payer Defaults-1 Tab
Define all parameters on the Payer Defaults-1 tab as needed for the dental payer.
NOTE: Clients may create dental payers where the “Payer Name” starts with the letter “D”. This
is for ease of selection during insurance lookup. The actual name needed on claims can be
entered in the “Payer Alias Name” field.
168
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 2: Payers > Defaults-2 Tab
Define all parameters on the Defaults-2 tab as needed for the dental payer.
Dental Payer:
Select this check-box for dental payers that are to be filed on an
ADA claim form
NOTE: In order to create an ADA claim form for dental SIM codes, this checkbox must be selected for the payer, and the SIM codes must be defined with
Form = ADA on the SIM Library > General tab.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Either of the below setup scenarios will result in a dental charge going to
the Pat Amt (Patient Amount) column on the Charge Posting window instead of the Ins1 Amt
(Insurance Amount) column.
1. The dental SIM code is defined in the SIM Library with Form = ADA, but the dental payer
is defined in the Payers table with Dental Payer = unchecked.
2. The dental SIM code is defined in the SIM Library with Form = 1500, but the dental payer
is defined in the Payers table with Dental Payer = checked.
169
NextGen Healthcare
Step 3: Payers > System Tab > Claims Sub-Tab
Define all parameters on the System tab > Claims sub-tab as needed for the dental payer. If the
payer will be billed on an ADA claim form, complete the Provider Secondary References on the
Claims tab > ADA Claims sub-tab for electronic 837D claims.
Process as Claim Type:
Select as indicated on the “Provider Secondary Reference Qualifiers” document provided
by your NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
Financial Class:
Select the appropriate financial class for the payer being defined for reporting purposes.
Insurance Type Code:
Select as indicated on the “Provider Secondary Reference Qualifiers” document provided
by your NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
Provider Secondary References > ADA Claims Tab:
The five tabs (Billing, Referring, Rendering, Service Facility, Payer Billing) for electronic
837D (ADA) claims will automatically populate based on the Process as Claim Type
selected above.
170
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 4: Payers > Practice Tab
Define all parameters on the Practice tab and each sub-tab as needed for the dental payer. If the
dental payer will be billed on an ADA claim form, complete the Claims tab > ADA Claims subtab.
ADA Claims:
Submitter Profile:
Select the appropriate Submitter Profile to be used for electronic ADA claims for the
payer being defined.
Electronic Transmitter ID:
Enter the electronic ID number for the payer being defined. Refer to the Payer Listing
provided by the clearinghouse.
NOTE: This field only appears if a Submitter Profile has been selected.
Primary / Secondary / Tertiary Media Type:
Select either Electronic or Paper for each type of ADA claim for the payer being defined.
171
NextGen Healthcare
Step 5: Payers > Practice Tab > Libraries Sub-Tab
If a specific Claim Edits Library and/or Claim Printing Library was created to be used with dental
payers, be sure to link those libraries to each dental payer on the Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
NOTE: If these fields are left blank for dental payers, the system will use the default Claim Edit
and Claim Print Libraries defined in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab.
172
Claim Edit Library:
Select the Claim Edits Library created for dental payers
Claim Print Library:
Select the Claim Printing Library created for dental payers
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Setup for Dental Payers on UB Claims
There are payers that accept dental claims on a UB form. Example: Medi-Cal (California
Medicaid). Create a separate Payer for each UB dental payer.
NOTE: The dental payer setup below is for example purposes only. The actual setup of each
tab in the Payers table for a dental payer may be different for every client.
Step 1: Payers > Payer Defaults-1 Tab
Define all parameters on the Payer Defaults-1 tab as needed for the dental payer.
NOTE: Clients may create dental payers where the “Payer Name” starts with the letter “D”. This
is for ease of selection during insurance lookup. The actual name needed on claims can be
entered in the “Payer Alias Name” field.
173
NextGen Healthcare
Step 2: Payers > Defaults-2 Tab
Define all parameters on the Defaults-2 tab as needed for the dental payer.
Dental Payer:
Select this check-box for dental payers that are to be filed on
a UB claim form
IMPORTANT NOTE: Either of the below setup scenarios will result in a dental charge going to
the Pat Amt (Patient Amount) column on the Charge Posting window instead of the Ins1 Amt
(Insurance Amount) column.
1. The dental SIM code is defined in the SIM Library with Form = ADA, but the dental payer
is defined in the Payers table with Dental Payer = unchecked.
2. The dental SIM code is defined in the SIM Library with Form = 1500, but the dental payer
is defined in the Payers table with Dental Payer = checked.
174
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 3: Payers > System Tab
Define all parameters on the System tab > Claims sub-tab as needed for the dental payer. If the
payer will be billed on an UB claim form, complete the Provider Secondary References on the
Claims tab > UB Claims sub-tab for electronic 837I claims.
Process as Claim Type:
Select as indicated on the “Provider Secondary Reference Qualifiers” document provided
by your NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
Financial Class:
Select the appropriate financial class for the payer being defined for reporting purposes.
Insurance Type Code:
Select as indicated on the “Provider Secondary Reference Qualifiers” document provided
by your NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist.
Provider Secondary References > UB Claims Tab:
The six tabs (Billing, Attending, Other, Service Facility, Referring, Payer Billing) for
electronic 837I (UB) claims will automatically populate based on the Process as Claim
Type selected above.
175
NextGen Healthcare
Step 4: Payers > Practice Tab
Define all parameters on the Practice tab and each sub-tab as needed for the dental payer. If the
dental payer will be billed on a UB claim form, complete the Claims tab > UB Claims sub-tab.
UB Claims:
Submitter Profile:
Select the appropriate Submitter Profile to be used for electronic UB claims for the payer
being defined.
Electronic Transmitter ID:
Enter the electronic ID number for the payer being defined. Refer to the Payer Listing
provided by the clearinghouse.
NOTE: This field only appears if a Submitter Profile has been selected.
Primary / Secondary / Tertiary Media Type:
Select either Electronic or Paper for each type of UB claim for the payer being defined.
176
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 5: Payers > Practice Tab > UB Sub-Tab
UB payers require specific settings in the Payers table > Practice tab > UB sub-tab. The
following parameters defined for each location that is to create UB claims.
NOTE: The NextGen® Import Wizard can be used for this step.
IMPORTANT NOTE: All check-boxes and fields on this tab should be considered and completed
where appropriate in order to create proper UB claims for the dental payer being defined. Some
fields are specific to the old UB92 form and can be ignored.
Location:
Select a location that should create UB claims. This will make
all other fields on this tab available for selection.
NOTE: Each location that should create UB claims for this payer must be setup
separately. If a location is not setup to create UB claims, a 1500 claim will be
created for the payer/location.
Field Locator 1 Name: Enter the name of the practice as it should appear in Field Locator 1
(paper) and 2010AA, NM103 (electronic)
Code Description:
Select CPT4 Description or Revenue Code Description for Field
Locator 43 (paper only)
177
NextGen Healthcare
Field Locator 51:
Enter the legacy Payer ID or Tax ID for Field Locator 51 (paper)
and 2010AA, REF02 (electronic)
NOTE: This is a required entry.
National Provider ID: Enter the location specific NPI number for Field Locator 56
(paper) and 2010AA, NM109 (electronic)
Field Locator 61:
Select Group Name or Payer Name from the Insurance
Maintenance window for Field Locator 61 (paper only)
Attending Provider:
Select Rendering for Field Locator 76 (paper) and 2310A, NM103-04
(electronic)
Operating Provider:
Select the encounter Provider, if applicable, for Field Locator 77
(paper) and 2310B, NM103-04 (electronic)
Other Provider:
Select the encounter Provider, if applicable, for Field Locator 78
(paper) and 2310C, NM102-04 (electronic)
NOTE: The above providers pull from the Encounter Maintenance window. Options
st
nd
include: 1 Consult, 2 Consult, Admitting, Referring, Rendering, Supervisor
Bill Classification:
Defaults for Field Locator 4 (paper) and 2300 CLM05-2 (electronic)
Type of Facility:
Defaults for Field Locator 4 (paper) and 2300 CLM05-1 (electronic)
Bill Frequency:
Defaults for Field Locator 4 (paper) and 2300 CLM05-3 (electronic)
NOTE: The above three fields create the 3-digit code for Field Locator 4. The
defaults were defined in Practice Preferences > Claims tab. The defaults can be
changed for the payer if needed.
Rendering Provider:
Select all rendering providers that should have UB claims
created for this payer/location.
NOTE: If a provider is not selected, a 1500 form will be created for the
provider/payer/location.
178
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 6: Payers > Practice Tab > Libraries Sub-Tab
If a specific Claim Edits Library and/or Claim Printing Library was created to be used with dental
payers, be sure to link those libraries to each dental payer on the Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
NOTE: If these fields are left blank for dental payers, the system will use the default Claim Edit
and Claim Print Libraries defined in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab.
Claim Edit Library:
Select the Claim Edits Library created for dental payers
Claim Print Library:
Select the Claim Printing Library created for dental payers
179
NextGen Healthcare
File Maintenance > Master Files > Practice
Groups
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Master Files
Practice Master File – Groups
The Groups table is used in NextGen® EPM for electronic and paper insurance claims. The table
includes payer specific Group information for Box 33 on 1500 claims.
The Groups table must be linked to rendering providers in the Providers table > Practice tab >
Group Information section.
Group Name:
Enter a name for the group being defined. This name does not appear on claim forms.
Group Phone:
Enter a phone number for the group being defined.
Tax ID Number:
Enter the group’s Tax ID number for Box 25 on 1500 claims.
National Provider ID:
Enter the group’s NPI# for Box 33 on 1500 claims.
Suppress Rendering/Attending Loop:
Leave blank unless instructed otherwise by a NextGen EDI/Claims Analyst during claims testing.
180
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Taxonomy Code:
Select the group’s Taxonomy Code for electronic claims, if applicable.
NOTE: If group taxonomy code is needed on electronic claims, the “Populate PRV in
2000A with group taxonomy for group claims” option must be selected in the Payers table
> System tab > Electronic Claims sub-tab.
Service Location:
Select the <Default> Service Location to define Group information that is the same for ALL
locations. Or select a specific Service Location to define Group information for the location that is
different from all other locations.
Payer Name:
Open the <Default> Payer Name row to define Group Number and Name/Organization
information that is the same for ALL payers. Or create a new row to define information for a
specific payer that is different from all other payers.
181
NextGen Healthcare
Group Number:
Enter the group number for Box 33 on 1500 claims for the location/payer.
NOTE: This will typically be Tax ID for most payers.
Effective/Expiration Date:
Enter effective and expiration dates for the group information being defined for the location/payer.
NOTE: For claims testing, the Effective Date should be 6-8 weeks prior to EPM Go-Live.
Name/Organization:
Enter the group name for Box 33 on 1500 claims for the location/payer.
Address:
Enter the group address, city, state, zip, county and country for Box 33 on 1500 claims for the
location/payer.
NOTE: Electronic claims in ASC X12 Version 5010 format requires that the group’s
“billing provider” address be a physical address, not a PO Box address, with a 9 digit
zip code.
Taxonomy Code:
Select the taxonomy code for electronic claims for the location/payer only if it is different from the
code selected for the group at the top of the window.
Bill-To Location:
If a PO Box address was entered above, select a location with a physical address to be sent as
the “billing provider” address on electronic claims.
182
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
File Maintenance > Master Files > System
Providers
eLearning Curriculum 1:
eLearning Course 1:
Overview of Payers and Providers
Overview of the Providers System Master File
eLearning Curriculum 2:
eLearning Course 2:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Providers
The Providers table consists of the rendering providers within the practice and also the
referring providers that may refer patients to the practice.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load this table.
Demographics Tab
Last Name:
Enter the last name of the provider. Do not include the provider’s degree (eg: MD, DO, PA, NP)
at the end of the name.
Display As:
This field is automatically populated from the Last Name, First Name and Middle Name fields.
The provider’s degree should be added to the end of the last name here as this is the field used
on paper claims.
Degree:
Enter the degree for the provider. This will be included in the display of the provider’s name in
NextGen® EHR.
Example:
Last Name:
First Name:
Middle Name:
Display As:
Degree:
Smith
John
(optional)
Smith MD, John
MD
Address / Phone:
Enter this information for rendering providers. It is optional for referring providers.
183
NextGen Healthcare
System Tab
Default (UPIN):
Enter the UPIN number for all rendering providers and all referring providers.
NOTE: UPIN is not required for 1500 billing. But it is required for UB billing because the
application is hard-coded to look for an entry in this field when creating electronic 837I
claims. Regardless of the type of claim, NextGen recommends entering a UPIN for ALL
providers even if it is a generic number such as OTH000.
Taxonomy Code:
Select the appropriate taxonomy code for all rendering providers. Leave blank for all referring
providers.
Specialty Code 1 and 2:
Enter the appropriate specialty code(s) for all referring providers. This will be used in NextGen®
EHR on the Referral template when selecting a referring provider by specialty.
National Provider ID:
Enter the NPI number for all rendering providers and all referring providers. NPI numbers can be
obtained from the following website: https://nppes.cms.hhs.gov
Provider Licensing:
Select the NextGen applications for which a rendering provider should be licensed. Each
rendering provider should be licensed in only one section; Full-time or Part-time or Mid-Level.
Leave blank for all referring providers.
NOTE: Additional rendering provider licenses will be needed for CHC clinics so that
“generic” rendering providers can be created for non-billable providers. For example:
Nurse, Enabling Services, Dental Assistant. These generic rendering providers will be
setup to “Enable Supervisor Billing” on the Practice tab. To obtain additional licenses,
contact your NextGen Sales Representative or Project Manager/Coordinator.
184
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Notes Tab
Additional informational can be entered here to display as an alert to users when the provider is
selected as the referring provider on an appointment.
185
NextGen Healthcare
Elig/Ref Tab
The Eligibility/Referral tab displays only if the “Enable Eligibility\Referral” option has been
selected in Practice Preferences > General Tab.
The information entered on this tab will be used in the NextGen® RTS (Real-Time Transaction
Server) module. RTS provides the following functionalities:




Real-Time Referral Requests/Responses
Real-Time Referral History Requests/Responses
Real-Time Eligibility Requests/Responses
Real-Time Claim Status Requests/Responses
NOTE: Setup and training for the RTS module will be covered in a separate training session by a
NextGen® RTS representative.
Receiving Provider
Enter information required for providers receiving eligibility information back from RTS eligibility
inquiries.
Requesting Provider
Enter information required for providers sending RTS requests for referral histories.
Provider
Enter information required for providers receiving referral information back from RTS for new
referral requests.
.
186
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Credentialing Tab
The Credentialing Tab allows for entry of information specific to the various credentials for the
provider being defined.
NOTE: The options available for selection in the Credentialing Type field must first be
created in File Maintenance > Master Lists > Credentialing.
187
NextGen Healthcare
Provider Types Tab
The Provider Types tab determines in what fields within NextGen® EPM the provider being
defined should display and be available for selection by users.
Provider Types can be entered in the following fields in EPM.
Encounter Maintenance > General Tab:
Admitting
First Consulting
Second Consulting
Referring
Modify Patient Information > Demographics Tab:
Primary Care Provider
Primary Dental Provider
Turn off the green check mark for any field(s) in which the provider should not be
displayed and available for user selection.
Practice Level Provider Types can be created in Practice Preferences > Provider tab. These
twelve provider types can be entered on the Modify Patient Information > Provider tab in EPM.
Turn off the green check mark for any type(s) in which the provider should not be
displayed and available for user selection.
188
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Practice Tab
For clients with multiple practices using the same providers, the Practice Tab allows for entry of
information specific to the rendering provider being defined for the current practice only. If the
provider is to be a rendering provider in more than one practice, this information must be entered
for each practice.
Rendering provider at this practice:
Select this check-box for all rendering providers in the current practice. Do not select this checkbox for referring providers.
Supervising provider at this practice:
Select this check-box only for those rendering providers that can supervise mid-level rendering
providers (eg: NP, PA) in the practice.
Signature on File:
Select this check-box for all rendering providers.
Supervisor Required:
Select this check-box only for mid-level rendering providers which require supervision.
NOTE: This check-box only displays if the “Supervisor” option has been enabled in
Practice Preferences > Encounters tab.
DEA Number:
Enter the rendering provider’s DEA number. This is used for prescriptions in NextGen® EHR.
State License Number:
Enter the rendering provider’s state license number.
Tax ID Number/SSN:
Enter the rendering provider’s Tax ID number.
189
NextGen Healthcare
Provider Type:
Select the appropriate provider type for the rendering provider. This is used by CHC clinics and
is required for the UDS report.
Specialty:
Select the appropriate specialty for the rendering provider.
Enable Supervisor Billing:
Select this check-box only for mid-level rendering providers for which claims may be created in
the name of a supervising provider. This enables supervisor billing at the provider level.
NOTE: Supervisor billing can be enabled at four levels:




190
Provider – Claims for the mid-level provider will be created in the supervisor’s name
for patients seen in any location with any payer.
Provider/Payer – Claims for the mid-level provider are created in the supervisor’s
name for patients seen in any location with a specific payer.
Provider/Location – Claims for the mid-level provider are created in the supervisor’s
name for patients seen in a specific location with any payer.
Provider/Location/Payer – Claims for the mid-level provider are created in the
supervisor’s name for patients seen in a specific location with a specific payer.
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Service Location and Group Information
NOTE: ALL rendering providers must have at least one row defined for <Default> Service
Location and <Default> Payer using Tax ID# as the Provider Number.
Service Location:
Select the <Default> Service Location to define Provider information that is the same for ALL
locations. Or select a specific Service Location to define Provider information for the location that
is different from all other locations.
Payer Name:
Open the <Default> Payer Name row to define Provider Number and Group Name information
that is the same for ALL payers. Or create a new row to define information for a specific payer
that is different from all other payers.
Provider Number:
Enter the provider number for Box 24J on 1500 claims for the location/payer.
NOTE: This will typically be Tax ID for most payers.
Effective/Expiration Date:
Enter effective and expiration dates for the provider information being defined for the location/payer.
NOTE: For claims testing, the Effective Date should be 6-8 weeks prior to EPM Go-Live.
Group Name:
Select the group name from the Groups table for Box 33 on 1500 claims for the location/payer.
191
NextGen Healthcare
Categories Tab
Service and Modifier Categories are used in the NextGen® EHR Procedures Module. Diagnosis
Categories are used in the EHR Problems Module. They are groupings of codes that can be
linked to Providers and allow for efficient search and selection.
Service and Modifier Categories are not used in NextGen® EPM. However, Diagnosis
Categories can be used in EPM when searching for a diagnosis code on the Charge Posting
screen. The Diagnosis Categories available during the search are those that are linked to the
encounter rendering provider.
NOTE: Setup and training of the Service and Modifier Categories will be covered in SCT Training
for NextGen® EHR.
Diagnosis:
Select from the list of available Diagnosis Categories on the left that are to be assigned to the
provider being defined. Categories are moved from left to right by use of the blue arrow. The
display order of the assigned categories in EHR/EPM is controlled by the blue up/down arrows.
192
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
External Tab
The External tab is used when interfaces will be implemented between NextGen and one or more
external systems. This tab allows a cross-reference to be defined between the NextGen provider
and the external system provider.
External ID:
Enter the ID for the provider as it is known on the external system.
External System:
Select the external system to which NextGen will be interfaced.
193
NextGen Healthcare
EHR Tab
Information on this tab is used in NextGen® EHR.
NOTE: Setup and training of the EHR tab will be covered in SCT Training for NextGen® EHR.
194
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Chart Tracking Tab
The Chart Tracking tab displays only if the system is licensed for the NextGen® Chart Tracking
module.
NOTE: Chart Tracking is a legacy module that is no longer available to clients.
195
NextGen Healthcare
Order Module Tab
This tab is used to designate Test Favorites (commonly used) for the provider being defined.
These are used in the NextGen® EHR Orders Module.
NOTE: Setup and training of the Order Module tab will be covered in SCT Training for NextGen®
EHR.
196
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Practice Access
For clients with multiple practices, the Practice Access option allows the ability to control which
practice(s) can see and have access to specific Providers.
The “Practice access for provider master file” option must be enabled in Enterprise
Preferences > General tab.
Once enabled, the Practice Access option can be accessed by right-clicking on a Provider.
Select the practice(s) that should see and have access to the selected provider.
197
NextGen Healthcare
AutoFlow Sequences
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Autoflow Sequences
AutoFlow Sequences are used in NextGen® EPM. They define the sequence of screens that will
be presented to users during the Check-In and Check-Out processes. Sequences can be
created per practice, per location and per user. Once created, practice and location sequences
are attached in Practice Preferences > Auto-Flow tab. User sequences are attached in User
Preferences > General > Auto-Flow Sequences tab.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Check-In and Check-Out will be covered during Core
Group Training.
Budget Statement Messages
Budget Statement Messages are used in conjunction with Budget Plans in NextGen® EPM. The
messages are linked to a Budget Statement Library in File Maintenance. The library is then
attached in Practice Preferences > Budget Accounts tab.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
NOTE: Training on Budget Plans will be covered during Advanced Training.
198
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Case Contacts
Case Contacts are used in Case Management. They identify the individuals that may be involved
in a patient’s case.
NOTE: Training on Case Management will be covered in a separate WebEx training session.
199
NextGen Healthcare
CMN Information
Certificate of Medical Necessity (CMN) forms can be created for specific DME devices by SIM
code. The forms include specific questions and answer formats required by payers for that DME
device.
The CMN forms are then used in EPM to capture information and answer the form questions for
patients DME devices. The information is then included in electronic 837P (1500) claim files for
payers that requiring CMN information for those specific CPT4 codes.
200
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Collection Agencies
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Collection Agencies
Collection Agencies are used in NextGen® EPM when sending one or more encounters for an
account to collections (Bad Debt).
NOTE: Training on Collections/Bad Debt will be covered during Advanced Training.
201
NextGen Healthcare
Counters
The Counters table can be used to configure the next value to be generated by NextGen for each
of the following system assigned numbers within a practice:












Account Number
Appointment Number
Claim ID Number
Case Number
Encounter Number
Group Control Number
ICS Batch Number
ICS Doc Number
Invoice Number
Lab Order Number
Medical Record Number
Person Record Number
NOTE: These values should not be modified unless instructed otherwise by a NextGen
Representative for conversion, interface, or other purposes.
202
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
CPT4 Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – CPT4 Codes
CPT4 Codes (Current Procedural Terminology Version 4) are used in NextGen® EHR and
EPM. The table is pre-installed and consists of all CPT4 codes for the current year. A
CPT4 code must exist in this table before it can be added to the Service Item Library.
New CPT4 codes can be added and codes that are no longer valid can be hidden.
All codes needed for dental billing must be added in the CPT4 Codes table before they can be
used in the Service Item Library. Example: D0110 Initial Oral Exam. These codes can be loaded
by a NextGen EDI/Claims Analyst.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If CPT4 codes are added that include a modifier as part of the code,
additional characters and spaces should not be used. Codes should not exceed 12 characters.
Correct Format:
71010TC
7101026
Incorrect Format:
71010-TC or 71010 TC
71010-26 or 71010 26
203
NextGen Healthcare
Diagnosis Categories
Diagnosis Categories are groupings of ICD codes. ICD-10 and/or ICD-9 codes can be added to
or deleted from existing categories and new categories can be created as needed.
Once created, Diagnosis Categories are linked to providers on the Providers > Categories tab.
They can then be used when searching for diagnosis codes in NextGen® EHR and EPM.
In EHR, providers have access to their Diagnosis Categories in the Problems Module, allowing
them to quickly lookup and select diagnoses/problems for a patient.
In EPM, users have access to the Diagnosis Categories linked to the encounter rendering
provider on the Charge Posting screen, allowing them to quickly lookup and select diagnosis
codes for a charge.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
204
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Category:
Enter a name for the category being defined. This is a required entry.
Short Description:
Enter a 1-4 character short description for the category being defined. This is a required entry.
Show in EPM:
Select this checkbox if the category should be available to users on the Charge Posting screen in EPM.
Show in EHR:
Select this checkbox if the category should be available to providers in the Procedures Module in EHR.
Yellow Folder Icon:
Click this icon to open the ICD Codes window.
To add a diagnosis code to the category, search for the code in the Available section on the
left. Highlight the code to be added and click the blue arrow to move it to the Included
section on the right.
Show:
Select 09 to list only ICD-9 codes in the Available section on the left.
Select 10 to list only ICD-10 codes in the Available section on the left.
To remove a diagnosis code from the category, highlight the code to be removed in the
Included section on the right and click the blue arrow to move it to the Available section on
the left.
Practice Access
For clients with multiple practices, the Practice Access option allows the ability to control which
practice(s) can see and have access to specific Diagnosis Categories.
The Practice Access option can be accessed by right-clicking on a Diagnosis Category. Select
the practice(s) that should see and have access to the selected category.
205
NextGen Healthcare
DME Regions
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – DME Regions
DME Regions are used in NextGen® EPM for Durable Medical Equipment (DMERC) billing to
Medicare payers. There are four DME regions in the U.S. SIM codes that are flagged as DME in
the Service Item Library > Payers tab will be billed on a DMERC claim to the appropriate region.
The region used on the claim is based on the State in which the patient lives.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load this table.
System Tab
Information entered on the System Tab will be used for all practices in all enterprises on the
system.
206
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Name/Address:
Enter the name for the DME region as it should appear on claims.
Address:
Enter the address, city, state, zip, county and country for the DME region as it should appear on
claims.
Patient’s State:
Select the states that are part of the DME region.
Taxonomy Code:
Enter the Taxonomy Code needed on DME claims for the region.
Provider Number:
Enter the Provider Number needed on DME claims for the region.
DME NPI:
Enter the National Provider ID needed on DME claims for the region.
Primary / Secondary / Tertiary Media Type:
Select either Electronic or Paper for DME claims for the region.
Payer Information Section:
This section can be used to define specific payers that require different, address, provider
number, DME NPI, media type, etc. Information on DME claims.
207
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Tab
For clients with multiple practices using the same DME region, the Practice Tab allows for entry
of information specific to the region being defined that may be needed on DMERC claims for the
current practice only. Information entered here for the current practice will override the
information entered on the System tab for all other practices.
Provider Number:
Enter the Provider Number needed on DME claims for the current practice.
DME NPI:
Enter the National Provider ID needed on DME claims for the current practice.
NOTE: If Provider and DME NPI numbers are blank, the numbers defined on the System tab will
be used on claims. If blank on the System tab, the numbers defined for the location will be used.
If blank for the location, the numbers defined for the practice will be used.
Taxonomy Code:
Enter the Taxonomy Code needed on DME claims for the current practice.
Submitter Profile / Electronic Transmitter ID:
Enter the appropriate information for electronic DME claims for the current practice.
Libraries:
If a specific Reason Code Library, Place of Service Library, Type of Service Library, Claim Print
Library and/or Claim Edit Library was created for DME claims, select the libraries to be used for
the current practice.
Primary / Secondary / Tertiary Media Type:
Select either Electronic or Paper for DME claims for the current practice.
208
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Employers
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Employers
Employers are used in NextGen to document where a person/patient works. They can also be
built “on-the-fly” during person/patient information entry.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load this table.
Address:
The address information must be completed for employers that may be guarantors to which a
statement will be sent for patient encounters (eg: work comp). The address must also be
completed for employers to which a company invoice will be sent.
External Tab:
The External tab is used when interfaces will be implemented between NextGen and one or more
external systems. This tab allows a cross-reference to be defined between the NextGen
employer and the external system employer.
209
NextGen Healthcare
Form Templates
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Form and Label Templates
Form Templates are used in NextGen® EPM to print forms that are needed within a practice.
They are printed from either patient encounters or appointments.
Examples:
Chart Out-Guides
State Specific Claim Forms
Fee Tickets (only if using pre-printed forms)
Form Templates are created by using a combination of free-type verbiage and data fields that are
automatically populated when the forms are printed.
Data Fields can be added to a form by clicking on the Insert Data Field icon on the Form Design
toolbar and then selecting the desired data fields from the NextGen Data Repository.
210
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Formats
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Formats
Formats are used in NextGen to restrict users to specific policy number and/or group number
formats when entering person/patient insurance information. Payer specific formats can be
created and attached to the appropriate payer(s) in the Payers table > Defaults-2 tab.
For example, entry of a Medicare policy number might be restricted to one of five valid formats as
seen below.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
211
NextGen Healthcare
ICD9CM Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Diagnosis Codes
ICD-CM Codes (International Classification of Diseases – Clinical Modification) are used in
NextGen® EHR and EPM. The table is pre-installed and consists of all ICD-CM codes for
the current year. An ICD-CM code must exist in this table before it can be added to the
Diagnosis Codes Library.
New ICD-CM codes can be added and codes that are no longer valid can be expired or hidden.
This can be done manually or by use of the CPT4/ICD9 Update Utility available on the NextGen
website.
212
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Label Products
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Label Products
Label Products are used when creating labels in the Label Templates table for use in NextGen®
EPM. The table is pre-installed with many Avery, CO Star, Dymo and Seiko label products. The
existing products can be customized and new products can be added.
213
NextGen Healthcare
Label Templates
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Form and Label Templates
Label Templates are used in NextGen® EPM to print labels that are needed within a practice.
They are printed from either patient encounters or appointments.
Examples:
Mailing Labels
Chart Labels
Form Labels
Label Templates are created by using a combination of free-type verbiage and data fields that are
automatically populated when the labels are printed.
To select a label product, click on the Template Properties icon on the Label Design toolbar.
Data Fields can be added to a label by clicking on the Insert Data Field icon on the Label Design
toolbar and then selecting the desired data fields from the NextGen Data Repository.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
214
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Locality Tax Rate
The Locality Tax Rate table can be used by clients doing business in multiple states and/or localities
that have different tax rates. The table can store up to four Tax Rate Percentages for each
City/State/Zip/County combination.
The table would be setup to include the City/State/Zip/County combinations that correspond to
the Locations within the practice(s) using taxes.
NOTE: The tax rate percentages in the Locality Tax Rate table are used to calculate taxes
only if the “Apply Tax Rate from Local” check-box was selected in the Tax Rate Library.
215
NextGen Healthcare
Eff / Exp Dates:
Enter an Effective Date and Expiration Date for the tax rate percentages being defined. The
charge Service Date is compared to the Effective/Expiration Dates to determine the tax rates to
be applied to charges.
NOTE: Dates cannot overlap for a City/State/Zip/County. One row must expire before
another row goes into effect.
City / State / Zip / County:
Enter the City, State, Zip, and County for the tax rate percentages being defined. The charge
Location is compared to the City/State/Zip/County to determine the tax rates to be applied to
charges.
NOTE: Entering the Zip Code first will populate the City, State and County fields.
State Tax % / County Tax % / City Tax % / Local Tax %:
Enter the tax rate percentages for the city/state/zip/county combination (up to 3 decimal places).
216
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Patient Responsibility
The Patient Responsibility table is used by Community Health Centers to define the Federal
Poverty Guideline for the current year. These guidelines are based on family size and annual
income. Patients that fall within the published guidelines are identified in NextGen® EPM as
being 100% of poverty. Additional poverty categories can be defined to identify patients that fall
outside of the guidelines and are identified as being >100% of poverty.
This table is also used to define Patient Responsibility Schedules. These ensure that patients
with a specific type of payer are held responsible for a portion of their charges. For example, a
patient covered under the Ryan White Fund (payer) might be responsible for 10% of their charges
on the poverty category in which they fall.
Federal Poverty Guidelines can be obtained from the U.S. Department of Health & Human
Services web site: http://aspe.hhs.gov/poverty/
217
NextGen Healthcare
Revenue Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Revenue Codes
Revenue Codes are used in NextGen® EPM on UB claim forms. The codes print in Field
Locator 42 on the UB form. A 4-digit revenue code must be attached to each SIM code in
the Service Item Library that may be billed on a UB claim.
A list of Revenue Codes is available from NGS Medicare. Copy and paste the below link into an
internet browser: http://www.ngsmedicare.com/
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
218
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Sliding Fee Schedules
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Sliding Fee Schedules
Sliding Fee Schedules are linked to a patient in NextGen® EPM. They can also be linked
to a specific patient encounter. Once linked, a percentage of the charge amounts entered
on an encounter will be automatically adjusted off. The percentage of the automatic
adjustment is based on household family size and annual income.
Multiple sliding fee schedules can be created if needed. For example, if the percentage discounts
vary for medical, dental, vision and/or behavioral health services, separate schedules can be
created for each.
Sliding Fee Schedule adjustments are reported on the UDS Report – Table 9D.
Setup for Sliding Fee Schedules
Step 1: Transaction Codes
Create a unique Adjustment transaction to be attached to the sliding fee schedules that will adjust
off charges during charge posting. Create another unique Payment transaction that will be used
during payment entry. Having unique transaction codes will assist in separating sliding fee
adjustments/payments from other types of adjustments/payments on financial reports.
The adjustment/payment transactions can be generic and intended for use with all sliding fee
schedules. For example:
Sliding Fee Adjustment
Sliding Fee Payment
Or the adjustment/payment transactions can be specific and intended for use with each different
type of sliding fee schedule. For example:
Medical Sliding Fee Adjustment
Medical Sliding Fee Payment
Vision Sliding Fee Adjustment
Vision Sliding Fee Payment
219
NextGen Healthcare
Define the Transaction Codes as follows:
Transaction Description:
Type:
Source:
Sign Type:
Allow Sign Over Ride:
220
Enter Sliding Fee Adjustment (or Payment)
Select Adjustment (or Payment)
Select Patient
Select Negative (-)
Select this check-box
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 2: Sliding Fee Schedules
Sliding Fee Schedule Maintenance:
Define the Sliding Fee Schedule Maintenance as follows:
Schedule Name:
Enter a name for the schedule being created
Adjustment Code:
Select the adjustment transaction code created above
Effective Date:
Enter the date the schedule will go into effect
Expiration Date:
Enter the date the schedule will expire
Re-Verify Days:
Enter the number of days after which users must re-verify the patient’s
family size and income information
NOTE: Once the number of days defined has passed since the patient’s family
size/income information was last verified, an alert displays to users to re-verify the
information. The sliding fee schedule will become inactive for the patient until the
information is re-verified and updated.
221
NextGen Healthcare
Display family size and income re-verify alert:
Select this check-box to display the following alert to end users when the defined number of ReVerify Days has passed
Display alert identifying a sliding fee patient:
Select this check-box to display the following alert to end users to make them aware the patient is
on a sliding fee schedule
222
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Sliding Fee Schedule Detail Maintenance > Top Section:
Define the Sliding Fee Schedule Detail Maintenance top section as follows:
Name:
Enter a name for the schedule being defined
Effective Date:
Enter the effective date for the schedule being defined
Expiration Date:
Enter the expiration date for the schedule being defined
NOTE: The Expiration Date for the current year’s family size and income schedule is
typically extended until values are obtained for the next year. Once new values are
obtained for the next year, expire the current year’s schedule and create a new schedule.
Family Size:
Select the number of rows for the schedule
Number of Columns: Select the number of columns for the schedule
Schedule Fee Mode:
Line Item Based:
A separate adjustment will take place after each charge is entered on the encounter
Encounter Based:
A single adjustment will take place after all charges have been entered on the encounter
223
NextGen Healthcare
Sliding Fee Mode:
Minimum Value Mode:
Charges will be adjusted using the discount % for the patient’s family size/income. If an adjustment
would result in a balance that is less than the defined Minimum Value, the adjustment amount will be
reduced to ensure the balance is equal to the minimum value.
Flat Rate Mode:
Charges will be adjusted to the defined Flat Rate amount regardless of the discount % for the
patient’s family size/income.
Min / Flat Rate Value Mode:
By Family Size:
Minimum Value or Flat Rate is based on Family Size (right column)
By Percent/Flat Rate:
Minimum Value or Flat Rate is based on Percent of Discount (bottom row)
Associated CPT4 Codes:
All CPT4 Codes:
CPT4 Code Range:
The schedule applies to all CPT4 codes
The schedule applies only to specific CPT4 codes
Associated Dx Codes:
All Dx Codes:
Dx Code Range:
The schedule applies to all ICD9 codes
The schedule applies only to specific ICD9 codes
Sex:
Blank:
The schedule applies to all sexes
F, M, U, U: The schedule applies only to the selected sex
Age:
Blank:
Age Range:
The schedule applies to all ages
The schedule applies only to a specific age range
Service Location:
Blank:
Location(s):
224
The schedule applies to all locations
The schedule applies only to the selected location(s)
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Sliding Fee Schedule Detail Maintenance > Bottom Section:
Define the Sliding Fee Schedule Detail Maintenance bottom section as follows:
Column Headings:
Enter the discount (adjustment) percentages in
descending order
Rows:
Enter the income amounts in ascending order
Interpreting the above Example Sliding Fee Schedule Grid:
Patient 1:
Family Size =
Annual Income =
Percent Discount =
Minimum Amount/Line Item =
3
$20,000.00
75%
$10.00
Patient 2:
Family Size =
Annual Income =
Percent Discount =
Minimum Amount/Line Item =
5
$40,000.00
25%
$20.00
Patient 3:
Family Size =
Annual Income =
Percent Discount =
Minimum Amount/Line Item =
7
$25,000.00
100%
$5.00
225
NextGen Healthcare
Line Item Based vs. Encounter Based using Minimum Value Mode
Line Item Based / Minimum Value Mode
A patient is linked to a Line Item Based / Minimum Value Mode sliding fee schedule. The
patient’s family size and annual income qualify them to receive a 100% discount down to a
minimum value of $5.00.
A separate adjustment takes place after each charge is entered on the encounter. The charges
are adjusted by 100%. However, since a 100% adjustment would result in a balance of $0.00 for
each charge, which is less than the $5.00 minimum value, the adjustment amounts are reduced
to ensure the balance on each charge is equal to the minimum value. An encounter with three
charges will have a patient balance of $15.00.
226
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Encounter Based / Minimum Value Mode
A patient is linked to an Encounter Based / Minimum Value Mode sliding fee schedule. The
patient’s family size and annual income qualify them to receive a 100% discount down to a
minimum value of $5.00.
A single adjustment takes place after all charges have been entered on the encounter. The
charges are adjusted by 100%. However, since a 100% adjustment would result in a balance of
$0.00 for the encounter, which is less than the $5.00 minimum value, the adjustment amounts are
reduced to ensure the balance on the encounter is equal to the minimum value. An encounter
with three charges will have a patient balance of $5.00.
NOTE: The $5.00 (minimum value) encounter balance is prorated across all charges as follows:
Charge 1:
$100.00 =
$5.00 X 64.5% =
$100.00 – $6.45 =
64.5% of total charges
$3.22 line item balance
$96.78 adjustment
Charge 2:
$25.00 =
$5.00 X 16.1% =
$25.00 – $1.61 =
16.1% of total charges
$0.81 line item balance
$24.19 adjustment
Charge 3:
$30.00 =
$5.00 X 19.4% =
$30.00 – $1.94 =
19.4% of total charges
$0.97 balance
$29.03 adjustment
227
NextGen Healthcare
Line Item Based vs. Encounter Based using Flat Rate Mode
Line Item Based / Flat Rate Mode
A patient is linked to a Line Item Based / Flat Rate Mode sliding fee schedule. The patient’s
family size and annual income qualify them to receive a 50% discount with a flat rate of $15.00.
A separate adjustment takes place after each charge is entered on the encounter. The charges
would normally be adjusted by 50%. However, since a $15.00 flat rate is defined in the sliding
fee schedule, the 50% adjustment rate is ignored and adjustment amounts are applied to ensure
the balance on each charge is equal to the flat rate. An encounter with three charges will have a
patient balance of $45.00.
228
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Encounter Based / Flat Rate Mode
A patient is linked to an Encounter Based / Flat Rate Mode sliding fee schedule. The patient’s
family size and annual income qualify them to receive a 50% discount with a flat rate of $15.00.
A single adjustment will take place after all charges have been entered on the encounter. The
charges would normally be adjusted by 50%. However, since a $15.00 flat rate is defined in the
sliding fee schedule, the 50% adjustment rate is ignored and adjustment amounts are applied to
ensure the balance on the encounter is equal to the flat rate. An encounter with three charges
will have a patient balance of $15.00.
NOTE: The $10.00 (flat rate) encounter balance is prorated across all charges as follows:
Charge 1:
$100.00 =
$15.00 X 64.5% =
$100.00 – $6.45 =
64.5% of total charges
$9.68 line item balance
$90.32 adjustment
Charge 2:
$25.00 =
$15.00 X 16.1% =
$25.00 – $1.61 =
16.1% of total charges
$2.42 line item balance
$22.58 adjustment
Charge 3:
$30.00 =
$15.00 X 19.4% =
$30.00 – $1.94 =
19.4% of total charges
$2.90 balance
$27.10 adjustment
229
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Access
For clients with multiple practices, the Practice Access option allows the ability to control which
practice(s) can see and have access to specific Sliding Fee Schedules.
The Practice Access option can be accessed by right-clicking on a Sliding Fee Schedule. Select
the practice(s) that should see and have access to the selected schedule.
230
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Practice Preferences > Sliding Fee Tab
Several options are available that affect the way sliding fee schedules work in NextGen® EPM.
Disable sliding fee adjustments for encounters that have insurance attached:
Select this check-box to disable the ability to perform a “demand” sliding fee adjustment on the
remaining patient balance after insurance has paid.
NOTE: This options affects encounter based sliding fee schedules only.
Disable sliding fee adjustments for encounters that have a zero balance:
Select this check-box to disable sliding fee adjustments on encounters that already have a
balance of $0.00
Allow family size and income re-verification override:
Select this check-box to display the following prompt to users during charge posting on
encounters where the number of Re-Verify Days has been exceeded. By clicking “Yes”, sliding
fee adjustments will be applied even though the family size/income information has not been
updated.
231
NextGen Healthcare
Display Percent of Poverty:
Select this check-box to display Percent of Poverty in patient charts as defined in the Patient
Responsibility table in File Maintenance.
NOTE: See the Patient Responsibility section of this workbook for more information.
If amount due is less than minimum value or flat rate, do not slide:
Select this check-box to prevent positive sliding fee adjustments to increase the amount due up to
the defined minimum value/flat rate. This would occur in cases where the balance is less than
the minimum value/flat rate.
Sliding Fee Alerts:
Select or deselect one or more sections of the System Alert for sliding fee patients to customize
what is displayed to users.
Sliding Fee Adjustment Rounding:
Select whether or not sliding fee adjustments should be rounded. Options include the following:



Round down at 4, up at 5
Only round up
Do not round
Sliding Fee Adjustment Type:
Select one of the following:

Real-time Adjustments
Sliding Fee Adjustments will take place real-time during charge posting

Batch Adjustments
Sliding Fee Adjustments will be processed for multiple encounters in batch mode from
the File > Processes > Sliding Fee Batch Adjustment menu
NOTE: This setting affects both Encounter Based and Line Item Based schedules.
232
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Alternatives to Standard Sliding Fee Schedules
Other options that can be setup as alternatives to standard sliding fee schedules include:
1. Sliding Fee Schedules for Flat Encounter Rate Co-Pay
2. Payers with Contracts for Flat Encounter Rate Co-Pay
Sliding Fee Schedules for Flat Encounter Rate Co-Pay
If it is desired to adjust all charges down to a balance of $0.00 but leave a “flat encounter
rate co-pay” patient balance per encounter, regardless of family size and income, the
following sliding fee schedule setup can be used. Multiple schedules would be created,
one for each flat encounter rate co-pay amount. For example: $10.00 Flat Rate, $15.00
Flat Rate, $25.00 Flat Rate, etc.
Sliding Fee Schedule Maintenance:
Define the Sliding Fee Schedule Maintenance as follows:
Schedule Name:
Include the flat rate co-pay amount in the schedule name
Adjustment Code:
Select the adjustment transaction code to be used
Effective Date:
Enter the date the schedule will go into effect
Expiration Date:
Enter the date the schedule will expire
Re-Verify Days:
Select the number of days after which users must reverify the patient’s family size and income information
233
NextGen Healthcare
Sliding Fee Schedule Detail Maintenance:
NOTE: By using very large income amounts as seen in the example setup below, all patients will
qualify for a 100% discount on each encounter down to the minimum value defined regardless of
family size and income.
Define the Sliding Fee Schedule Detail Maintenance as follows:
234
Name:
Enter the flat rate co-pay amount as the name
Effective Date:
Enter the date the schedule will go into effect
Expiration Date:
Enter the date the schedule will expire
Family Size:
Select the number of rows needed in the grid
Number of Columns:
Select 2 columns
Schedule Fee Mode:
Select Encounter Based
Sliding Fee Mode:
Select Flat Rate Mode
Associated CPT4 Codes:
Select All CPT4 Codes
Min/Flat Rate Value Mode:
Select either By Family Size or By Percent/Flat Rate
Column Headings:
Enter 100% in column 1 and 0% in the column 2
Rows:
Enter $0.00 in column 1 and a large amount in column 2
Flat Rate:
Enter the encounter flat rate co-pay amount
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
How it Works:
1. Indicate the appropriate Family Size and Income for the patient
2. Attach the appropriate Sliding Fee Schedule to the patient (eg: $25 Encounter Flat Rate)
3. When charges are posted, a 100% discount adjustment will take place on the
encounter down to the flat rate value defined (eg: $25). The flat rate balance will
be patient responsibility and will be prorated across all charges on the encounter.
235
NextGen Healthcare
Payers with Contracts for Flat Encounter Rate Co-Pay
If it is desired to adjust some charges down to a “flat encounter rate co-pay” patient
balance (eg: office visits) and adjust other charges down to a balance of $0.00 (eg: labs),
the following contract setup can be used. Multiple contracts would be created, one for
each flat encounter rate co-pay amount. For example: $10.00 Flat Rate, $15.00 Flat
Rate, $25.00 Flat Rate, etc.
File Maintenance > Libraries > Contracts
Contract Library Maintenance > General Tab:
Define the Contract Library Maintenance > General tab as follows:
236
Contract Name:
Enter the flat rate co-pay amount as the contract name
Effective Date:
Enter the date the contract will go into effect
Expiration Date:
Enter the date the contract will expire
Apply Co-Pay to All Line Items:
Select this check-box
Automatically Adjust Charges:
Select this check-box
Default Auto-Adj Transaction:
Select the adjustment transaction code to be used
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contract Library Maintenance > Fee Schedule Tab:
For those CPT4 codes that should be adjusted down to the flat encounter rate co-pay
amount (eg: office visits), do the following:
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter the appropriate date range
Type:
Select FFS
Multiple Proc Discounting:
Select No
Non-Facility/Facility Allowed:
Enter $0.00
Participating/Non-Participating
Reimbursed:
Enter 0% / $0.00
Co-Pay:
Enter the encounter flat rate co-pay amount
(eg: $15.00)
237
NextGen Healthcare
For those CPT4 codes that should be adjusted down to a balance of $0.00 (eg: labs), do the
following:
238
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter the appropriate date range
Type:
Select FFS
Multiple Proc Discounting:
Select No
Non-Facility/Facility Allowed:
Enter $0.00
Participating/Non-Participating
Reimbursed:
Enter 0% / $0.00
Co-Pay:
Leave blank
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Payers
Create multiple payers, one for each flat encounter rate co-pay amount. For example:
$10.00 Flat Rate, $15.00 Flat Rate, $25.00 Flat Rate, etc. Attach the appropriate
contract to each payer on the Practice Tab > Libraries Sub-Tab and select all
participating providers.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Payers
239
NextGen Healthcare
How it Works:
1. Create an encounter and attach the appropriate flat rate payer (eg: Sliding Fee A $15)
2. When charges are posted, any CPT4 codes that were defined in the contract with a copay amount (eg: $15) will be adjusted down to that amount. The co-pay amount will be
patient responsibility. Any CPT4 codes that were defined in the contract without a co-pay
amount will be adjusted down to a balance of $0.00.
240
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Specialties
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Specialties
Specialties can be linked to rendering providers in the Providers table > Practice tab. They
can also be linked to referring providers in the Providers table > System tab for use in the
NextGen® EHR referral template.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Route Refill Request to PCP:
Used in NextGen® EHR when tasking electronic prescription refill requests from Sure Scripts
241
NextGen Healthcare
Statement Messages
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Statements – Setting Up Statements
Statements – Setting Up Payer Specific Dunning Messages
Statement Messages are used for payer/financial class dunning messages on statements in
NextGen® EPM. They are based on the age of outstanding insurance balances. Once created,
the messages are linked to a Statement Library. The library is then linked to Financial Classes in
the Statement Parameter Mappings table.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Statements will be covered during Advanced Training.
242
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Task Types
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Task Types
Task Types are used in NextGen® EPM. They defined the various types of tasks that can be
assigned to users within the Worklog Manager module.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Worklog Manager will be covered during Advanced
Training or during a separate WebEx training session.
243
NextGen Healthcare
Taxonomy Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Taxonomy Codes
Taxonomy Codes are used in NextGen® EPM as a data element on 837P (professional) 1500
and 837I (institutional) UB electronic claims.
A Taxonomy Code must be linked to all rendering providers in the Providers table > System tab.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed with the current HIPAA standard taxonomy codes.
244
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
User Notes Descriptions
User Notes Descriptions are used in NextGen® EHR, EPM and ICS. In EHR they are used
to name images saved in the Images Module. In EPM they are used as “quick notes” for
commonly entered patient notations. In ICS they are used as quick notes when annotating
scanned images.
The notes are defined per user. They can then be copied from one user to another.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed for the Admin NextGen user. Items should be reviewed
and modified as needed.
245
NextGen Healthcare
Zip Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up System Master Files - EPM
System Master Files – Zip Codes
Zip Codes are used in any NextGen application where an address may be entered. Once a
zip code is entered, the associated city, state, county and country will default.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed and will be updated with routine version upgrades.
246
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
File Maintenance > Master Files > Practice
Appointment Reminders
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Master Files
Practice Master File – Appointment Reminders
Appointment Reminder Letters are used in NextGen® EPM. The reminder letters must first be
created in the Letters table. Once created, they can be assigned here to locations, resources and
events.
Appointment Reminder Letters can be assigned at the following levels;



Location
Location/Resource
Location/Resource/Event
NOTE: If this table is not defined, a default Appointment Reminder Letter can be set for the
Practice in Practice Preferences > Appt Scheduling tab.
Location:
Location/Resource:
Location/Resource/Event:
247
NextGen Healthcare
Default User Preferences – General
General User Preferences can be defined in File Maintenance and then assigned to groups of
users or individual users in System Administrator. General User Preferences allow the user to
set basic options such as logon settings, advisor options, and printing preferences. Some
settings are strictly display options while others affect system behavior.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on General User Preferences will be covered during Core
Group Training.
248
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Default User Preferences – Locations
Location User Preferences can be defined in File Maintenance and then assigned to groups of
users or individual users in System Administrator. Location User Preferences define preferred
locations for users. In addition location lists and reporting in NextGen® EPM can be limited to
preferred locations only.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Location User Preferences will be covered during Core
Group Training.
249
NextGen Healthcare
Default User Preferences – Scheduling
Scheduling User Preferences can be defined in File Maintenance and then assigned to groups of
users or individual users in System Administrator. Scheduling User Preferences must be
completed for all users accessing the Appointment Book in NextGen® EPM.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Scheduling User Preferences will be covered during
Core Group Training.
250
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Dunning Messages
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Master Files
Practice Master File – Dunning Messages
Dunning Messages print on statements generated in NextGen® EPM. The messages are
related to the age of the account/guarantor’s outstanding self-pay balance. Only one of the
five messages will appear on a statement and it will be based on the oldest balance.
NOTE: The Dunning Messages must be linked in Practice Preferences > Statements tab.
251
NextGen Healthcare
Letters
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Master Files
Practice Master File – Letters
Letters are used in NextGen® EPM for account/guarantor and patient correspondence.
There are five types of letters available;





Appointment Reminder Letters
Budget Letters (7)
Demand Account Letters
Demand Encounter Letters
Recall Letters
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
NOTE: Setup of Budget Letters, Demand Account Letters and Demand Encounter Letters will be
covered during Advanced Training.
Name:
Enter a name for the letter being defined and then click the Edit button.
252
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Letters are created by using a combination of free-type verbiage and data fields that are
automatically populated when the letters are printed.
Data Fields can be added to a letter by right-clicking the mouse in the body of the letter and then
selecting the desired field from the displayed list. Data fields added to a letter will display in
brackets (<< >>).
253
NextGen Healthcare
Marketing Plans
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Master Files
Practice Master File – Market Plan
Marketing Plans are used in NextGen® EPM to document how patients have learned of or heard
about the practice. They are reportable and can assist in monitoring how business is generated
and/or whether advertising efforts are worthwhile. A marketing plan can be recorded at the
following levels:



Appointment
Encounter
Chart
NOTE: This table is used in conjunction with the Master Lists > Marketing Plan Sub-Groups
table.
254
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Patient Statuses
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Master Files
Practice Master File – Patient Statuses
Patient Statuses are used in NextGen® EPM to alert users when they access a particular type of
patient. They can also be defined to create appointment conflicts or to prevent additional
appointments from being made.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
Patient Status:
Enter a name for the status being defined.
Include Status in Alerts:
Select this check-box if the Status should display as an alert to users in NextGen® EPM.
Appointment Scheduling:
Create a Conflict
Select this check-box if the status should create an appointment conflict. Appointment
conflicts can be overridden by users with the appropriate security.
Prevent Scheduling
Select this check-box if the status should prevent additional appointments from being
made for all users.
255
NextGen Healthcare
Recall Plans
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Master Files
Practice Master File – Recall Plans
Recall Plans are used in NextGen® EPM. They are a mechanism to send recall letters to
patients to remind them that they are to return to the practice for a particular type of appointment.
Recall Plan:
Enter a name for the recall plan being defined.
Patient expected to return in days:
Enter the number of days after which the patient should return for the recall plan being defined.
Default Event:
Select the appointment event for which the patient should be scheduled when they return.
Default Resource:
Select the appointment resource for which the patient should be scheduled when they return.
Default Location:
Select the appointment location for which the patient should be scheduled when they return.
256
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Allow override:
Select this check-box for the recall plan being defined if users should be allowed to override the
defined event, resource and/or location for the patient to which the recall is being entered.
Which appointment status should discontinue participation in this plan?
Kept:
Select this button if the patient must schedule and keep the appointment for the defined
event/resource/location. Once the appointment is kept, the recall plan will be
automatically stopped by the system and the patient’s recall is considered complete.
Scheduled:
Select this button if the patient must schedule the appointment for the defined
event/resource/location. Once the appointment is scheduled, the recall plan will be
automatically stopped by the system and the patient’s recall is considered complete.
None:
Select this button if the recall plan should never be automatically stopped by the system.
Enable recall notifications to be sent via Patient Portal:
Select this check-box for the recall plan being defined if copies of letters should be sent to the
Patient Portal for those patients enrolled in NextMD.
Recall Letters
NOTE: Recall Letters must first be created in the Letters table. If mailing labels are to be
used, the label must be created in the Label Templates table.
Send 1st:
Select the first recall letter to be sent and the number of days prior to the expected return
days defined above. This is when the first letter qualifies to be print. Select the Mailing
Labels check-box if it is desired to print an address label for the mailing envelope.
Send 2nd:
Select the second recall letter to be sent and the number of days prior to the expected
return days defined above. This is when the second letter qualifies to be print.
Send 3rd:
Select the third recall letter to be sent and the number of days prior to the expected return
days defined above. This is when the third letter qualifies to be print.
257
NextGen Healthcare
Report Types
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Master Files
Practice Master File – Report Types
Report Types are used in NextGen® EHR and EPM to categorize and group memorized reports.
A memorized report is a version of a “canned” report that has had the formatting customized and
saved.
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
258
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Statement Parameter Mappings
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Statements – Setting Up Statements
Statements – Setting Up Payer Specific Dunning Messages
Statement Parameter Mappings are used for payer/financial class dunning messages on
statements in NextGen® EPM. Statement Messages are first created in the Statement Messages
table. They are based on the age of outstanding insurance balances. Once created, the
messages are linked to a Statement Library. The library is then linked to Financial Classes in the
Statement Parameter Mappings table.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Statements will be covered during Advanced Training.
259
NextGen Healthcare
Task Approval Profiles
Task Approval Profiles define Users by Location that will be responsible to approve transactions
(payments, adjustments, refunds) in NextGen® EPM that exceed a specified dollar amount as
defined within a Task Type. They also define the order in which the approvers fall within the
approval queue. Users within a profile can be notified via Outlook email when a task that needs
their approval reaches their queue.
Example: High dollar adjustment transactions at the East and West locations may need
first approval by a Manager, second approval by a District Manager, and third/final
approval by an Administrator.
Once created, Task Approval Profiles are linked to transaction source tasks in the Task Types
table.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Worklog Manager will be covered during Advanced
Training or during a separate WebEx training session.
260
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Task Workgroups
Task Workgroups are groupings of users to which tasks may be assigned in the Worklog module
in NextGen® EPM, and/or the WorkFlow module in EHR. They are also used in Message
Routing Rules when setting up users to which appointment requests and email communications
may be assigned for NextGen® Patient Portal.
NOTE: Setup of this table and training on Worklog Manager will be covered during Advanced
Training or during a separate WebEx training session.
261
NextGen Healthcare
Practices > Import Tab
For clients with multiple practices using the same Practice Level Tables, the Import Tab allows
selected tables to be imported from one practice into another practice.
Open the practice to which practice-level tables are be imported.
Choose practice to import from:
Select the practice from which the tables will be imported.
Choose data to import:
Select the tables to be imported from the above practice and click the Import button.
262
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
File Maintenance > Libraries
Library Concepts
Copy:
Once a library is created, it can be copied under a new name. This is useful when two libraries are
needed that are almost but not quite the same. The second copied version of the library can then
be modified as needed.
To copy an existing library, highlight the library, right-click and select Copy from the menu. Enter a
name for the new library.
263
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Access:
Once a library is created, it initially belongs only to the current practice in which it was created. For
clients with multiple practices that would like to use the same library in more than one practice, the
Practice Access option allows other practices to have access to the same library. Therefore, it can
be shared across practices.
To share an existing library with other practices, highlight the library, right-click and select Practice
Access from the menu. Select the additional practice(s) that will use the same library.
264
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Behavioral Health Billing
The Behavioral Health Billing Library is used to setup specific parameters needed for general
time-based Behavioral Health Billing.
NOTE: For more information and examples of Behavioral Health Billing, refer to the following
document: “EPM 5.8 Upgrade: Behavioral Health Billing _July2013”
This library defines parameters for “variance” charges which can be calculated and added to
encounters during the billing process for specific payers.
The library also defines other claim parameters that may be needed when billing Behavioral
Health services to specific payers.
A single library can be created and used for all payers, if applicable. Or payer-specific libraries
can be created and linked only to those payers.
Charge Options Tab
The Charge Options tab is used to configure a Variance SIM code to be used with Behavioral
Health roll-up charges.
A variance occurs when the number of units based on total time for all roll-up charges added
together is greater than or less than the number of units based on time for each individual charge.
Refer to the examples on the next page.
When a variance occurs, a charge is added during the billing process to either increase or
decrease the number of units and the balance on the encounter. This ensures that the balance in
EPM is the same as the amount billed on the claim for the roll-up charges.
265
NextGen Healthcare
Variance SIM
Insert SIM with Variance Amount on Roll-up Charges:
Select the SIM code that will be added to encounters as an additional charge during the
billing process when there is a “variance” in units for timed behavioral health charges that
roll-up. This is a required entry.
The SIM code must first be created in the SIM Library as follows:
Service Item #:
User Defined
CPT4 Code:
User Defined
Non-Facility/Facility Price:
$0.00
Behavioral Health:
Unchecked
Variance Calculations
Variance Calculation when Secondary:
Select one of the following for calculating the variance charge amount when billing the
secondary payer on the encounter.
NOTE: This setting applies when the primary payer on the encounter is not using a
Behavioral Health Billing Library and therefore a variance charge was not already added
to the encounter when the primary payer was billed.
Sum of roll-up less prior payer transactions: (Default)
Select this option to calculate a variance charge amount for the secondary payer
that is based on the sum of the roll-up charges minus any payment/adjustment
transaction amounts already posted from the primary payer.
Sum of roll-up:
Select this option to calculate a variance charge amount for the secondary payer
that is based on the sum of the roll-up charges.
Variance Calculation when Tertiary:
Select one of the following for calculating the variance charge amount when billing the
tertiary payer on the encounter.
NOTE: This setting applies when the primary and secondary payers on the encounter
are not using a Behavioral Health Billing Library and therefore a variance charge was not
already added to the encounter when the primary and secondary payers were billed.
Sum of roll-up less prior payer transactions: (Default)
Select this option to calculate a variance charge amount for the tertiary payer that
is based on the sum of the roll-up charges minus any payment/adjustment
transaction amounts already posted from the primary and secondary payers.
Sum of roll-up:
Select this option to calculate a variance charge amount for the tertiary payer that
is based on the sum of the roll-up charges.
266
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Variance Adjustment
Adjustment Transaction Code for Variance:
Select the third-party adjustment transaction code to be used with negative variance
charges. This is a required entry.
NOTE: The adjustment transaction code must have the “Allow sign over ride” check-box
selected. The code will be used as a “Negative” to reduce the balance on the original
charges and used as a “Positive” to reverse the amount of the negative variance charge.
Claim Options Tab
The Claim Options tab is used to configure specific parameters that affect claims for Behavioral
Health charges.
267
NextGen Healthcare
General Claim Options
Force Claim Break when Place of Service is:
Select one or more Place of Service codes that will cause charges with the selected POS
to break to a separate claim, if applicable.
Always send unit count as 1 on claim charge lines:
Select this check-box if the number of charge units should always be sent as 1 on claims,
regardless of the actual charge units. For example, the number of units based on time
for a charge is 3. If this option is selected, the number of units on the claim for that
charge will be 1.
Always send one line item per claim:
Select this check-box if claims should only include 1 line item. For example, an
encounter has three charges. Two of the charges roll-up and the third charge is not part
of the roll-up. If this option is selected, two claims will be created for the encounter, each
with 1 line item.
Secondary Claims
Roll-up lines view:
Select one of the following for the roll-up charge amount on secondary claims.
Sum of roll-up less prior payer transactions: (Default)
Select this option to send the charge amount on claims for the secondary payer
as the sum of the roll-up charges minus any payment/adjustment transaction
amounts already posted from the primary payer.
Sum of roll-up:
Select this option to send the charge amount on claims for the secondary payer
as the sum of the roll-up charges.
Always bill as primary when prior payer is:
From the yellow folder icon, select one or more payers, if applicable. If one of the
selected payers is primary on the encounter, the claim for the secondary payer will
appear as if it’s a primary claim.
Tertiary Claims
Roll-up lines view:
Select one of the following for the roll-up charge amount on tertiary claims.
Sum of roll-up less prior payer transactions: (Default)
Select this option to send the charge amount on claims for the tertiary payer as
the sum of the roll-up charges minus any payment/adjustment transaction
amounts already posted from the primary and secondary payers.
Sum of roll-up:
Select this option to send the charge amount on claims for the tertiary payer as
the sum of the roll-up charges.
Always bill as primary when prior payer is:
From the yellow folder icon, select one or more payers, if applicable. If one of the
selected payers is secondary on the encounter, the claim for the tertiary payer will appear
as if it’s a primary claim.
268
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Budget Statement
The Budget Statement Library is used in conjunction with Budget Plans in NextGen® EPM. The
library consists of messages that are created in the Budget Statement Messages table. The
library is then attached in Practice Preferences > Budget Accounts tab.
NOTE: Setup of this library and training on Budget Plans will be covered during Advanced Training.
269
NextGen Healthcare
Claim Edits
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Claim Edits
The Claim Edit Library enables the selection of claim edits that should run when billing
encounters and generating claims in NEXTEGEN® EPM. A default Claim Edit Library is attached
in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab to be used for all payers. Additional payer-specific
libraries can be created and attached to those Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab >
Libraries sub-tab.
It is suggested that CHC clinics create a separate Claim Edit Library for Medicare,
Medicaid and Dental payers.
NOTE: A default library comes pre-installed. Activated edits should be reviewed and modified as
needed.
Default Severity:
Select a severity of either Critical or Required. This ensures that when a
claim edit is activated, the severity for that edit defaults to the selection
made here.
Active:
Click in this column to activate a specific edit with a green check.
Claim Edit:
If the Claim Edit description turns blue when the edit is activated, then
additional information is required. Right-click on the description and
select Open from the menu to define the specific parameters needed.
Help Text:
The default help text display to users when the edit fails in EPM and can
be modified if desired.
Severity:
Select a severity of either Critical or Required for all activated edits. This
ensures that when the edit fails, a claim is not created until the problem
is corrected on the encounter.
Default to Payers:
This button allows the Claim Edit library being defined to be attached to
all payers within a specified Financial Class.
270
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Claim Modifiers
The Claim Modifiers Library is used by practices that do anesthesia billing, recurring DME rental
billing and/or behavioral health billing in NextGen® EPM. A default Claim Modifiers Library is
attached in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab to be used for all payers. Additional payerspecific libraries can be created and attached to those Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab
> Libraries sub-tab.
Anesthesia Modifier
Each anesthesia modifier has a Unit Value assigned. During charge posting, if one or more
anesthesia modifiers is entered on a charge, the unit value will be added to the base units for the
SIM code and the time units used in calculating the total charge amount.
Example:
Anesthesia SIM Code 00120:
Payer Time Units:
Time:
Anesthesia Modifier:
Total Anesthesia Units:
Price = $50
15 minutes
9:00-10:00AM
P4
Base Units =
5
Time Units =
4
Modifier Units = 2
Total Units = 11
$50 X 11 = $550
Modifier:
Enter the anesthesia modifier.
Unit Value:
Enter the unit value to be used during charge posting, if applicable.
SIM Type:
Select Anesthesia.
Modifier Change for Claims:
Leave blank.
271
NextGen Healthcare
Rental Modifier
During the billing of a rental encounter, a modifier can be added to the claim for rental charges
dependent on where the encounter falls within the DME rental series.
Example:
Rental SIM Code:
Rental Modifier:
K0001
KH
Added to claim on the first encounter in the rental series
KJ
Added to claim on the second or higher encounter in the series
Modifier:
Enter the rental modifier.
Unit Value:
Enter the unit value to be used during charge posting, if applicable.
SIM Type:
Select Rental.
Modifier Change for Claims:
Select one of the following options, if applicable, which determines how the rental modifier will be
added to the claim:





272
Add if <Department> on SIM
Add if <Encounter in a Series>
Add if <ICD9> on Charge
Add if <Specialty> is Rendering
Remove
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Behavioral Health Modifier
During the billing of a behavioral health encounter, a modifier can be added to the claim for
behavioral health charges dependent on where the encounter falls within the DME rental series.
Example:
BH SIM Code:
BH Modifier:
90791
AH
Added to claim based on the rendering provider’s specialty
Modifier:
Enter the behavioral health modifier.
Unit Value:
N/A
SIM Type:
Select Behavioral Health.
Modifier Change for Claims:
Select one of the following options, if applicable, which determines how the rental modifier will be
added to the claim:





Add if <Department> on SIM
Add if <Encounter in a Series>
Add if <ICD9> on Charge
Add if <Specialty> is Rendering
Remove
273
NextGen Healthcare
Claim Printing
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Claim Printing
The Claim Printing Library enables the configuration of data as it should print on paper 1500, UB
and ADA claims in NextGen® EPM. A default Claim Printing Library is attached in Practice
Preferences > Libraries tab to be used for all payers during the billing/claims process. Additional
payer-specific libraries can be created and attached to those Payers in the Payers table >
Practice Tab > Libraries sub-tab.
NOTE: A default library comes pre-installed. Parameters should be reviewed and modified as
needed.
Common Rules Tab
The Common Rules tab consists of settings for paper claims that apply to primary, secondary and
tertiary claims.
Claim Print Library:
Enter a name for the library being defined.
1500 Claims:
CMS 1500 (2012)
CMS 1500 (2005)
2012 paper claim form parameters
2005 paper claim form parameters
Default
UB Claims:
UB04 (2004)
UB92 (1992)
2004 paper claim form parameters
1992 paper claim form parameters
Default
ADA Claims:
ADA (2012)
ADA02/06 (2006)
2012 paper claim form parameters
2006 paper claim form parameters
Default
274
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Setting:
For each option listed in the left column, which corresponds to a specific
box on the claim form, select the desired setting in the right column.
Default to Payers:
This button allows the Claim Printing library being defined to be attached
to all payers within a specified Financial Class.
Exceptions When Payer is Primary/Secondary/Tertiary Tabs
The Exceptions when Primary/Secondary/Tertiary tabs consist of settings for paper claims that
apply to each type of claim respectively.
Setting:
For each option listed in the left column, which corresponds to a specific box on
the claim form, select the desired setting in the right column.
275
NextGen Healthcare
Claim Status Profiles
Claim status requests can be sent via the NextGen® RTS (Real-Time Transaction Server)
module. The Claim Status Profile Library is used to configure the 276 claim status request
transactions that are be sent from NextGen® EPM via RTS to a clearinghouse or payer.
The clearinghouse or payer will return 277 / 277u claim status response transactions via RTS.
These transactions can be processed and imported into NextGen® EPM. Once imported, the
claim status information is linked to the claim and can be seen in the patient’s chart.
The Claim Status Library is attached to Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab > Libraries subtab.
NOTE: Setup of this library and training for the RTS module will be covered in a separate training
session by a NextGen® RTS Representative.
276
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Diagnosis Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Diagnosis Codes
The Diagnosis Codes Library is used in NextGen® EHR in the Problems/Diagnosis Module. It is
also used in NextGen® EPM during Charge Posting. A Diagnosis Codes Library must be
attached in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab.
The “Default Diagnosis Codes” library is pre-installed and consists of all ICD codes for the
current year. Existing codes can be hidden or modified as needed.
All practices can share the same library by using the Practice Access option from the right-click
menu. If needed, a separate library can be created for each practice by using the Copy option
from the right-click menu.
IMPORTANT NOTE: It is recommended that the “Default Diagnosis Codes” library be used by all
practices. This ensures that all codes needed for clinical documentation are available in
NextGen® EHR and all codes needed for billing are available in NextGen® EPM.
277
NextGen Healthcare
Diagnosis Code Library:
Enter a name for the library.
Hide Library:
Select this check-box to discontinue use of the library and to prevent it from being linked to a practice in
Practice Preferences > Libraries.
Search Method
The parameters selected in the Search Method section of the window determine which ICD codes
are displayed in the lower-left search results section of the window.
Code Type:
Select one of the following:
All ICD Codes (Default):
ICD-10:
ICD-9:
Display both ICD-9 and ICD-10 codes
Display ICD-10 codes only
Display ICD-9 codes only
Code:
Select this button to search by code.
Type the first letter(s) of the Diagnosis to locate:
Enter the first few characters of an ICD code. All codes that start with the
characters entered will display.
Description:
Select this button to search by description.
Type the first letter(s) of the Diagnosis to locate:
Enter the first few characters of an ICD description. All codes with descriptions that
start with the characters entered will display.
Search for keyphrase anywhere in the item:
Select this check-box to search for all codes that have the characters entered
above anywhere in the description.
Categories:
Select a Diagnosis Category to display only those ICD codes that are included in the
selected category.
NOTE: The categories listed and available for selection are from the Diagnosis
Categories system master file in File Maintenance.
Exclude Expired Codes:
Select this checkbox to exclude expired ICD codes from the search.
Exclude Hidden Codes:
Select this checkbox to exclude hidden ICD codes from the search.
278
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Highlight an ICD code in the lower-left search results section of the window to display the
following:
ICD:
Displays the code used for searching in EPM/EHR and on claims in EPM. The ICD code
cannot be changed.
Diagnosis:
Defaults to the same code displayed in the ICD field. The Diagnosis code can be
changed to an alternate code used for searching.
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Displays the effective and expiration dates for the code from the ICDCM Codes system
master file.
Hide Diagnosis Code:
Select this check-box to discontinue use of the code and to prevent it from being selected by
users in EPM/EHR.
Description:
Defaults from the ICDCM Codes system master file. The Description is used for
searching in EPM/EHR and can be changed if needed.
User Description:
Enter an alternate description used for searching.
Diagnosis Subgroup 1 and 2:
Select one or two Diagnosis Subgroups. These are similar to other subgroupings in EPM
(eg: Location, Payer, Provider) and can be used to group ICD codes for reporting
purposes.
NOTE: The subgroups listed and available for selection are from the Diagnosis
Subgroupings master list table in File Maintenance.
279
NextGen Healthcare
General Tab
The General tab allows ICD codes to be mapped to one or more alternate codes for billing
purposes.
Not all payers are necessarily required to implement ICD-10 codes on October 1, 2014. For
example, payers that are not covered by the Health Insurance Portability Accountability Act
(HIPAA) may still require ICD-9 codes on claims. This tab allows an ICD-10 code to be mapped
back to one or more ICD-9 codes on claims for these types of payers.
Alternate Diagnosis Mapping for Billing
Highlight an ICD-10 code in the lower-left search results section of the window and enter the
following:
Eff Date:
Enter the effective date for the ICD-10 to ICD-9 mapping being defined.
Exp Date:
Enter the expiration date for the ICD-10 to ICD-9 mapping being defined.
Diag 1, Diag 2 and Diag 3:
Enter up to three ICD-9 codes as alternate codes for the selected ICD-10 code on claims.
280
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Payer Tab
Some payers may create their own ICD code mappings that are different from the mappings on
the General tab. The Payer tab allows ICD codes to be mapped to one or more alternate codes
for billing purposes for a specific payer.
Example: ICD-10 code S72.033A is mapped to ICD-9 code 820.02 for most payers on
the General tab, but mapped to ICD-9 code 820.00 for a specific payer on the Payer tab.
Alternate Diagnosis Mapping for Billing
Highlight an ICD-10 code in the lower-left search results section of the window and enter the
following:
Payer:
Select a payer for the ICD-10 to ICD-0 mapping being defined.
Eff Date:
Enter the effective date for the ICD-10 to ICD-9 mapping being defined.
Exp Date:
Enter the expiration date for the ICD-10 to ICD-9 mapping being defined.
Diag 1, Diag 2 and Diag 3:
Enter up to three ICD-9 codes as alternate codes for the selected ICD-10 code on claims.
281
NextGen Healthcare
Other Tab
The Other tab includes all other fields that previously existed in the Diagnosis Codes library.
They have been moved to a separate tab for screen space purposes.
Auto Rec Days:
Leave blank. The Auto Recall Days field was once used in NextGen® EHR but it is no longer
utilized or supported.
Rec Letter Code:
Leave blank. The Recall Letter Code field was once used in NextGen® EHR but it is no longer
utilized or supported.
Alt Code 1 and Alt Code 2:
These fields could be utilized with a charge interface between NextGen® and an external system.
If applicable, enter one or two alternate codes that are used by the external system to crossreference the selected ICD code.
Pregnancy Indicator:
Select this check-box to include a “pregnancy indicator” on electronic claims in EPM when the
selected ICD code is used on a charge.
Notes:
Enter a free-text note about the selected ICD code. The note is for internal purposes only and
does not display to users in EPM/EHR.
282
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Add Codes from ICD Master File
The Add Codes from ICD Master File is a utility that can be used to import codes that do not
already exist into the Diagnosis Codes library from the ICDCM Codes master file.
The utility is accessed by right-clicking on the Diagnosis Codes Library and selecting Add Codes
from ICD Master File from the menu.
Import Parameters
ICD Type:
Select either ICD-9 or ICD-10 for the import.
ICD thru ICD:
Enter a range of ICD codes to be imported.
Import Codes Effective On:
Enter a date for the ICD codes to be imported.
NOTE: This date is used to determine which of the selected ICD codes will actually
be imported. Only those codes that have an effective/expiration date range that
includes the date specified here will be imported. For example, if there is a code in
the selected range that is not in effect on the date specified, the code will not be
imported.
Overwrite with master file description of code exists in library:
Select this check-box to overwrite the description on codes that already exist in the library
with the description from the ICDCM Codes master file.
283
NextGen Healthcare
GEMS Update
General Equivalence Mappings (GEMs) have been developed by CMS to cross reference ICD-10
codes back to ICD-9 codes for billing purposes.
The GEMS Update is a utility that can be used to import the General Equivalency Mappings
provided by CMS into the Diagnosis Codes library > General tab. It can also be used to import
mappings provided by a specific payer into the Diagnosis Codes library > Payer tab.
GEMs can be downloaded in a text (.txt) formatted file from the CMS website at:
http://www.cms.gov/Medicare/Coding/ICD10/
The utility is accessed by right-clicking on the Diagnosis Codes Library and selecting GEMS
Update from the menu.
284
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
General Equivalence Mapping Import File
Yellow Folder Icon:
Click this icon and browse to select the text (.txt) file to be used with the GEMs Update Utility.
Load Button:
Click this button to load the file selected above. The Data Preview section of the window
displays all ICD codes within the file with their corresponding mappings.
GEM Filter Options
Parameters entered in this section can be used to narrow down the ICD codes displayed in the
Data Preview section of the window.
ICD thru ICD:
Enter a range of ICD codes to be displayed.
Description Filter:
Enter a word in the description of the ICD codes to be displayed.
Mapping 1, 2 and 3:
Enter an ICD-9 code to display ICD-10 codes with the specified ICD-9 code in the
corresponding “Mapping” column.
For example, entering 995.91 (ICD-9) in the Mapping 2 field will display all ICD10 codes that have 995.91 in the Mapping 2 column.
Mapping Type:
Select one of the following to display ICD codes with the selected type in the Mapping
Type column.
Exact Match
Approximate Match
No Match
Combination Match
Approximate/Combination Match
Clear Button:
Click this button to clear all parameters entered in the GEM Filter Option section.
Search Button:
Click this button to display ICD codes that match all parameters entered in the GEM Filter
Options section.
285
NextGen Healthcare
Import Options
Parameters entered in this section affect the mappings that are to be imported.
Target Payer:
Select <None> Maps to General Tab to import mappings to the Diagnosis Code Library >
General tab.
Select a specific Payer to import mappings to the Diagnosis Codes Library > Payer tab.
Create New Mappings (Unmapped codes only):
Select this checkbox to import mappings for ICD codes that do not yet have mappings.
Update Using Existing Mappings:
Select this checkbox to import mappings for ICD codes that already have mappings.
Overwrite Existing Mappings:
For ICD codes that already have mappings, select this button to import new
mappings that will overwrite the existing mappings.
Create New (Old mappings will be expired):
For ICD codes that already have mappings, select this button to import mappings
to a new row with effective and expiration dates as entered below. The row with
the existing mappings will be expired one day prior to the effective date of the
new row.
New Mapping Properties:
Effective / Expiration Dates:
Enter effective and expiration dates for new mappings to be imported.
Data Preview:
Select all ICD codes in the list that are to have mappings imported into the Diagnosis Codes
Library.
Deselect any ICD codes in the list that are not to have mappings imported into the Diagnosis
Codes Library.
Import Button:
Click this button to import the selected mappings into the Diagnosis Codes Library.
Close Button:
Click this button to close the GEMs Update Utility window.
286
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Eligibility Profiles
Batch Eligibility requests can be sent via the NextGen® RTS (Real-Time Transaction Server)
module. The Eligibility Profile Library is used to configure the 270 eligibility request transaction
batch that will be sent from NextGen® EPM via RTS to a clearinghouse or payer.
The clearinghouse or payer will return 271 eligibility response transactions via RTS. These
transactions can be processed and imported into NextGen® EPM. Once imported, the eligibility
information can be seen in the patient’s chart.
The Eligibility Library is attached to Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab > Libraries sub-tab.
NOTE: Setup of this library and training for the RTS module will be covered in a separate training
session by a NextGen® RTS representative.
287
NextGen Healthcare
Encounter Rate Billing
The Encounter Rate Library is used for payers such as Medicare (FQHC / RHC) and Medicaid that have
very unique and specific billing and claim requirements, and that reimburse at a flat encounter rate.
Encounter Rate Billing provides the ability to automatically adjust charges so that the balance
reflects the payer’s expected encounter reimbursement rate/amount. In addition, an “encounter
rate” code required by the payer on claims can be automatically inserted onto each encounter.
For example, a 0521 Revenue Code line item may be required on Medicare UB claims, and a
T1015 CPT4 Code line item may be required on Medicaid 1500 claims. The setup and
configuration of the Encounter Rate Billing library also defines which of the original charge line
items on an encounter will be included on the claim.
IMPORTANT NOTE: FQHC clients must use Encounter Rate Billing for Medicare. It is the
only option available that will meet CMS’s complex requirements and guidelines for claims.
Considerations:



288
Claims are configurable within the setup of the Encounter Rate Library setup
The Encounter Rate Library is easy to maintain for various payers and SIM codes
Works well with ERA payments (Electronic Remittance Advice)
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Example: Encounter Rate Billing for Medicaid (Texas)
All encounters for patients with Medicaid are billed on a 1500 claim and then reimbursed by the payer
at the same encounter rate of $90.00 regardless of the actual services performed.
During the billing process, an Encounter Rate Billing library for Medicaid adjusts the first charge
to a balance equal to the payer’s expected reimbursement amount (eg: $90.00), adjusts all other
charges off to a balance of zero, and inserts an encounter rate SIM code (eg: T1015) onto the
encounter so it can be included on the claim.
289
NextGen Healthcare
Setup for Encounter Rate Billing
Setup for Encounter Rate Billing involves the following tables in File Maintenance:








Enterprise Preferences
CPT4 Codes
Departments
Revenue Codes
SIM Library
Transaction Codes
Encounter Rate Billing
Payers > Practice Tab > Libraries Sub-Tab
Step 1: Enterprise Preferences
Encounter rate billing must first be enabled for the enterprise. This will also allow an Encounter
Rate Library to be attached to the appropriate payer(s) later in the setup.
Enterprise Preferences > General Tab
Encounter Rate Billing:
290
Select this check-box
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 2: CPT4 Codes
Encounter rate billing involves the insertion of an Encounter Rate code onto each patient’s
encounter. The encounter rate code must first be created as a CPT4 code. In the example
below, code 0521 (Clinic Service) is the code needed on claims for the encounter rate payer.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > CPT4 Codes
Define the encounter rate CPT4 code as follows:
Code:
Description:
Type of Service:
Enter the code as it should appear on claims
Enter the description as it should appear on claims
Select Medical Care
291
NextGen Healthcare
Step 3: Revenue Codes
Verify the appropriate Revenue Codes exists that are needed on UB claims in Field Locator 42
for the encounter rate payer. A 4-digit revenue code must be attached to each SIM code in the
Service Item Library that may be billed on a UB claim.
A list of Revenue Codes is available from NGS Medicare. Copy and paste the below link into an
internet browser: http://www.ngsmedicare.com/
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Revenue Codes
Define the Revenue Codes as follows:
Code:
Description:
Occurrence Code:
Enter the 4-digit code as it should appear on UB claims
Enter the description as it should appear on UB claims
Leave blank
This setting is optional and is only needed if Occurrence Code is to be populated in
Field Locators 31 – 34 on UB claims. The selected Occurrence Code sets the default
on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab > Occurrence Codes sub-tab in NextGen®
EPM.
Value Code:
Leave blank
This setting is optional and is only needed if Value Code is to be populated in Field
Locators 39 – 41 on UB claims. The selected Occurrence Code sets the default on
the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab > Value Codes sub-tab in NextGen® EPM.
292
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 4: Departments
Create a unique Department that will be used in the SIM Library only for the Encounter Rate SIM
code(s). Having a unique department for these codes will assist in including/excluding and/or
sorting the encounter rate codes by department on financial reports in NextGen® EPM.
If encounter rate billing is done for more than one payer, create a separate Department for each
payer’s encounter rate SIM code. For example:
Medicare Enc Rate
Medicaid Enc Rate
File Maintenance > Master Lists > Departments
Define the encounter rate Department as follows:
Description:
Show in EPM:
Show in EHR:
Enter a description as it should appear on reports
Select this check-box
Do not select this check-box
NOTE: The following department names are the only valid spellings for the “Encounter
Rate Analysis” report (Crystal Report) provided by NextGen:
Enc Rate
Medicare Enc Rate
Medicaid Enc Rate
EAPC Enc Rate
EPSDT Enc Rate
Expanded Access to Primary Care (Medi-Cal only)
Early Periodic Screening Diagnosis and Treatment
293
NextGen Healthcare
Step 5: Service Item Library
Create a Service Item Code (SIM) that matches the Encounter Rate CPT4 code created above.
File Maintenance > Libraries > Service Items > General Tab
Define the encounter rate SIM code as follows:
Place of Service:
Select Office
NOTE: Place of service must be selected for all Encounter Rate SIM codes (eg:
0521 for Medicare, T1015 for Medicaid, 01 for Medi-Cal, etc.)
Component:
Department:
Revenue Code:
Form:
Non-Facility and Facility Price:
Select Professional
Select the unique department created above
Select the appropriate revenue code
Select 1500
Enter $0.00
NOTE: The price fields can be set to $0.00 so the amount/price defined within the
Encounter Rate Library will be used.
Self-Pay Qualifying Encounter:
Sliding Fee Qualifying Encounter:
Qualifying Encounter for all payers:
294
Select this check-box
Select this check-box
Select this check-box
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 6: Transaction Codes
If the Encounter Rate Library for the payer will be configured to auto-adjust charges, create a
unique Transaction Code that will be used specifically for the encounter rate adjustments. Having
a unique transaction code assists in differentiating encounter rate adjustments from other types of
adjustments on the UDS report. It also assists in either including or excluding encounter rate
adjustments on financial reports in NextGen® EPM.
If encounter rate billing is done for more than one payer, create a separate Transaction Code for
each payer. For example:
Medicare Enc Rate Adjustment
Medicaid Enc Rate Adjustment
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Transaction Codes
Define the encounter rate adjustment Transaction Code as follows:
Transaction Description:
Type:
Source:
Sign Type:
Allow Sign Over Ride:
Enter Encounter Rate Adjustment
Select Adjustment
Select Third Party
Select Negative (-)
Select this check-box
295
NextGen Healthcare
Step 7: Encounter Rate Billing Library
The Encounter Rate Library inserts an encounter rate SIM code onto each encounter during the
billing process. The dollar amount for the SIM code is equal to the payer’s expected
reimbursement amount. Depending on the payer, the library can also be configured to
automatically adjust charges when the encounter is billed. Multiple options are available for the
configuration of claims. Therefore, the appearance of the claim can be very different from the
actual charges entered.
File Maintenance > Libraries > Encounter Rate Billing
The Encounter Rate Billing Library Maintenance window is divided into two sections:


Encounter Rate SIM section
Business Rules section (includes 6 tabs)
Encounter Rate Billing Library Maintenance > Encounter Rate SIM Section
Set Configuration Hierarchy:
The SIM Configuration Hierarchy is set by clicking on the Yellow Folder icon in the
Encounter Rate SIM section. The defined hierarchy will be used in determining which
encounter rate SIM code to insert during the billing process. If needed, use the blue
up/down arrows to change the default hierarchy for Diagnosis, CPT4, Location, Provider,
Sex, and/or Age.
NOTE: In most cases, the default hierarchy will not need to be changed. Click OK to
save the default hierarchy.
Example: If Diagnosis has a higher position in the hierarchy than Location, then NextGen® EPM
will use the encounter rate SIM code defined for a specific diagnosis for all locations rather than
using the encounter rate SIM code defined for all diagnoses for a specific location.
296
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Encounter Rate SIM Maintenance
Right-click in the Encounter Rate SIM section and select New from the menu. The Encounter
Rate SIM Maintenance window displays.
Service Item #:
Select the encounter rate SIM code
Description:
Defaults from the SIM Library and cannot be changed
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Defaults from the SIM Library and can be changed if
needed
Amount:
Defaults from the SIM Library and can be changed if
needed. Enter the amount as the payer’s expected
reimbursement amount.
Copay Amount:
Enter the co-pay amount that should be deducted from
the encounter rate amount entered above and settled to
patient responsibility, if applicable
Condition Code:
Select a default Condition Code, if applicable
(UB claim Field Locators 18 – 28)
297
NextGen Healthcare
The following Service Item Configurations are optional. They define additional criteria, if any, that
is required in order for the selected Encounter Rate SIM code to insert onto encounters and
claims.
Required ICD9s:
Used if encounter rate SIM code/amount is based on primary
Diagnosis
Required CPT4s:
Used if encounter rate SIM code/amount is based on CPT4
Valid Primary Payers: Available only if COB below is set to either 2 or 3. Used if
encounter rate SIM code/amount is based on Primary Payer
298
Valid Locations:
Used if encounter rate SIM code/amount is based on Location
Valid Providers:
Used if encounter rate SIM code/amount is based on Provider
COB:
Set to 1, 2, 3 or blank. Leaving COB blank indicates the
encounter rate SIM code should be used for primary, secondary
and tertiary payers. If one row has a specific COB defined, then
all other rows should have a COB. The hierarchy will always
select rows with a specific COB over rows with a blank COB.
Sex:
Used if encounter rate SIM code/amount is based on Sex
Age:
Used if encounter rate SIM code/amount is based on Age
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Example 1:
Different Encounter Rate SIM codes for primary and secondary claims with
different amounts for each. (Medi-Cal is primary vs. Medi-Cal is secondary)
Example 2:
Different Encounter Rate SIM codes for primary, secondary, dental, and vision
claims with different amounts for each
NOTE: Dental and Vision rows are configured by CPT4 code, Location or
Provider.
299
NextGen Healthcare
Encounter Rate Billing Library Maintenance > Business Rules Section
This section is divided into six tabs:






General
Primary Encounter Rate
Secondary Encounter Rate
Tertiary Encounter Rate
Claims
Claim SIM Options
General Tab
Settings on the General tab apply when the encounter rate payer is the primary, secondary, or
tertiary insurance on the encounter.
300
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
General Tab – Suggested Settings:
IMPORTANT NOTE: The “suggested settings” below for each option on the General Tab are not
specific to a particular payer. They are intended to be used as general guidelines to follow during
the initial setup of a new Encounter Rate Library. During claims testing, it may be determined that
some settings may need to be modified to meet the specific claim requirements for an encounter
rate payer.
Encounter Rate Exempt:
This applies when one or more of the charges on the encounter are flagged as Encounter Rate
Exempt in the SIM Library.
Disqualify patient encounter from ER billing if =
All SIMs are ER exempt
Suppress claim for disqualified patient encounter = Checked
Multiple Patient Encounters per day:
This applies when multiple encounters exist for a patient on the same date of service with the
same encounter rate payer attached.
The decision will be made by =
Manual selection
Alternate Payer:
This applies when the payer is setup with an Alternate Payer for split billing (eg: Medicare A / Medicare B).
Do not insert ER SIM for alternate payer claims =
Checked
Encounter Rate Insertion:
This determines whether the ER SIM will be added to the encounter on the Encounter Maintenance >
Billing & Collections tab (checked) or as an additional charge on the Charge Posting screen
(unchecked).
Insert ER SIM into Encounter Maintenance =
Checked
301
NextGen Healthcare
Primary Encounter Rate Tab
Settings on this tab apply when the encounter rate payer is the primary insurance on the
encounter.
302
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Primary Encounter Rate Tab – Suggested Settings:
IMPORTANT NOTE: The “suggested settings” below for each option on the Primary Encounter
Rate Tab are not specific to a particular payer. They are intended to be used as general guidelines
to follow during the initial setup of a new Encounter Rate Library. During claims testing, it may be
determined that some settings may need to be modified to meet the specific primary claim
requirements for an encounter rate payer.
Suppress Claim Creation:
This applies when multiple encounters exist for a patient on the same date of service.
Suppress claim for multiple same-day encounters (Multi-Yes only) = Checked
Encounter Rate Calculation:
This applies if 20% of the original charges amounts should be added to the encounter rate SIM
code amount.
Add 20% of original charge line items to encounter rate amount =
Unchecked
Auto Adjustments:
Adjust remaining balance of charges for ER billed encounter =
FQHC Medicare =
RHC Medicare =
Medi-Cal/Medicaid =
[Varies by Payer]
Only adjust line items if ER SIM is inserted
Never adjust line items
Only adjust line items if ER SIM is inserted
Use the following method for Encounter Rate adjustments =
[Varies by Payer]
NOTE: This option is available only if the “Only adjust line items if ER SIM is
inserted” option or the “Always adjust line items” option was selected above.
FQHC Medicare =
RHC Medicare =
Medi-Cal/Medicaid =
20% & adjust first line to ER amount
N/A
Adjust first line item to ER amount and adjust other lines off
Adjustment transaction code =
[Varies by Payer]
NOTE: This option is available only if the “Only adjust line items if ER SIM is
inserted” option or the “Always adjust line items” option was selected above.
FQHC Medicare =
RHC Medicare =
Medi-Cal/Medicaid =
Select an adjustment Transaction Code
N/A
Select an adjustment Transaction Code
NOTE: The selected adjustment code should be a
unique code that is used for encounter rate adjustments
only.
303
NextGen Healthcare
Encounter Rate Auto-Adjustments
The following options are available for Encounter Rate Auto-Adjustments:






20% to next bucket and FIFO
20% to next bucket and weighted
20% & adjust first line to ER amount
FIFO
Weighted
Adjust first line item to the ER amount and adjust other lines off
(Medicare FQHC)
(Medi-Cal/Medicaid)
NOTE: Auto-adjustments do not apply to carve-out services defined for the encounter rate
payer on the Payer > Alt Payer tab.
Examples
The following examples illustrate each of the Encounter Rate Auto-Adjustment options available.
The examples use an encounter rate amount of $89.05. The lab code (80069) is never adjusted
because it is setup as a carve-out code on the Alt Payer tab for the encounter rate payer.
Encounter Rate Amount: $89.05
20% to next bucket and FIFO:
This method will move 20% of each charge to the next bucket, excluding carve-outs.
Adjustments will then be applied to each charge using a FIFO distribution until the encounter rate
payer balance is equal to the Encounter Rate amount. If the Encounter Rate amount exceeds the
sum of the original charges, positive adjustments will be applied.
If the Encounter Rate amount = $150, the expected results are:
If the encounter rate value = $60.30, the expected results are:
304
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
20% to next bucket and weighted:
This method will move 20% of each charge to the next bucket, excluding carve-outs.
Adjustments will then be applied to each charge using a weighted distribution until the encounter
rate payer balance is equal to the Encounter Rate amount.
11.81
2.84
71.81
17.24
20% & adjust first line to ER amount:
This method will move 20% of each charge to the next bucket, excluding carve-outs. An
adjustment will then be applied to the first charge to bring its balance to the Encounter Rate
amount. All remaining charges will be adjusted to a balance of $0.
29.05
-14.40
89.05
FIFO:
This method will apply adjustments to charges, excluding carve-outs, using a FIFO distribution
until the encounter rate payer balance is equal to the Encounter Rate amount. If the Encounter
Rate amount exceeds the sum of the original charges, a positive adjustment will be applied to the
first charge.
75.00
14.05
Weighted:
This method will apply adjustments to charges, excluding carve-outs, using a weighted
distribution until the encounter rate payer balance is equal to the Encounter Rate amount.
- 3.19
- .76
71.81
17.24
Adjust first line item to the ER amount and adjust other lines off:
This method will apply an adjustment to the first charge to bring its balance to the Encounter Rate
amount. All remaining charges, excluding carve-outs, will be adjusted to a balance of $0.
305
NextGen Healthcare
Secondary Encounter Rate Tab
Settings on this tab apply when the encounter rate payer is the secondary insurance on the
encounter.
306
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Secondary Encounter Rate Tab – Suggested Settings:
IMPORTANT NOTE: The “suggested settings” below for each option on the Secondary Encounter
Rate Tab are not specific to a particular payer. They are intended to be used as general guidelines
to follow during the initial setup of a new Encounter Rate Library. During claims testing, it may be
determined that some settings may need to be modified to meet the specific secondary claim
requirements for an encounter rate payer.
Secondary Calculations when Medicare is the primary payer:
This applies to encounters where Medicare is primary and the encounter rate payer is secondary
on the encounter. (NOTE: This section was developed specifically for NY Medicaid)
Encounter rate amount is equal to the =
Do not insert ER SIM if the ER amount is less than primary paid =
Do not insert ER SIM if the ER amount is equal to primary paid =
Encounter Rate
Unchecked
Unchecked
Secondary Calculations when Non-Medicare is the primary payer:
This applies to encounters where any payer other than Medicare is primary and the encounter
rate payer is secondary on the encounter. (NOTE: This section was developed specifically for
NY Medicaid)
Encounter rate amount is equal to the =
Do not insert ER SIM if the ER amount is less than primary paid =
Do not insert ER SIM if the ER amount is equal to primary paid =
Encounter Rate
Unchecked
Unchecked
Suppress Claim Creation:
This applies when multiple encounters exist for the same patient with the same encounter rate
payer on the same date of service.
Suppress claim for multiple same-day encounters (Multi-Yes only) = Checked
Suppress zero dollar claims =
Unchecked
Auto Adjustments:
This controls automatic adjustments when the encounter rate payer is secondary on the
encounter.
Adjust remaining balance of charges for ER billed encounter =
Adjust charges for non ER billed encounters =
Use the following method for Encounter Rate adjustments =
Adjustment transaction code =
Never adjust line items
Checked
N/A
N/A
ER SIM Insertion:
Select this option to ignore the encounter rate billing functionality that verifies all line items on the
encounter have payments from a previous payer. This option enables the insertion of the
encounter rate SIM code even though the previous payer has not paid yet.
Allow ER SIM to insert without previous payments =
Unchecked
NOTE: This option must be selected for “Wrap Payers” using encounter rate billing.
307
NextGen Healthcare
Tertiary Encounter Rate Tab
Settings on this tab apply when the encounter rate payer is the tertiary insurance on the
encounter.
308
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Tertiary Encounter Rate Tab – Suggested Settings:
IMPORTANT NOTE: The “suggested settings” below for each option on the Tertiary Encounter
Rate Tab are not specific to a particular payer. They are intended to be used as general guidelines
to follow during the initial setup of a new Encounter Rate Library. During claims testing, it may be
determined that some settings may need to be modified to meet the specific tertiary claim
requirements for an encounter rate payer.
Tertiary Calculations when Medicare is the primary payer:
This applies to encounters where Medicare is primary and the encounter rate payer is tertiary on
the encounter. (NOTE: This section was developed specifically for NY Medicaid)
Encounter rate amount is equal to the =
Do not insert ER SIM if the ER amount is less than primary paid =
Do not insert ER SIM if the ER amount is equal to primary paid =
Encounter Rate
Unchecked
Unchecked
Tertiary Calculations when Non-Medicare is the primary payer:
This applies to encounters where any payer other than Medicare is primary and the encounter
rate payer is tertiary on the encounter. (NOTE: This section was developed specifically for NY
Medicaid)
Encounter rate amount is equal to the =
Do not insert ER SIM if the ER amount is less than primary paid =
Do not insert ER SIM if the ER amount is equal to primary paid =
Encounter Rate
Unchecked
Unchecked
Suppress Claim Creation:
This applies when multiple encounters exist for the same patient with the same encounter rate
payer on the same date of service.
Suppress claim for multiple same-day encounters (Multi-Yes only) = Checked
Suppress zero dollar claims =
Unchecked
Auto Adjustments:
This controls automatic adjustments when the encounter rate payer is tertiary on the encounter.
Adjust remaining balance of charges for ER billed encounter =
Adjust charges for non ER billed encounters =
Use the following method for Encounter Rate adjustments =
Adjustment transaction code =
Never adjust line items
Checked
N/A
N/A
ER SIM Insertion:
Select this option to ignore the encounter rate billing functionality that verifies all line items on the
encounter have payments from a previous payer. This option enables the insertion of the
encounter rate SIM code even though the previous payer has not paid yet.
Allow ER SIM to insert without previous payments =
Unchecked
NOTE: This option must be selected for “Wrap Payers” using encounter rate billing.
309
NextGen Healthcare
Claims Tab
Settings on the Claims tab apply when the encounter rate payer is the primary, secondary, or
tertiary insurance on the encounter. The settings will vary for each payer. They control the
configuration of the individual line item charges on claims for the encounter rate payer.
310
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Claims Tab – Suggested Settings:
IMPORTANT NOTE: The “suggested settings” below for each option on the Claims Tab are
specific to a particular payer. They are intended to be used as general guidelines to follow during
the initial setup of a new Encounter Rate Library. During claims testing, it may be determined that
some settings may need to be modified to meet the specific claim requirements for an encounter
rate payer.
FQHC Medicare:
Medicare claims for an FQHC must meet the following CMS guidelines:


The first charge line with a 052X revenue code and a CPT4/HCPCS code must reflect the
total charge amounts for all non-preventive services provided during the encounter.
Charge amounts for preventive services should not be included in the total amount on the
first line.
All other services provided during the encounter must be listed separately, each with the
appropriate revenue code, CPT4/HCPCS code, and charge amount.
To meet the above guidelines, define the settings for each option as follows:
RHC Medicare:
Medicare claims for an RHC must meet the following CMS guidelines:


The first charge line with a 052X revenue code and no CPT4/HCPCS code must reflect
the total charge amounts for all non-preventive services provided during the encounter.
Charge amounts for preventive services should not be included in the total amount on the
first line.
Preventive services provided during the encounter must be listed separately, each with
the appropriate revenue code, CPT4/HCPCS code, and charge amount.
To meet the above guidelines, define the settings for each option as follows:
311
NextGen Healthcare
Medi-Cal:
Medi-Cal claims must meet the following guidelines:


The first charge line with the encounter rate CPT4/HCPCS code must reflect Medi-Cal’s
expected reimbursement rate (encounter rate).
No other charge lines are included on the claim.
To meet the above guidelines, define the settings for each option as follows:
Medicaid (General):
Medicaid claims, dependent on state, may need to meet the following guidelines:


The first charge line with the encounter rate CPT4/HCPCS code must reflect Medicaid’s
expected reimbursement rate (encounter rate).
All other services provided during the encounter must be listed separately, each with the
appropriate CPT4/HCPCS code and a charge amount of $0.00.
To meet the above guidelines, define the settings for each option as follows:
Medicaid New York:
To meet the Medicaid New York guidelines, define the settings for each option as follows:
312
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Claims SIM Options Tab
Settings on the Claim SIM Options tab apply when the encounter rate payer is the primary,
secondary, or tertiary insurance on the encounter. The settings will vary for each payer. They
control the configuration of specific SIM codes on claims for the encounter rate payer.
313
NextGen Healthcare
Claim SIM Options Tab – Suggested Settings:
IMPORTANT NOTE: The “suggested settings” below for each option on the Claim SIM Options
Tab are specific to a particular payer. They are intended to be used as general guidelines to follow
during the initial setup of a new Encounter Rate Library. During claims testing, it may be
determined that some settings may need to be modified to meet the specific claim requirements for
an encounter rate payer.
FQHC Medicare:
Medicare claims for an FQHC must meet the following CMS guidelines:


The first charge line with a 052X revenue code and a CPT4/HCPCS code must reflect the
total charge amounts for all non-preventive services provided during the encounter.
Charge amounts for preventive services should not be included in the total amount on the
first line.
All other services provided during the encounter must be listed separately, each with the
appropriate revenue code, CPT4/HCPCS code, and charge amount.
To meet the above guidelines, which exclude preventive services from being included in the sum
of charges on the first line, define all preventive SIM codes as follows:
RHC Medicare:
Medicare claims for an RHC must meet the following CMS guidelines:


The first charge line with a 052X revenue code and no CPT4/HCPCS code must reflect
the total charge amounts for all non-preventive services provided during the encounter.
Charge amounts for preventive services should not be included in the total amount on the
first line.
Preventive services provided during the encounter must be listed separately, each with
the appropriate revenue code, CPT4/HCPCS code, and charge amount.
To meet the above guidelines, which exclude preventive services from being included in the sum
of charges on the first line, but included as separate line items on the claim, define all preventive
SIM codes as follows:
314
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Medi-Cal:
Medi-Cal claims must meet the following guidelines:


The first charge line with the encounter rate CPT4/HCPCS code must reflect Medi-Cal’s
expected reimbursement rate (encounter rate).
No other charge lines are included on the claim.
To meet the above guidelines, no additional settings are needed on the Claim SIM Options tab.
The settings made on the Claims tab meet all guidelines.
Medicaid (General):
Medicaid claims, dependent on state, may need to meet the following guidelines:


The first charge line with the encounter rate CPT4/HCPCS code must reflect Medicaid’s
expected reimbursement rate (encounter rate).
All other services provided during the encounter must be listed separately, each with the
appropriate CPT4/HCPCS code and a charge amount of $0.00.
To meet the above guidelines, no additional settings are needed on the Claim SIM Options tab.
The settings made on the Claims tab meet all guidelines.
Medicaid New York:
To meet the Medicaid New York’s guidelines, no additional settings are needed on the Claim SIM
Options tab. The settings made on the Claims tab meet all guidelines.
315
NextGen Healthcare
Step 8: Attach Encounter Rate Library to Payer(s)
The Encounter Rate Library must be attached to the appropriate encounter rate payer(s).
Attaching the Encounter Rate Library ensures that during the billing process in EPM, the
encounter rate SIM code is inserted onto the encounter and the claim is configured correctly to
meet the guidelines of the encounter rate payer.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Payers > Practice Tab > Libraries Sub-Tab
Define the following parameters:
Encounter Rate Library:
316
Select the Encounter Rate Library created for the
payer
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
GPCI Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – GPCI Codes
GPCI (Geographic Practice Cost Index) provides an adjustment for the cost of living variances by
geographic locality. There are three GPCI components as follows.
1. Work GPCI:
Adjustment based on the earnings of professionals by geographic locality.
2. Practice Expense GPCI:
Adjustment based on the expenses for staff wages, office space, equipment, supplies,
etc. by geographic locality.
3. Practice Liability (Malpractice) GPCI:
Adjustment based on the cost of malpractice insurance by geographic locality.
GPCI is constructed to have a national average of 1.0. Geographic areas that have costs above
the national average have index values >1.0. Geographic areas that have costs below the
national average have index values <1.0.
Medicare uses GPCI and RVU values together in a formula to determine physician
reimbursement.
Medicare’s Non-Facility Fee Reimbursement Formula:
[(Work RVU * Work GPCI) + (Non-Facility PE RVU * PE GPCI) + (Malpractice RVU * PLI GPCI)] * Conversion Factor
Medicare’s Facility Fee Reimbursement Formula:
[(Work RVU * Work GPCI) + (Facility RVU * PE GPCI) + (Malpractice RVU * PLI GPCI)] * Conversion Factor
317
NextGen Healthcare
GPCI values can be downloaded in a Microsoft® Excel comma separated format (.csv) from the
CMS website at:
http://www.cms.gov/Medicare/Medicare-Fee-for-Service-Payment/PhysicianFeeSched/PFS-Relative-Value-Files.html
Below is an example partial file from CMS.
The .csv file from CMS must be reformatted to meet the following guidelines before it can be
imported into a GPCI Codes library in File Maintenance.
318
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Below is a partial example file that has been reformatted to meet the above guidelines.
319
NextGen Healthcare
GPCI Import
Create and new GPCI Codes Library in File Maintenance with only a name (eg: 2013 GPCI
Values). To import the above reformatted file into this new library, right-click on the library and
select GPCI Import from the menu.
Below is a partial example file that has been imported into the GPCI Codes Library in File
Maintenance:
Once values have been imported into the GPCI Codes Library, they can be used in conjunction
with the RVU Library in the following three File Maintenance utilities:
1. SIM Library > RVU Update
2. SIM Library > SIM Global Update
3. Contracts Library > Contract Global Update
320
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
NDC
The NDC (National Drug Code) Library is used to define the information needed by payers on
claims in EPM for drug related HCPCS codes. Multiple NDC IDs can be defined for a single
HCPCS code.
The NDC Library must be linked in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab. Once linked, information
from the NDC Library displays in the Service Item Library > Drugs tab and is available for
selection from the Charge Posting screen in EPM and from the Procedures Module in EHR.
To manually add an NDC ID into a library, click into a blank row and enter the following:
NDC ID:
Enter the 11 digit NDC ID in the following format: 12345-1234-12.
CPT4:
Enter the HCPCS code.
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter effective and expiration dates for the NDC ID.
NDC Description:
Enter the description for the HCPCS code.
Drug Unit Price:
Enter the cost per unit for the drug, based on the Basis of Measure below.
NOTE: This is informational only and is not included on electronic claims in ASC
X12 Version 5010 format. An entry is required, even if $0.00.
321
NextGen Healthcare
Basis of Measure:
Select the appropriate units for the drug. Options include:
International Unit (F2)
Gram (GR)
Milligram (ME)
Milliliter (ML)
Unit (UN)
Drug Unit Count:
Enter the number of units per dose for the drug, based on the Basis of Measure above.
IMPORTANT NOTE: In order for NDC information to be included on electronic claims, the following
two options must be selected in the Payers table > System tab > Electronic Claims sub-tab:
Enable NDC coding for electronic claims:
Select this check-box to include the National Drug Code (NDC) on electronic claims for
the payer. NDC information is defined in the NDC Library which then defaults to the SIM
Library > Drugs tab.
Populate 2410 CTP segment:
Select this option to include NDC “Drug Unit Count” and “Basis of Measure” on electronic
claims for the payer. NDC information is defined in the NDC Library which then defaults
to the SIM Library > Drugs tab.
322
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
NDC Import
A Microsoft® Excel file containing multiple NDC IDs can be imported into an NDC library in File
Maintenance.
An “NDC to HCPCS Crosswalk” is available in Excel format (.XLS) from the following website:
https://www.dmepdac.com/crosswalk/index.html.
Below is a partial Excel .XLS file from the above website:
The Excel .XLS file must be reformatted and saved as an Excel comma delimited .CSV file before
it can be imported into an NDC library in File Maintenance. The columns in the .CSV file must be
in the following order:
Column 1 =
Column 2 =
Column 3 =
Column 4 =
Column 5 =
Column 6 =
Column 7 =
Column 8 =
Effective Date
Expiration Date
NDC ID
HCPCS/CPT4 Code
NDC Description
Drug Unit Price
Basis of Measure
Drug Unit Count
323
NextGen Healthcare
Below is a partial Excel .CSV file that has been reformatted to meet the above guidelines:
To import the Excel .CSV file into an NDC library in File Maintenance, do the following:


Create a new NDC Library in File Maintenance with only a name
Highlight the new library, right-click and select NDC Import from the menu


Click the yellow folder icon to browse, locate and select the .CSV file to be imported
Click the OK button
324
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8

The following prompt displays. Click Yes to continue the import.

The following prompt displays indicating the number of rows imported. Click the OK
button.
Below is an example of the NDC Library in File Maintenance after the import is complete.
325
NextGen Healthcare
Non-Coordinated SIM Library
A Non-Coordinated SIM Library defines specific SIM codes that are considered “noncoordinated”, which means they should not be billed to some payers, but can be billed to other
payers.
Examples:
A range of behavioral health SIM codes can be billed to Medicaid but not to any other
payer. That range of SIM codes can be setup in this library with Medicaid selected as the
only valid payer, therefore making the SIM codes “non-coordinated” for all other payers
Or a range of dental SIM codes can be billed to all payers except Medicare. That range
of SIM codes can be setup in this library with all payers except Medicare selected as
valid payers, therefore making the SIM codes “non-coordinated’ for Medicare only.
The library also defines other parameters that affect how non-coordinated SIM codes are
handled. These parameters include options and settings for Balance Control, auto-adjustments,
and claims.
A single library can be created and used by the practice. The library may include multiple detail
rows, each with different parameters and requirements for a specific payer.
NOTE: This is a practice level library only. Libraries cannot be linked to payers.
326
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Payer SIM Configuration
This section is used to define SIM codes that are valid for specific payers, and are therefore
considered non-coordinated codes for other payers.
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter an effective date and an expiration date for the detail row being defined.
Description:
Enter a description for the detail row being defined.
327
NextGen Healthcare
Service Item Configurations
Non-Coordinated SIM:
From the yellow folder icon, select one or more non-coordinated SIM codes that should
only be billed to specific payers.
Example: Select SIM codes that should only be billed to Medicaid.
Valid Payers:
From the yellow folder icon, select one or more payers. The non-coordinated SIM
code(s) selected in the previous section are valid and billable codes for the payer(s)
selected here. The non-coordinated SIM codes are not valid and should not be billed to
all other payers.
Example: Select Medicaid to indicate the above SIM codes are valid only for
Medicaid.
Only for Selected Prior Payers:
Select this check-box to enable the next parameter. From the yellow folder icon, select
one or more prior payers, if applicable.
If one or more payers are selected here, this Non-Coordinated SIM / Valid Payer detail
row will only apply when one of these payers is prior to a valid payer on an encounter.
If no payers are selected here (blank), this Non-Coordinated SIM / Valid Payer detail row
will apply when any payer is prior to a valid payer on an encounter.
Example: Select Medicare to indicate the above SIM codes that are valid for
Medicaid are to be considered non-coordinated SIM codes for Medicare only
when Medicare is the payer prior to Medicaid on an encounter.
(eg: Primary = Medicare / Secondary = Medicaid)
Non-Coordinated SIM Rules
Balance Control:
Automatically move the balance to a valid payer, else patient:
Select this option if each non-coordinated SIM charge should be moved to the first
valid payer bucket in Balance Control. If this option is selected and there is no
valid payer on the encounter, each non-coordinated SIM charge will be moved to
the Pat Amt bucket in Balance Control.
Check mark any balances moved for billing:
Select this option if each non-coordinated SIM charge moved to a valid payer
bucket should be green checked so those charges get billed to the valid payer in
the next billing/claims process.
Auto Adjustment:
Automatically adjust Non-Coordinated SIM if valid payer is not present:
If there is no valid payer on the encounter, each non-coordinated SIM charge
was moved to the Pat Amt bucket in Balance Control, and the patient should not
be responsible to pay for those charges, select the patient adjustment transaction
code to be used to auto-adjust the non-coordinated SIM charges to a balance of
$0.00.
328
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Claims:
Suppress Non-Coordinated SIM from claims for invalid payers:
Select this option to prevent non-coordinated SIM codes from appearing on
claims for payers other than valid payers.
NOTE: This option applies only if the Balance Control > “Automatically
move the balance to a valid payer, else patient” option was not selected
above.
Only send Non-Coordinated line if status of other lines is forwarded:
Select this option if claims for a valid payer should include only non-coordinated
SIM charges when the other charges were forwarded to the valid payer by the
prior payer.
Example: A charge is entered that is to be billed to Medicare (primary)
and Medicaid (secondary), and a second non-coordinated charge is
entered that is to be billed to Medicaid (secondary) only. A claim is
created for Medicare that includes only the first charge. A Medicare
transaction is entered on the first charge and the balance is forwarded
to Medicaid. When the transaction batch is posted, only the noncoordinated second charge is flagged to bill to Medicaid. The Medicaid
claim will not include the first charge since it was already forwarded to
Medicaid by Medicare.
329
NextGen Healthcare
Places of Service
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Places of Service
The Places of Service Library is used only for payers that require one or more Place of Service
codes on paper and/or electronic claims that are different from the standard codes listed below.
The library is attached to Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Place of Service
Ambulance - Land
Ambulatory Surgical Center
Assisted Living Facility
Birthing Center
Community Mental Health Center
Comprehensive I/P Rehab Facility
Comprehensive O/P Rehab Facility
Custodial Care Facility
Emergency Room Hospital
End Stage Renal Disease Tx Facility
Federally Qualified Health Center
Group Home
Home
Homeless Shelter
Hospice
Independent Clinic
Independent Lab
Indian Health Service Free-Standing Facility
Indian Health Service Provider-Based Facility
Inpatient Hospital
Inpatient Psychiatric Facility
Intermediate Care Facility
Mass Immunization Center
Military Treatment Facility
Mobile Unit
Non-Residential Substance Abuse Treatment Fac
Nursing Facility
Office
Other Unlisted Facility
Outpatient Hospital
Psychiatric Facility Partial
Psychiatric Residential Tx Center
Residential Substance Abuse
Rural Health Clinic
School
Skilled Nursing Facility
State/Local Public Health Clinic
Tribal 638 Free-Standing Facility
Tribal 638 Provider-Based Facility
Urgent Care Facility
330
Standard
Code
41
24
13
25
53
61
62
33
23
65
50
14
12
04
34
49
81
05
06
21
51
54
60
26
15
57
32
11
99
22
52
56
55
72
03
31
71
07
08
20
Alternate
Code
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Reason Codes
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Reason Codes
Reason Codes are used in NextGen® EPM during Payment Entry. They are a way to record
additional information regarding the transaction (payment, adjustment, refund) being entered.
Default Reason Codes Libraries must be attached in Practice Preferences > Transactions tab.
One library is used when entering transactions from all payers. The other library is used when
entering transactions from patients. The same library can be used for both payer and patient
transactions if desired. Additional payer-specific libraries can be created, if needed, and attached
to those Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab > Transactions sub-tab.
HIPAA X12 Standard Reason Codes
The “HIPAA X12 Standard Reason Codes” library comes pre-installed and consists of standardized
codes typically received from payers in 835 ERA (Electronic Remittance Advice) files and on paper
EOB (Explanation of Benefit) forms. Specific parameters and options can be modified for individual
codes if needed. Any code(s) received in an ERA file that does not already exist in the HIPAA X12
will be added to the library “on-the-fly”, if the appropriate option is selected in the setup of the payer’s
Remittance Profile Library.
It is recommended that the “HIPAA X12 Standard Reason Codes” be selected as the default
library in Practice Preferences > Transactions tab and therefore used when posting transactions
from all payers.
If it is desired to modify parameters for one or more reason codes for a specific payer, the “HIPAA
X12 Standard Reason Codes” library should be copied. The new library created from the copy
can then be modified as needed and linked to the specific payer.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The “HIPAA X12 Standard Reason Codes” library name should not be
changed as this is the name referenced by the COB secondary electronic claims functionality in
NextGen® EPM.
The HIPAA X12 Standard Reason Codes library consists of codes from five categories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CO
CR
OA
PI
PR
Contractual Obligation
Correction and Reversal
Other Adjustment
Payer Initiated
Patient Responsibility
Provider is financially liable
No financial liability
No financial liability
No financial liability specified
Patient is financially liable
331
NextGen Healthcare
Code:
Enter a code for the reason code being defined.
Description:
Enter a description for the reason code being defined.
Code Type:
Select one of the following:
Line Item:
Select this option if the reason code would apply to a specific line item (charge) on an encounter.
Claim Level:
Select this option if the reason code would apply to all line items (charges) on an encounter.
Adjudication:
Select this option if the reason code provides additional comments or remarks about the
adjudication of the claim. There is typically no dollar amount associated with these codes.
Remark:
Select this option if the reason code provides additional comments or remarks about the
adjudication of a specific line item. There is typically no dollar amount associated with these codes.
332
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Force Item Rebill:
Select this check-box if the reason code, when used, should flag the charge to be rebilled on
another claim to the same insurance.
Write Off Remaining Balance:
Select this check-box if the reason code, when used, should adjust off the remaining balance of
the charge to $0.00.
Display on Patient Statements:
Select this check-box if the reason code and description, when used, should appear on patient
statements.
NOTE: The “Display detail information on statement” option must be selected in Practice
Preferences > Statements tab.
Override Line Item Codes:
Select this check-box if the reason code, when used, should override all line item reason codes
previously entered on the transaction.
Skip Adjustment Code:
Select one of the following for the reason code when used in the ERA process:



Do not skip Adjustment
Skip ERA Adjustment
Use $0 Adj Amount
Default for Contract <> Payment Allowed Amount:
Select this check-box if the reason code should automatically default onto any line item where the
allowed amount specified on the transaction does not match the allowed amount defined in the
contract for the payer.
Transaction Detail Status:
Select the transaction status that should automatically default onto any line item where the
reason code is used.
Adjustment Code:
Select the adjustment transaction code that should be used if the “Write Off Remaining Balance”
check-box above is selected.
NOTE: The adjustment code selected here is used to write-off the remaining balance
when the transaction was processed via ERA. The adjustment code selected in Practice
Preferences > Transactions tab is used to write-off the remaining balance when the
transaction is manually entered.
Default to Payers Button:
This button allows the Reason Code library being defined to be attached to all payers within a
specified financial class
.
333
NextGen Healthcare
Reason Code Priority
Reason Code Priority allows the codes within a library to be re-ordered so that the codes used
most often appear to end users at the top of the list in NextGen® EPM.
This option can be accessed by right-clicking on a library and selecting Reason Code Priority
from the menu. Use the blue up/down arrows on the right-hand side to move the codes into the
desired order.
334
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Remittance Profiles
The Remittance Profile Library is used to import and process 835 ERA (Electronic Remittance
Advice) files from payers in NextGen® EPM.
A Remittance Profile Library is attached in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab to be used for all
ERA payers. Additional payer-specific libraries can be created and attached to those Payers in
the Payers table > Practice Tab > Libraries sub-tab.
NOTE: Setup of this library and training for ERA will be covered in a separate WebEx training
session.
335
NextGen Healthcare
RVU
RVU (Relative Value Units) provides a relative comparison between CPT4 codes to account for
various components of performing each service. There are four RVU components as follows:
1. Work RVU - The work and/or skill required in performing each service.
Practice Expense RVU - The expenses required in performing each service (staff,
equipment, supplies, etc.).
2. Non-Facility Practice Expense RVU
Services performed outside a facility (eg: Office).
3. Facility Practice Expense RVU
Services performed within a facility (eg: ASC, Hospital).
4. Malpractice RVU - The malpractice risk associated with performing each service.
Medicare uses RVU and GPCI values together in a formula to determine physician
reimbursement.
Medicare’s Non-Facility Fee Reimbursement Formula:
[(Work RVU * Work GPCI) + (Non-Facility PE RVU * PE GPCI) + (Malpractice RVU * PLI GPCI)] * Conversion Factor
Medicare’s Facility Fee Reimbursement Formula:
[(Work RVU * Work GPCI) + (Facility RVU * PE GPCI) + (Malpractice RVU * PLI GPCI)] * Conversion Factor
336
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
RVU values can be downloaded in a Microsoft® Excel comma separated format (.csv) from the
CMS website at:
http://www.cms.gov/Medicare/Medicare-Fee-for-Service-Payment/PhysicianFeeSched/PFS-Relative-Value-Files.html
Below is an example partial file from CMS.
The .csv file from CMS must be reformatted to meet the following guidelines before it can be
imported into an RVU library in File Maintenance.
337
NextGen Healthcare
Below is a partial example file that has been reformatted to meet the above guidelines.
NOTE: Columns F, G, H and I are used for RVU5, RVU6, RVU7 and RVU8 respectively. These
four additional RVU values can be determined by the client/practice.
338
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
RVU Import
Create a new RVU Library in File Maintenance with only a name (eg: 2013 RVU Values). To
import the above reformatted file into this new library, right-click on the library and select RVU
Import from the menu.
Below is a partial example file that has been imported into the RVU Library in File Maintenance.
NOTE: The RVU1 – RVU8 column headings can be captioned by entering the desired
name for each column on the RVU Library > Labels tab.
Once values have been imported into the RVU Library, they can be used in conjunction with the
GPCI Codes Library in the following three File Maintenance utilities:
1. SIM Library > RVU Update
2. SIM Library > SIM Global Update
3. Contracts Library > Contract Global Update
339
NextGen Healthcare
Service Items
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Service Items
The Service Items (SIM) Library defines the price a practice will charge for the services they
perform. Additional parameters are defined for each service that impact reports, billing and
claims. The library is used in NextGen® EHR in the Procedures Module. It is also used in
NextGen® EPM during Charge Posting. A SIM Library must be attached in Practice Preferences
> Libraries tab.
The “Default Service Items” library is pre-installed and consists of all CPT4 codes for the
current year. Existing codes can be hidden or modified as needed.
All codes needed for dental billing must be added in the CPT4 Codes table before they can be
added into the Service Item Library. Example: D0110 Initial Oral Exam. These codes can be
loaded by a Technical Support Representative after logging a ticket with NextGen Support.
All practices can share the same library by using the Practice Access option from the right-click
menu. If needed, a separate library can be created for each practice by using the Copy option
from the right-click menu.
IMPORTANT NOTE: It is recommended that the “Default Service Items” library be used by all
practices. This ensures that all codes needed for clinical documentation are available in
NextGen® EHR and all codes needed for billing are available in NextGen® EPM.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load this table.
340
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Search:
Located on the left side of the window, this section enables users to search for specific Service
Items. If there are fewer than 50 Service Items defined in the library, all codes will automatically
display in the Search list. If there are more than 50 Service Items defined in the library, codes do
not automatically display. Instead, the user must manually enter the SIM code or the first few
digits of the code in the Search field.


To find a specific SIM code, type the first few digits of the code. SIM codes with matching
digits will display.
To list all SIM codes, type an asterisk.
SIM Library Name:
Enter the Service Item Library name here to find that SIM.
Service Item #:
Defaults from the CPT4 code entered. The SIM code can be modified if needed. It is the code
entered/selected by end users.
NOTE: SIM codes that include a modifier as part of the code should not include
additional characters or spaces.
Correct Format:
71010TC
7101026
Incorrect Format:
71010-TC or 71010 TC
71010-26 or 71010 26
Description:
Defaults from the CPT4 code entered. The description can be modified if needed. It is the
description seen by end users.
CPT4 Code:
Enter the CPT4 code for the Service Item # (SIM code) being defined. The CPT4 code appears
on claims.
NOTE: CPT4 codes that include a modifier as part of the code should not include
additional characters or spaces.
Correct Format:
71010TC
7101026
Incorrect Format:
71010-TC or 71010 TC
71010-26 or 71010 26
Modifier 1 and 2:
Enter one or two modifiers in the fields to the right of the CPT4 Code. The modifier(s) will default
on the Charge Posting screen for the SIM code being defined.
Hide SIM:
Select this check-box if you want to hide the selected SIM code. In the Search list, the Hidden
icon displays next to hidden SIM codes. Users cannot access hidden SIM codes.
341
NextGen Healthcare
General Tab
The General tab includes multiple parameters that can be defined for each SIM code. These
parameters will apply regardless of payer.
Place of Service:
Select the place of service that is needed in Box 24B on 1500 claims for the SIM code being
defined.
NOTE: If POS is blank for a SIM code, the POS defined for the location will be used. If
POS is blank for the SIM code and for the location, then POS is a required entry to the
end user during charge posting.
Department:
Select the department for the SIM code being defined that will be used on reports.
NOTE: This field only displays if the “SIM Fields: Show Dept, Modality and Component”
option is selected in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab.
Modality:
Select the modality for the SIM code being defined that will be used to sub-categorize the
department on reports.
NOTE: This field only displays if the “SIM Fields: Show Dept, Modality and Component”
option is selected in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab.
After Care Days:
For procedures that have an after care “global” period, enter the number of days here. This will
generate an alert to end users for patients that have had this procedure performed.
342
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Component:
Select Global, Professional or Technical for the SIM code being defined. This is not used on
claims or reports. It is informational only.
NOTE: This field only displays if the “SIM Fields: Show Dept, Modality and Component”
option is selected in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab.
Revenue Code:
Select the revenue code for the SIM code being defined. A 4-digit revenue code is required for
any SIM code that may be billed on a UB claim form. The setup in the Payers table
determines which payers will generate UB claims.
Form:
Select 1500 for all non-dental SIM codes. The setup in the Payers table determines which payers
will generate UB claims.
Select ADA for all dental SIM codes. The setup in the Payers table determines which payers will
generate ADA claims. The SIM Library > Payers tab is used for dental payers that require a 1500
claim.
Base Unit:
For anesthesia codes, enter the number of base units for the SIM code being defined. This is
used in conjunction with the “Anesthesia SIM” check-box below.
Alt Procedure Code 1 & 2:
These fields are used for interfaces between NextGen and external systems. Enter the crossreference code(s) used by the external system for the SIM code being defined.
Exempt patient adjustment code:
Select the adjustment transaction code that should be used to adjust the SIM code being defined
down to a balance of $0.00. This is used in conjunction with the “Encounter billing exempt”
check-box below.
Rental:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined will be used with recurring DME rental billing.
Rental Duration per Unit:
If the “Rental” check-box was selected above, select one of the following;
Day: The price defined for the rental SIM code is per day
Month: The price defined for the rental SIM code is per month
Behavioral Health:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined will be used with Behavioral Health timed billing.
Behavioral Health Base Minutes:
If the “Behavioral Health” check-box was selected above, select one of the following;
15 minutes:
30 minutes:
60 minutes:
240 minutes:
Use default units:
The price defined for the SIM code is per 15 minutes
The price defined for the SIM code is per 30 minutes
The price defined for the SIM code is per 60 minutes
The price defined for the SIM code is per 240 minutes
The price defined for the SIM code is not based on time
343
NextGen Healthcare
Effective / Expiration Date:
Enter the effective and expiration dates for the price to be defined for the SIM code.
NOTE: Additional rows are available for future updates to prices.
Non-Facility Price:
Enter the price for the SIM code when the service is performed in a non-facility setting (eg: Office)
Facility Price:
Enter the price for the SIM code when the service is performed in a facility setting (eg: Hospital)
Cost to Perform:
Enter the amount is costs the practice to perform the SIM code on patients.
NOTE: This is for information purposes only. If unknown, leave blank.
Time to Perform:
Enter the amount of time it takes the practice to perform the SIM code on patients.
NOTE: This is for information purposes only. If unknown, leave blank.
RVU 1 – RVU 8:
Enter up to eight RVU values for the SIM code.
NOTE: RVU values can be entered manually for each SIM code or they can be imported
for all SIM codes from an RVU Library using the RVU Update utility.
Additional Price Fields:
The following price fields display only if “Advanced SIM Library Mode” has been enabled in
Enterprise Preferences > Libraries tab.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Advanced Service Item Library Mode should not be enabled in
Enterprise Preferences without fully understanding all of the related maintenance and
functionality involved. Once it has been enabled, it cannot be disabled.
UD1 Price / UD1 Price – Facility:
Enter a user-defined non-facility price and facility price for the SIM code. These prices
are not used during charge posting in EPM. They can be used on reports for comparison
purposes. They can also print on claims for specific payers if the “User-defined claims
override price” option is selected for the payer on the Payer > Practice tab > Other subtab.
NOTE: These two user-defined price fields can be captioned in Enterprise
Preferences > Libraries tab.
UD2 Price / UD2 Price – Facility:
Enter a user-defined non-facility price and facility price for the SIM code. These prices
are not used during charge posting in EPM. They can be used on reports for comparison
purposes. They can also print on claims for specific payers if the “User-defined claims
override price” option is selected for the payer on the Payer > Practice tab > Other subtab.
NOTE: These two user-defined price fields can be captioned in Enterprise
Preferences > Libraries tab.
344
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Non-Fac Unassigned Price / Fac Unassigned Price:
Enter a non-facility price and facility price for the SIM code that will be used during
charge posting in EPM on encounters where the “Assignment of Benefits” has been set
to “No” in the Chart > Encounters tab > Insurance sub-tab > Verification section.
Force to paper:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined should never be sent on an electronic claim
and should always drop to a paper claim.
Force patient responsibility:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined should never be billed to insurance but
always billed directly to the patient.
Suppress Patient Procedure:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined, when entered during charge posting in
NextGen® EPM, should not appear on the encounter in NextGen® EHR.
Qualifying Encounter Check-Boxes:
More information is available at the end of this section regarding Qualifying Encounters on the
UDS Report.
Self-pay Qualifying Encounter:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined is considered a “face-to-face”
encounter with a qualified provider for patients with no insurance and it should be
counted as a qualifying encounter.
Sliding Fee Qualifying Encounter:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined is considered a “face-to-face”
encounter with a qualified provider for patients on a sliding fee schedule and it should be
counted as a qualifying encounter.
Qualifying Encounter for all payers:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined is considered a “face-to-face”
encounter with a qualified provider for patients with insurance and it should be counted
as a qualifying encounter.
Encounter billing exempt:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined should be charged on a patient encounter but
should not be billed. This is used in conjunction with the “Exempt patient adjustment code” field
above.
Suppress from Statement:
Select this check-box to suppress the SIM code being defined from printing on statements. This
can be used for SIM codes that must be entered as a charge on the encounter for billing
purposes but should not display on the patient’s statement.
Prevent charge amount overrides:
Select this check-box if users should not be able to override the price defined for the SIM code
during Charge Posting in EPM.
Anesthesia SIM:
Select this check-box for anesthesia SIM codes. This is used in conjunction with the “Base Unit”
field above.
345
NextGen Healthcare
Encounter Rate Exempt:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined should be exempt from Encounter Rate
Billing and appear on the claim as a separate line item from the encounter rate code.
Suppress Billing:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined, when entered in the procedures module in
NextGen® EHR, should not appear on the encounter in NextGen® EPM for billing.
Sliding fee exempt:
Select this check-box if the SIM code being defined should be exempt from Sliding Fee Schedule
automatic adjustments.
346
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Qualifying Encounters:
The qualifying encounter functionality in NextGen® EPM is a UDS reporting mechanism. It
ensures that when specific SIM codes are charged, the encounter gets counted as “face-to-face”
encounter with a qualified provider.
NOTE: The Qualifying Encounter check-boxes in the SIM Library must be enabled in
Practice Preferences > Claims Tab by selecting the Enable Qualifying Encounter
Billing check-box.
Once the above Practice Preference is selected, the following three check-boxes become
available in the SIM Library:
Self-Pay Qualifying Encounter
Sliding Fee Qualifying Encounter
Qualifying Encounter for All Payers
Patients with no insurance
Patients on a sliding fee schedule
Patients with Insurance
All SIM codes that are considered to be a “face-to-face” encounter with a qualified
provider should have all three of the above check-boxes selected.
For example:
E&M Codes
Lab Codes
Qualifying Encounter check-boxes selected
Qualifying Encounter check-boxes not selected

If a patient has an encounter that includes only an E&M code, the encounter will be
counted as a qualifying encounter.

If a patient has an encounter that includes only a Lab code, the encounter will not be
counted as a qualifying encounter.

If a patient has an encounter that includes an E&M code and a Lab code, the
encounter will be counted as a qualifying encounter.
347
NextGen Healthcare
Other Tab
The Other tab includes a “Narrative” parameter that can be defined for each SIM code. The
Narrative will apply regardless of payer.
Narrative:
Enter a comment for the SIM code being defined. When this code is entered as a charge on an
encounter, the comment defaults to the “Narrative” field on the Charge Posting screen. It then
prints in Box 19 on 1500 claims.
348
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Payer Tab
The Payer tab includes additional parameters that can be defined for each SIM code. These
parameters will apply only to the selected payer(s).
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load information on this tab
Payer:
Select the payer that requires additional parameters for the SIM code.
Suppress Rendering/Attending Loop:
Select the option to suppress the Attending 2310A loop on 837I (UB) claims, or suppress the
Rendering 2310B loop on 837P (1550) and 837D (ADA) claims, or suppress both loops on claims
for the selected payer/SIM code.
Do Not Sum Units for CPT4 Code:
Select this check-box to prevent multiple charges for the same SIM code on an encounter from
combining to a single line on claims for the selected payer/SIM code.
Single Unit CPT4 Code Roll Up:
Select this check-box if the SIM code should roll-up with other SIM codes that have the same
Alternate CPT4 defined to a single line item on claims for the selected payer.
Single Unit Revenue Code Roll Up:
Select this check-box if the SIM code should roll-up with other SIM codes that have the same
Revenue Code defined to a single line item on claims for the selected payer.
Exclude Mods from Optik Charges:
This check-box only displays if users have a license for the Optik application. If the current SIM is
an Optik SIM, you can select this check-box to exclude the LT, RT, and RP modifiers from Optik
charges. If this check-box is clear, the SIM sends the modifiers from Optik to EPM.
349
NextGen Healthcare
Disable Patient Responsibility Percent:
It is useful when you want to force the SIM to payer responsibility. Select this check-box to assign
the entire charge amount for the specified Service Item to the payer.
Force to Paper:
Select this check-box to require the claims form type for claims generated for the payer to be
paper.
Purchased Service:
Check this check-box to designate a SIM as a Purchased Service Indicator for the selected
payer.
DME:
Check this check-box to specify the SIM as a DME (Durable Medical Equipment) SIM for the
payer.
Send Operating Phys:
Select this check-box to create the 2310B loop (Operating Physician) from the rendering provider
on the claim. The 2310B loop is created on an electronic institutional claim (UB) for the selected
SIM and payer combination. The loop is created even if the existing Populate Operating
Physician Information if applicable option on the Submitter Profile library > Exception Options tab
is deactivated.
Mammography Code:
Select this check-box to specify the SIM as a Mammography code for the payer.
Qualifying Encounter:
Select this check-box to specify the SIM code is considered a “Qualifying Encounter” code for the
selected payer on the UDS report.
Non Covered:
Select this check-box to change the SIM to a non-covered charge. Non-covered charges report at
the line item level on paper and electronic UB92 claims. The amounts display:
 On the paper form in FL-48 when you build a UB92 claim with that SIM Item.
 In SV207 of the 2400 Loop when you generate the 837I.
Force Patient Responsibility:
This setting only takes effect when it is selected for the primary payer. It is useful when you want
to force the SIM to patient responsibility for individual payers. Select this check-box to assign the
entire charge amount for the specified Service Item to the patient. This charge does not appear
on the HCFA 1500, UB92, or ADA forms.
Send Descriptor on EDI File:
Select this check-box to have the “Narrative” populate the 2400 SV101-7 segment on electronic
claims for the selected payer/SIM code.
Alert Message:
Enter a free text note that should display as an alert to users when entering a charge on an
encounter for the selected payer/SIM code.
350
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Setup for Roll-Up Billing
Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code provides the ability to “roll-up” multiple charges on an
encounter into one line item on the claim. Each line item represents a specific Revenue Code.
Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code provides the ability to “roll-up” multiple charges on an encounter
into one line item on the claim. Each line item represents a specific CPT4 Code.
The following two sections outline the setup required for each type of roll-up billing.
Considerations:



Claims are not configurable. They will always reflect one line item for the rolled-up
Revenue Code or CPT4 code with a price that equals the sum of the rolled-up charges.
SIM Library maintenance can be challenging. Each individual SIM code must be flagged
to roll-up either by revenue code or by CPT4 code for the payer on the SIM Library >
Payers tab.
ERA payment (Electronic Remittance Advice) functionality is limited.
Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code
This setup could be used for Medicare at a Rural Health Center to create a claim where all nonpreventive services are rolled-up to a single 0521 revenue code line item.
IMPORTANT NOTE: NextGen’s best practice recommendation is to use Encounter
Rate billing for both Medicare and Medicaid. In some cases, Roll-Up by revenue code
will not meet the billing requirements for a payer (eg: FQHC Medicare). Before
proceeding with the following setup, always consult with a NextGen EPM Implementation
Specialist and an EDI/Claims Analyst to confirm that this is the best setup option to meet
the payer’s specific billing requirements.
With this setup, all SIM codes on an encounter with the same Revenue Code will roll-up to a
single line item on a claim and the amount on that line item will equal the total sum of the rolledup charges.
In order for charges to roll-up into one line on the claim, the following components must be the
same for all charges:








Date of Service
Rendering Provider
Location
Place of Service
Modifier (unless “Ignore Modifiers on Roll-Up” is selected for the payer)
Revenue Code
SIM Library > Payer tab > “Single Unit Revenue Code Roll Up”
SIM Library > Payer tab > “Do not sum Units for CPT4 Code”
351
NextGen Healthcare
Example: Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code for Medicare (RHC)
The following charges are entered on a Medicare encounter:
Charge:
Revenue Code:
Amount:
Preventive/Non-Preventive:
99212
11301
76090
0521
0521
0403
$95.00
$150.00
$200.00
Non-Preventive
Non-Preventive
Preventive
When the encounter is billed, a UB (837I) claim is created for Medicare Part A that meets the
specific billing requirements for an RHC. The appearance of the claim is a result of parameters
defined within the Service Item Library > Payer tab.
Claim Line 1: Includes the Revenue Code (0521) and no CPT4/HCPCS code. The total charge
amount is equal to the sum of all non-preventive services that rolled-up because they have the
same Revenue Code.
Claim Lines 2 – n: Preventive services are listed separately on the claim with their
corresponding Revenue Code, CPT4/HCPCS code, and charge amount.
352
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Setup for Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code
Setup for Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code involves the following tables in File Maintenance:





Practice Preferences
Revenue Codes
SIM Library > General Tab
SIM Library > Payer Tab
Payers
Step 1: Practice Preferences
Enable Qualifying Encounters
Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code requires specific settings in the SIM Library. In order to flag
SIM codes for roll-up billing, the Enable Qualifying Encounter Billing option must be selected in
Practice Preferences > Claims tab. This enables the “Single Unit Revenue Code Roll Up” checkbox in the SIM Library > Payer tab.
NOTE: This setting is also required for tracking qualifying encounters in NextGen® PM. It
enables the three Qualifying Encounter check-boxes in the SIM library > General tab.
Practice Preferences > Claims Tab
353
NextGen Healthcare
Step 2: Revenue Codes
Verify the appropriate Revenue Codes exist that are needed on UB claims in Field Locator 42 for
the roll-up payer. A 4-digit revenue code must be attached to each SIM code in the Service Item
Library that may be billed on a UB claim.
A list of Revenue Codes is available from NGS Medicare. Copy and paste the below link into an
internet browser: http://www.ngsmedicare.com/
NOTE: This table comes pre-installed. Items should be reviewed and modified as needed.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Revenue Codes
Define the Revenue Codes as follows:
Code:
Description:
Occurrence Code:
Enter the 4-digit code as it should appear in UB claims
Enter the description as it should appear on UB claims
Leave blank
This setting is optional and is only needed if Occurrence Code is to be populated in
Field Locators 31 – 31 on UB claims. The selected Occurrence Code sets the default
on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab > Occurrence Codes sub-tab in NextGen®
EPM.
Value Code:
Leave blank
This setting is optional and is only needed if Value Code is to be populated in Field
Locators 39 – 41 on UB claims. The selected Occurrence Code sets the default on
the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab > Value Codes sub-tab in NextGen® EPM.
354
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 3: Payers
Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code requires a specific setting in the Payers table > Practice tab.
Each payer that is to roll-up to a single revenue code line on the claim must have the following
option selected so that modifiers entered on charges are ignored for the roll-up.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Payers > Practice Tab > Other Sub-Tab
Define the following parameters for each roll-up payer:
Ignore modifiers on roll-up:
Select this check-box
355
NextGen Healthcare
Step 4: SIM Library > General Tab
Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code requires specific settings in the SIM Library > General tab.
Each SIM code that is to roll-up to a single line item on the claim must have the following
parameters defined.
File Maintenance > Libraries > SIM Library > General Tab
Define the following parameters for each SIM code:
Revenue Code:
Select the appropriate revenue code for UB claims
NOTE: This is the default Revenue Code for all UB payers. If
the roll-up payer requires a different revenue code, the “Alt Rev”
code must be defined on the SIM Library > Payer tab for the rollup payer.
Form:
Select 1500
NOTE: This is the default type of Form for all payers. If the rollup payer requires a different form (eg: UB), additional setup must
be done in the Payers table > Practice tab > UB sub-tab for the
roll-up payer.
356
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 5: SIM Library > Payer Tab
Roll-Up Billing by Revenue Code requires specific settings in the SIM Library > Payer tab. Each
SIM code that is to roll-up to a single revenue code line on the claim must have the following
parameters defined. This setup does not include carve-out SIM codes that should not roll-up on
the claim.
NOTE: The NextGen® Import Wizard can be used for this step.
File Maintenance > Libraries > SIM Library > Payer Tab
Define the following parameters for each SIM code:
Payer:
Select the roll-up payer
Single Unit Revenue Code Roll Up:
Select this check-box
The following parameters would be defined only if an Alternate Revenue Code is needed on
UB claims for the roll-up payer that is different from the Revenue Code defined on the General
tab for all other UB payers:
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter the appropriate date range
Form:
Select UB
Alt Rev:
Enter the alternate revenue code (only if
different from General tab)
357
NextGen Healthcare
Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code
This option is rarely used. It could be used for any payer that requires multiple services to be
rolled-up to a single CPT4 code line item on the claim.
IMPORTANT NOTE: NextGen’s best practice recommendation is to use Encounter
Rate billing for both Medicare and Medicaid. In some cases, Roll-Up by CPT4 code
will not meet the billing requirements for a payer (eg: FQHC/RHC Medicare). Before
proceeding with the following setup, always consult with a NextGen EPM Implementation
Specialist and an EDI/Claims Analyst to confirm that this is the best setup option to meet
the payer’s specific billing requirements.
With this setup, all SIM codes on an encounter with the same Alternate CPT4 Code will roll-up to
a single line item on a claim and the amount on that line item will equal the total sum of the rolledup charges.
In order for charges to roll-up into one line on the claim, the following components must be the
same for all charges:







358
Date of Service
Rendering Provider
Location
Place of Service
SIM Library > Payer tab > “Single Unit CPT4 Code Roll Up”
SIM Library > Payer tab > “Alternate CPT4”
SIM Library > Payer tab > “Do not sum Units for CPT4 Code”
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Example: Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code
The following charges are entered on an encounter:
Charge:
Alt CPT4 Code:
Amount:
Preventive/Non-Preventive:
99212
11301
76090
0521
0521
$95.00
$150.00
$200.00
Non-Preventive
Non-Preventive
Preventive
When the encounter is billed, a UB (837I) claim is created. The appearance of the claim is a
result of parameters defined within the Service Item Library > Payer tab.
Claim Line 1: Includes the CPT4/HCPCS code (0521). The total charge amount is equal to the
sum of all services that rolled-up because they have the same Alternate CPT4 Code (0521).
Claim Lines 2 – n: Other services are listed separately on the claim with their corresponding
CPT4/HCPCS code, and charge amount.
359
NextGen Healthcare
Setup for Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code
Setup for Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code involves the following tables in File Maintenance:





Practice Preferences
CPT4 Codes
SIM Library > General Tab
SIM Library > Payer Tab
Payers
Step 1: Practice Preferences
Enable Qualifying Encounters
Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code requires specific settings in the SIM Library. In order to flag SIM
codes for roll-up billing, the Enable Qualifying Encounter Billing option must be selected in
Practice Preferences > Claims tab. This enables the “Single Unit CPT4 Code Roll Up” check-box
in the SIM Library > Payer tab.
NOTE: This setting is also required for tracking qualifying encounters in NextGen® EPM. It
enables the three Qualifying Encounter check-boxes in the SIM library > General tab.
Practice Preferences > Claims Tab
360
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 2: CPT4 Codes
Verify the appropriate CPT4 Codes exist that are needed on UB claims in Field Locator 44 for the
roll-up payer. The CPT4 Codes will be linked to SIM codes as the Alternate CPT4 in the SIM
Library.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > CPT4 Codes
Define the CPT4 Codes as follows:
Code:
Enter the code as it should appear in UB claims
Description:
Enter the description as it should appear on UB claims
Type of Service:
Select Medical Care
361
NextGen Healthcare
Step 3: Payers
Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code requires a specific setting in the Payers table > Defaults-2 tab.
Each payer that is to roll-up to a single CPT4 code line on the claim must have the following
option selected so that the CPT4 code appears in Field Locator 44 on UB claims.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Payers > Defaults-2 Tab
Define the following parameters for each roll-up payer:
CPT on Rev Code Roll-up:
362
Select this check-box
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 3: Payers (continued)
Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code requires a specific setting in the Payers table > Practice tab. Each
payer that is to roll-up to a single CPT4 code line on the claim must have the following option
selected so that modifiers entered on charges are ignored for the roll-up.
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Payers > Practice Tab > Other Sub-Tab
Define the following parameters for each roll-up payer:
Ignore modifiers on roll-up:
Select this check-box
363
NextGen Healthcare
Step 4: SIM Library > General Tab
Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code requires specific settings in the SIM Library > General tab. Each
SIM code that is to roll-up to a single line item on the claim must have the following parameters
defined.
File Maintenance > Libraries > SIM Library > General Tab
Define the following parameters for each SIM code:
Revenue Code:
Select the appropriate revenue code for UB claims
NOTE: This is the default Revenue Code for all UB payers. If
the roll-up payer requires a different revenue code, the “Alt Rev”
code must be defined on the SIM Library > Payer tab for the rollup payer.
Form:
Select 1500
NOTE: This is the default type of Form for all payers. If the rollup payer requires a different form (eg: UB), additional setup must
be done in the Payers table > Practice tab > UB sub-tab for the
roll-up payer.
364
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Step 5: SIM Library > Payer Tab
Roll-Up Billing by CPT4 Code requires specific settings in the SIM Library > Payer tab. Each SIM
code that is to roll-up to a single CPT4 code line on the claim must have the following parameters
defined. This setup does not include carve-out SIM codes that should not roll-up on the claim.
NOTE: The NextGen® Import Wizard can be used for this step.
File Maintenance > Libraries > SIM Library > Payer Tab
Define the following parameters for each SIM code:
Payer:
Select the roll-up payer
Single Unit CPT4 Code Roll Up:
Select this check-box
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter the appropriate date range
Form:
1500 or UB
Alt CPT4:
Enter the alternate CPT4 code to which the
SIM should be rolled up
365
NextGen Healthcare
Labels Tab
The Labels tab is used to caption the RVU1 – RVU8 fields found on the price row for the SIM
code on the General tab.
NOTE: The captions entered here also display on the SIM Library > RVU Update
window.
366
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Notes/Significant Events Tab
This tab has a Notes section where general free text notes and comments about the SIM Library
can be entered. Also, Significant Events are automatically recorded when a price is updated for a
specific SIM code.
Notes:
Enter free text notes about the SIM Library. The notes are not SIM code specific.
Significant Events:
The system will automatically record one of the following Significant Event messages when a
modification is made to any field on the price row for a SIM code. The significant events are SIM
code specific.
NOTE: In order to record the below messages in the SIM Library, the “Service Item
Modified” significant event must be selected in EPM from the Admin > Preferences >
Significant Events menu option.
Price edited via SIM Library Maintenance:
This message is recorded when a user manually updates one or more fields on the price
row for a SIM code.
Pricing update run via SIM Template:
This message is recorded when a user updates one or more fields on the price row for a
SIM code by use of a SIM Pricing Template. The name of the Template and the
Configuration within the template are included in the message.
367
NextGen Healthcare
Drugs Tab
The Drugs tab displays information for the selected SIM/CPT4 code from the NDC Library linked
in Practice Preferences > Libraries tab. New NDC IDs can be added and existing NDC IDs can
be modified or deleted for the selected SIM/CPT4.
NOTE: Adding, deleting or modifying a row on the Drugs tab will also update the NDC
Library with the same changes.
NDC ID:
Enter the 11 digit NDC ID in the following format: 12345-1234-12.
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter effective and expiration dates for the NDC ID.
Description:
Enter the description for the HCPCS code.
Drug Unit Price:
Enter the cost per unit for the drug, based on the Basis of Measure below.
NOTE: This is informational only and is not included on electronic claims in ASC
X12 Version 5010 format. An entry is required, even if $0.00.
368
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Basis of Measure:
Select the appropriate units for the drug. Options include:
International Unit (F2)
Gram (GR)
Milligram (ME)
Milliliter (ML)
Unit (UN)
Drug Unit Count:
Enter the number of units per dose for the drug, based on the Basis of Measure above.
369
NextGen Healthcare
RVU Update
The RVU Update is a utility that can be used to update the RVU1 – RVU8 values within the
existing SIM Library. The utility uses the RVU Library and GPCI Codes Library (optional) in a
user defined calculation to determine and update the RVU values.
NOTE: The labels/names displayed on each of the eight tabs are defined in the RVU
Library > Labels tab.
The utility can be accessed by right-clicking on the SIM Library and selecting RVU Update from
the menu.
370
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
SIM Exceptions
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Service Item Exceptions
SIM Exceptions allow for defining differences from the standard SIM Library for non-facility and
facility prices, place of service, modifiers and revenue code. The differences can be based on
any of the following:



Provider
Provider/Location
Provider/Location/Payer
Example
Dr. Watson
Dr. Watson at Westside Office
Dr. Watson at Westside Office for Medicare
To create a SIM Exception, right-click on the Service Item Library and select SIM Exceptions from
the menu.
SIM Exception Name:
Enter the name of the SIM Exception being defined.
Include Past SIM Items:
Select this check-box to include expired SIM codes in the display at the bottom of the window.
Exception SIMs only:
Select this check-box to include only those SIM codes that already have SIM Exception defined in
the display at the bottom of the window.
SIM:
Displays the SIM code
SIM Description:
Displays the description of the SIM code
CPT4:
Displays the CPT4 code associate with the SIM code
Effective/Expiration Date Range:
Displays the Effective and Expiration Date for the SIM code
371
NextGen Healthcare
Non Facility Amount:
Displays the standard Non-Facility price for the SIM code
Facility Amount:
Displays the standard Facility price for the SIM code
SIM Exceptions Non-Facility Amount:
Enter the alternate Non-Facility price for the SIM Exception being defined, if applicable
SIM Exceptions Facility Amount:
Enter the alternate Facility price for the SIM Exception being defined, if applicable
POS:
Select the alternate Place of Service for the SIM Exception being defined, if applicable
Modifier 1:
Enter the first alternate Modifier for the SIM Exception being defined, if applicable
Modifier 2:
Enter the second alternate Modifier for the SIM Exception being defined, if applicable
Revenue Code:
Enter the alternate Revenue code for UB claims for the SIM Exception being defined, if applicable
372
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Once created, SIM Exceptions are linked to rendering providers in the Providers table > Practice
tab > Group Information section.
In the below example, the SIM exception is linked to Dr. Watson at the Westside Office for all
payers.
373
NextGen Healthcare
SIM Global Update
The SIM Global Update is a utility that can be used to update the non-facility/facility prices within
the existing SIM Library.
The utility has two options available for updating prices:
1. New Price Using Dollars / Percentage
2. New Price Properties Using RVUs
Option #1 updates the non-facility/facility price amounts by either a flat dollar amount (eg: $10.00)
or a percentage (eg: 10%).
Option #2 uses the RVU Library and GPCI Codes Library (optional) in a calculation of the new
non-facility/facility price amounts.
The utility can be accessed by right-clicking on the SIM Library and selecting SIM Global Update
from the menu.
374
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Filter Criteria
SIM:
Starting SIM code, if not using a CPT4 code range
Thru SIM:
Ending SIM code, if not using a CPT4 code range
Effective Date:
Enter the Effective Date for the SIM codes to be update.
NOTE: Only those SIM codes in effect on the date specified will be updated.
CPT4:
Starting CPT4 code, if not using a SIM code range
Thru CPT4:
Ending CPT4 code, if not using a SIM code range
Department:
Select a Department to update only those SIM codes within the selected department
New Price Using Dollars / Percentage
Use Dollar/Percentage:
Select the check-box to update the price on the codes selected in the Filter Criteria
section by either a flat dollar amount or a percentage
Dollar:
Select this option to update the price on the codes selected in the Filter Criteria section
by a flat dollar amount
Percentage:
Select this option to update the price on the codes selected in the Filter Criteria section
by a percentage
Amount Increase:
Enter the dollar amount or percentage to be used in the price update for the codes
selected in the Filter Criteria section
New Price Properties Using RVU’s
Calculate Price using RVU * GPCI:
Select this check-box to update the price on the codes selected in the Filter Criteria
section using an RVU Library and a GPCI Library (optional) in a pricing calculation
RVU Library:
Select the RVU Library to be used in the pricing calculation
GPCI Library:
Select the GPCI Library to be used in the pricing calculation, if applicable
375
NextGen Healthcare
Carrier/Locality:
Select the Carrier/Locality from the GPCI Library to be used in the pricing calculation, if
applicable
RVU / GPCI Calculation:
Create the pricing calculation to be used
Pricing Multiplier:
The percentage entered here will be multiplied by the total from the calculation defined
above
Conversion Factor:
The conversion factor entered here will be multiplied by the total from the calculation
defined above
Anesthesia Factor:
The anesthesia conversion factor entered here, if applicable, will be multiplied by the total
from the calculation defined above
Update the Non Facility Price:
Select this option to update the Non-Facility price on the selected codes
Update the Facility Price:
Select this option to update the Facility price on the codes selected codes
Create New Effective SIM Price:
Select this option to create a new price row for the selected codes
Update Existing SIM Effective Price:
Select this option to update the existing price row for the selected codes
Do Not Reduce the Price:
Select this check-box to prevent the price from being reduced for the selected codes during the
update
New Price Properties
Effective Date:
Enter the Effective Date for the new price
Expiration Date:
Enter the Expiration Date for the new price
Rounding Option:
Select the method in which the new prices will be rounded, if applicable






376
No rounding:
Round down to nearest dollar:
Round down to nearest quarter:
Round to nearest quarter:
Round up to the nearest dollar:
Round up to the nearest quarter:
Prices are not rounded
Prices are rounded down to the nearest dollar
Prices are rounded down to the nearest quarter
Prices are rounded to the nearest quarter
Prices are rounded to the nearest whole dollar
Prices are rounded up to the nearest quarter
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
SIM Groups
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Service Item Groups
SIM Groups (AKA “Explosion Codes”) can be created in cases where multiple services are
typically performed together for certain types of appointments or encounters. The single SIM
Group code, which includes all of the individual SIM codes, is entered during charge posting in
NextGen® EPM or selected in the procedures module in NextGen® EHR. The single group code
explodes out to the individual charges, therefore saving data entry time.
To create a SIM Group, right-click on the Service Item Library and select SIM Groups from the
menu.
SIM Group:
Enter a code for the SIM group being defined. This is the code that will be selected by end users.
Description:
Enter a description for the SIM group being defined.
Service Item #:
From the yellow folder, select the individual SIM codes from the left side and move them to the
right side by use of the blue arrows.
The following SIM code parameters default from the SIM Library for each code included in the
group: SIM / Description / Form
Quantity defaults to 1 and can be changed by right-clicking on a SIM code and selecting either
“Increase Quantity” or “Decrease Quantity”.
377
NextGen Healthcare
SIM Pricing Regions
SIM Pricing Regions are used by clients that have enabled “Advanced SIM Library Mode” in
Enterprise Preferences > Libraries tab.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Advanced Service Item Library Mode should not be enabled in
Enterprise Preferences without fully understanding all of the related maintenance and
functionality involved. Once it has been enabled, it cannot be disabled.
Advanced SIM Library Mode provides the ability to set prices based on how various payers
divide the country into geographical regions. Clients are able to configure their Locations into
SIM Pricing Regions for the appropriate payers. Each pricing region is assigned a different SIM
Library with prices that are specific to that region and payer. The SIM Pricing Region is then
linked to the appropriate payer(s).
Example 1:
A client has practices/locations across the country and they want to charge Medicare patients
a price that is equal to Medicare’s fee schedule. Medicare’s fee schedule varies in different
parts of the country. Therefore, Medicare patients seen in a location in the western part of
the country are to be charged one amount, and Medicare patients seen in a location in the
southern part of the country are to be charged a different amount. This can be accomplished
by creating multiple SIM Pricing Regions for Medicare. Each region would include the
appropriate locations, and each region would use a different SIM Library that is setup with
Medicare prices specific to the region.
Example 2:
A client’s practice and locations are all within a single geographic area (eg: Colorado)
and they want to charge Medicare patients a price that is equal to Medicare’s fee
schedule. This can be accomplished by creating a single SIM Pricing Region for
Medicare that includes all locations, and the region would use a SIM Library that is
setup with Medicare prices.
NOTE: Setup of this library and training on Advanced SIM Library Mode may be covered in a
separate WebEx training session.
378
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
SIM Pricing Template
SIM Pricing Templates are used by clients that have enabled “Advanced SIM Library Mode” in
Enterprise Preferences > Libraries tab.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Advanced Service Item Library Mode should not be enabled in
Enterprise Preferences without fully understanding all of the related maintenance and
functionality involved. Once it has been enabled, it cannot be disabled.
Advanced SIM Library Mode provides the ability to set prices based on how various payers
divide the country into geographical regions. Clients are able to configure their Locations into
SIM Pricing Regions for the appropriate payers. Each pricing region is then assigned a different
SIM Library with prices that are specific to that region and payer.
SIM Pricing Templates allow users to manage and update prices in the various payer specific
SIM Libraries by use of “pricing configurations”.
NOTE: Setup of this library and training on Advanced SIM Library Mode may be covered in a
separate WebEx training session.
379
NextGen Healthcare
Statement
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Statements – Setting Up Statements
Statements – Setting Up Payer Specific Dunning Messages
The Statement Library used for payer/financial class dunning messages on statements in
NextGen® EPM. Statement Messages are first created in the Statement Messages table. They
are based on the age of outstanding insurance balances. Once created, the messages are linked
to a Statement Library. The library is then linked to Financial Classes in the Statement
Parameter Mappings table. Additional payer-specific libraries can be created and attached to
those Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab > Libraries sub-tab.
NOTE: Setup of this library and training on Statements will be covered during Advanced Training.
380
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Submitter Profiles
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Submitter Profiles
Submitter Profiles are used in NextGen® EPM when creating 837 electronic claim files. A
separate library will need to be created for each clearinghouse and/or direct payer for which
electronic claim files will be created.
The Submitter Profile Library is attached to Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab > Claims
sub-tab.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to pre-load a generic Default submitter
profile and/or profiles for Gateway, Navicure, ViaTrack, and NextGen-EDI (dental only)
clearinghouses. Profiles for other clearinghouses and/or payers are available from your
NextGen EDI/Claims Analyst.
Common Options Tab
Submitter Profile Library:
Enter a name for the profile being defined.
ANSI X12 Version:
Select Version 5010.
Setting:
For each option listed in the left column, select the appropriate
setting in the right column as indicated in the Submitter Profile
document provided by your NextGen® EPM Implementation
Specialist and/or EDI/Claims Analyst.
Default to Payers:
This button allows the Submitter Profile library being defined to
be attached to all payers within a specified Financial Class.
381
NextGen Healthcare
Exception Options Tab
Setting:
For each option listed in the left column, select the appropriate setting in the right
column as indicated in the Submitter Profile document provided by your
NextGen® EPM Implementation Specialist and/or EDI/Claims Analyst.
Real Time Adjudication Tab
This is used with the NextGen® RTS (Real-Time Transaction Server) module for real-time claim
adjudication requests.
NOTE: Setup and training for the RTS module will be covered in a separate training session by a
NextGen RTS representative.
382
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Tax Exemption
The Tax Exemptions Library can be used to define tax exemption criteria by State and/or by Location.
Once created, the Tax Exemption library is attached in Practice Preferences > Taxes tab.
State Tab
Payers within a specific Financial Class can be defined as always tax exempt for a selected State.
Specific SIM Codes can also be defined for a selected State as always tax exempt, or tax exempt
only if an “Rx on File” indicator is associated to the charge.
Example: In the state of PA, all services for payers in the BCBS Financial Class are always tax
exempt. For all other payers, SIM code L0484 is always tax exempt regardless of the “Rx on File”
indicator on the charge.
State:
Select the State for the exemptions being defined.
Financial Class that are always Tax Exempt:
If applicable, select one or more Financial Classes for the State. All payers within the selected
Financial Classes will always be tax exempt for the State.
SIM Tax Exemption Status:
This section can be used to define tax exemptions for specific SIM codes for the State. To define
a tax exemption status for a specific SIM code, do the following:



Click the Open Menu button and select New from the menu.
In the SIM Code Search window, select the SIM code to be defined as tax exempt.
Enter an Effective Date and Expiration Date for the SIM exemption.
383
NextGen Healthcare

Select one of the following columns:
Always Exempt:
Select this column if the SIM code is always tax exempt in the selected State regardless
of whether or not there is an “Rx on File” indicator on the charge.
Exempt if Rx on File:
Select this column if the SIM code is tax exempt in the selected State only if there is an
“Rx on File” indicator on the charge.
Location Tab
Specific SIM codes can be defined for a selected Location to be exempt from one or more of the
four different types of taxes (eg: State, County, City, Local).
Example: SIM code L0140 is exempt from Tax 3 and Tax 4 (eg: City and Local) when the
Location on the charge is either Eastside Medical Clinic or Northside Medical Clinic, and exempt
from Tax 1 and Tax 2 (eg: State and County) when the Location on the charge is either Southside
Medical Clinic or Westside Medical Clinic.
To define Location specific exemptions for one or more SIM codes, do the following:







384
Click on the Location tab.
Click the Open Menu button and select New from the menu.
The Tax Exempt SIMs Setup window displays.
Select the SIM code to be defined as tax exempt.
Enter an Effective Date and Expiration Date for the SIM exemption.
Select one or more Locations for the SIM exemption.
Select one or more of the Tax 1 – Tax 4 Exempt columns for the SIM exemption.
(eg: Tax 1 = State / Tax2 = County / Tax3 = City / Tax4 = Local)
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Tax Rate
The Tax Rate Library is used to add taxes to charges in EPM. The library can be defined to add
one or more taxes only on encounters with specific payers or only on self-pay encounters. It can
also be defined to add taxes only to specific SIM codes.
A default Tax Rate Library is attached in Practice Preferences > Taxes tab to be used for all
locations. Additional location specific libraries can be created and attached to those Locations in
the Locations table > Defaults-2 tab.
NOTE: A unique CPT4 code must first be created in the CPT4 Codes table for each type
of sales tax to be charged. The CPT4 codes are then added as SIM codes to the Service
Items Library with a $0.00 price.
385
NextGen Healthcare
Tax Rate Description:
Enter a Description for the tax rate being defined.
Eff /Exp Dates:
Enter Effective and Expiration Dates for the tax rate being defined.
Tax Line SIM / Tax Rate Percent:
Select the SIM Code to be used as the primary tax and enter the corresponding Tax Rate Percent
(up to 3 decimal places). The tax amount calculated on charges will be as follows:
[Charge Amount X Tax Rate Percent = Tax Amount]
386
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Additional Tax Lines 2-4 SIM / Tax Rate Percent:
Select up to three additional SIM Codes to be used for other taxes and enter the corresponding
Tax Rate Percent for each (up to 3 decimal places).
Apply Tax Rate from Local:
Do not select this check-box if the Tax Rate Percent defined for each SIM code is to be used to
calculate the taxes on charges.
Select this check-box if the Tax Rate Percent defined for each SIM code is not to be used to
calculate the taxes on charges. The Tax Rate Percent defined in the Locality Tax Rate master
file will be used instead.
NOTE: The Tax Rate Percent fields become unavailable when this option is selected.
Valid Payers:
From the yellow folder, select the Payers to which the tax rate applies.
Include ALL data not equal to selected records:
Select this check-box to exclude the payers selected above from the tax rate. The tax
rate will then apply to all other payers.
Include Self-pay Encounters/Invoices:
Select this check-box if the tax rate applies to self-pay encounters and invoices.
Apply Tax Rate at Encounter/Invoice Level:
Select this option if each type of tax should be added once for the entire
encounter/invoice.
NOTE: If the “Enable Advanced Service Item Library Mode” option has been
enabled in Enterprise Preferences > Libraries tab, this option becomes disabled
in the Tax Rate Library. All taxes will be applied at line item level.
Apply Tax Rate at Line Item Level:
Select this option if each type of tax should be added to each line item/charge on the
encounter/invoice.
Valid Service Items:
From the yellow folder, select the SIM Codes to which the tax rate applies.
Include ALL data not equal to selected records:
Select this check-box to exclude the SIM codes selected above from the tax rate. The tax rate
will then apply to all other SIM codes.
387
NextGen Healthcare
Types of Service
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Types of Service
The Types of Service Library is used only for payers that require one or more Type of Service
codes on paper and/or electronic claims that are different from the standard codes listed below.
The library is attached to Payers in the Payers table > Practice Tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Type of Service
Alt. Method Dialysis Payment
Anesthesia
ASC Facility
Blood Charges
Consultation
CRD Equipment
Diagnostic Lab
Diagnostic X-Ray
DME Purchase
DME Rental
Medical Care
Other (eg: prescription drugs)
Other Medical
Pneumonia Vaccine
Pre-Admission Testing
Radiation Therapy
Renal Supplies in the House
Second Surgical Opinion
Surgery
Surgical Assistance
Third Surgical Opinion
Used DME
388
Standard
Code
15
07
13
10
03
16
05
04
12
18
01
99
09
19
17
06
14
20
02
08
21
11
Alternate
Code
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contracts
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
EPM Setting Up Libraries
Libraries – Contracts
The Contracts Library is commonly used in NextGen® EPM to:

Streamline payment entry by defaulting the payer’s allowed, payment and adjustment
amounts

Automatically adjust charges during charge posting so that A/R reflects expected
reimbursement

Track expected vs. actual reimbursement with the Contractual Analysis report

Define requirements for specific CPT4 codes. For example: authorization required, referring
provider required, co-pay amount, diagnosis code required, modifier required, etc.
NextGen® Contract Utility
The Contract Utility is a separate application that can be used to update fee schedules for
existing contracts in File Maintenance by use of a Microsoft® Excel workbook. The utility can
also be used to create new contracts, links contracts to payers, and select participating providers
for contracts.
Clients running NextGen® version 5.5 or higher can download the Contract Utility and the User
Guide from the following website: http://www.ncslive.com.
NOTE: The Contract Utility will be covered during a separate WebEx training session.
389
NextGen Healthcare
General Tab
Contract Name:
Enter a name for the contract.
Effective/Expiration Dates:
The dates entered are used in determining whether or not to apply the contract’s rules to a
particular date of service for the patient. The contract’s Fee Schedule tab also has effective and
expiration dates specified for each CPT4 code. Those dates must fall within the
effective/expiration dates defined here.
Co-Payment on Office Enc’s (Encounters):
Displays the following prompt to users when the Co-Payment field is left blank on the Insurance
Maintenance window:
“The copay field is a required entry for this contract. Are you sure you want to leave this
screen? Yes/No”
Default Co-Pay Amount:
Defaults the amount indicated into the Co-Pay Amount field on the Insurance Maintenance
window. This can be used if all patients that have an insurance associated to this contract have
the same co-pay amount.
NOTE: This feature only works if the “Enable practice payer specific information” option
in Practice Preferences is not selected.
Deductible in Effect:
Displays the following prompt to users when the Deductible field is left blank on the Insurance
Maintenance window:
“The deductible field is a required entry for this contract. Are you sure you want to leave
this screen? Yes/No”
390
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Referring Physician Required:
Displays the following contract edit alert to users on the Charge Posting window for any CPT4
code entered:
“Referring Physician is required for this procedure”
Enable Build Level Edits:
Generates a claim edit failure on the Claim Production Status Report during the billing process
and stops a claim from being created if an encounter is missing any of the criteria defined within
the contract.
Enable Drug Allowed Amounts:
Enables allowed amounts for each CPT4 code to be entered with three decimal places on the
contract’s Fee Schedule tab. ($0.000)
Contract Subgroup 1 and 2:
A contract can be linked to one or two Contract Subgroupings which are defined in File
Maintenance / Master Lists and used to associate providers and contracts together. Providers
linked to the same subgroup(s) in the Providers table can easily be assigned or unassigned as
participating providers for the contract.
Authorization Required:
Displays the following contract edit alert to users on the Charge Posting window for any CPT4
code entered:
“Authorization is required for this procedure”
Prorate Insurance Balance:
Charge balances on an encounter will be prorated in the Balance Control window between the
primary and secondary insurances (or between the primary insurance and the patient if no
secondary insurance exists). The prorated amount is based on the fee for service percentage
defined in the contract’s fee schedule.
NOTE: The “Prorate insurance balance” option must also be selected for the Payer on
the Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Create Zero Dollar Claim:
Enables $0.00 charges to be included and billed on insurance claim forms. Unless this option is
selected, the application does not normally include $0.00 charges on claims.
Apply Co-Pay to All Line Items:
Enables multiple charges on a single encounter to have a co-pay applied if the Co-Pay Amount or
Co-Pay % has been defined for each CPT4 code in the contract’s fee schedule. Unless this
option is selected, the application applies a co-payment only to the first charge entered on an
encounter, regardless of the CPT4 code entered
Co-Pay Origin:
Determines if the Co-Pay% indicated in the contract’s fee schedule should be based on the
Allowed Amount or the Reimbursed Amount defined for each CPT4 code.
NOTE: The “Co-pay percent calc” option within the Payers table in File Maintenance
must also be selected.
Multiply Fee Schedule Co-Pay by Quantity
The copay amount indicated for a CPT4 code on the Fee Schedule tab of the contract will be
multiplied by the quantity entered during charge posting.
391
NextGen Healthcare
Fee for Service:
Defaults “FFS” into the Type field for each CPT4 code added to the contract’s fee schedule.
% of Allowed Amount for Participants / Non-Participants:
The percentage defined here will be multiplied by the price from the SIM Library for any CPT4
code not defined in the contract’s fee schedule. The multiplied value will default onto the
Payment Entry window as the expected payment amount.
Fully Capitated / Produce Claim for Documentation:
Charges for CPT4 codes not defined in the contract’s fee schedule will be adjusted to a balance
of $0.00 on the Payment Entry window. The adjustment amount is equal to the price from the
SIM Library. The adjustment code used is the Default Adjustment code from the Payers table.
Also defaults “Capitated” into the Type field for each CPT4 code added to the contract’s fee
schedule.
Automatically Adjust Charges:
Charges will be adjusted at the time of entry on the Charge Posting window. The adjustment
amount is calculated as the difference between the price from the SIM Library and the allowed
amount from the contract’s fee schedule.
[Charge - Allowed = Adjustment]
Adjustable Allowed Amount:
Charges will be adjusted at the time of entry on the Charge Posting window. The adjustment
amount is calculated as the difference between the price from the SIM Library and the reimbursed
amount from the contract’s fee schedule plus the patient’s co-pay amount.
[Charge - (Reimbursed + Co-Pay) = Adjustment]
Default Auto-Adj Transaction:
Required entry if the “Automatically Adjust Charges” option is selected. Enter the third party
adjustment Transaction Code to be used when charges are adjusted at the time of entry on the
Charge Posting window.
Allow Positive Adjustments:
Charges will be adjusted at the time of entry on the Charge Posting window. If the price from the
SIM Library is less than the allowed amount from the contract’s fee schedule, a positive
adjustment will be added to bring the balance of the charge up to the allowed amount.
If Rendering Not Entered Assume Participating:
If the Rendering field is left blank on the Encounter Maintenance window (and therefore is also
left blank on the Charge Posting window) the system will assume that the “no rendering” is a
participating provider and the adjustment amount will be calculated accordingly.
392
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Fee Schedule Tab
CPT4:
Enter the CPT4 code to be added to the fee schedule.
Effective Date:
Enter the date the allowed amount takes effect for the CPT4 code. The default is from the
Effective Date defined on the contract’s General Tab and can be overridden.
Expiration Date:
Enter the date the allowed amount ends being in effect for the CPT4 code. The default is the
Expiration Date defined on the contract’s General Tab and can be overridden.
Type:
Enter FFS (fee for service) for the CPT4 code. The default is FFS or Capitated depending on
which option was selected on the contract’s General Tab.
NOTE: If Capitated is selected, the CPT4 will be adjusted during Payment Entry. The
adjustment amount is equal to the Reimbursed amount defined for the CPT4 in the
contract. The adjustment code used is the Default Adjustment code from the Payers
table.
Multiple Proc Discounting:
Select the appropriate option for the CPT4 code.
No: The allowed amount for the CPT4 will not be reduced.
Multiple Surg: The allowed amount for the CPT4 code will be reduced based on the
order/sequence of the charge on the encounter. The allowed amount is reduced to the
percentage defined on the Multiple Procedure Discounting tab.
Endoscopy: The allowed amount for the CPT4 code will be reduced. The allowed
amount is reduced to the difference between the allowed defined for the CPT4 and the
allowed defined for the “Base CPT4 Code”.
393
NextGen Healthcare
Base CPT4 Code:
Select the “Base Code” for the endoscopy CPT4 code.
NOTE: This field is required if “Endoscopy” was selected in the “Multiple Proc
Discounting” field.
Non-Facility / Facility:
Allows for differences in allowed and reimbursed amounts depending on where a service is
performed. (eg: Office = Non-Facility and Inpatient Hospital = Facility)
% of Chg:
Select this column (green check) if the allowed amount for the CPT4 code is to be a percentage
of the charge amount from the SIM Library.
NOTE: When this column is selected, the Allowed field becomes a % amount, not a $
amount and the Participating/Non-Participating Reimbursed fields become unavailable.
Non-Facility Allowed
Enter the non-facility allowed amount for the CPT4 code. An adjustment will be made to the
charge if the non-facility price from the SIM Library and the non-facility allowed amount from the
contract’s fee schedule are not the same.
NOTE: The charge will be adjusted at the time of entry on the Charge Posting window if
the “Automatically Adjust Charges” option is selected on the contract’s General Tab.
Otherwise, the charge will be adjusted during Payment Entry.
Facility Allowed
Enter the allowed amount for the CPT4 code. An adjustment will be made to the charge if the
price from the SIM Library and the facility allowed amount from the contract’s fee schedule are
not the same.
NOTE: The charge will be adjusted at the time of entry on the Charge Posting window if
the “Automatically Adjust Charges” option is selected on the contract’s General Tab.
Otherwise, the charge will be adjusted during Payment Entry.
Participating %:
Enter the percentage of the allowed amount that is expected as reimbursement for a participating
provider. The Participating Reimbursed amount will be calculated from the percentage entered.
Participating Reimbursed:
Enter the reimbursement amount that is expected for a participating provider. The Participating
% will be calculated from the amount entered.
Non-Participating %:
Enter the percentage of the allowed amount that is expected as reimbursement for a nonparticipating provider. The Non-Participating Reimbursed amount will default to $0.00 as an entry
is not required in both fields.
Non-Participating Reimbursed:
Enter the reimbursement amount that is expected for a non-participating provider. The NonParticipating % will default to $0.00 as an entry is not required in both fields.
394
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Auth Req:
Select this option if an authorization is required for the CPT4 code. The following contract edit alert
will display to users on the Charge Posting window:
“Authorization is required for this procedure”.
NOTE: This will override the “Authorization Required” option setting on the General Tab.
Refer Req:
Select this option if a referring physician is required for the CPT4 code. The following contract
edit alert will display to users on the Charge Posting window:
“Referring Physician is required for this procedure”.
NOTE: This will override the “Referring Physician Required” option setting on the General Tab.
Co-Pay √ :
Select this option if a co-payment should be applied to the CPT4 code. The co-pay applied will
be the amount defined in the Default Co-Pay Amount field on the contract’s General Tab. If no
co-pay amount is defined on the contract’s General Tab, the co-pay applied will be the amount
entered in the Co-Pay Amount field on the patient’s Insurance Maintenance window.
Co-Pay %:
If the co-payment to be applied to the CPT4 code should be calculated as a percentage of the
allowed amount defined in the contract’s fee schedule, enter the percentage here.
NOTE: This percentage co-payment will override both the “Default Co-Pay Amount”
defined on the contract’s General Tab and the Co-Pay Amount defined on the patient’s
Insurance Maintenance window.
Co-Pay Amount:
If the co-payment to be applied to the CPT4 code should be a specific dollar amount, enter the
amount here.
NOTE: This co-payment amount will override both the “Default Co-Pay Amount” defined
on the contract’s General Tab and the Co-Pay Amount defined on the patient’s Insurance
Maintenance window.
Required Diagnoses:
If the payer requires that a specific diagnosis code be associated to this CPT4 code, add the
ICD9(s) here. The following contract edit alert displays to users on the Charge Posting window if
a required ICD9 code is not entered:
“Warning: The contract requires the primary diagnosis code to be one of the following
diagnosis code(s): code1, code2, code3, etc.”
Required Modifiers:
If the payer requires that a specific modifier be associated to this CPT4 code, add the modifier(s)
here. The following contract edit alert displays to users on the Charge Posting window if a
required modifier is not entered:
“Warning: According to the contract the following modifier code(s) are required for this
procedure: code1, code2, code3, etc.”
395
NextGen Healthcare
Modifier Reimbursement Tab
This tab can be used if the payer reduces the allowed amount defined for CPT4 codes on the Fee
Schedule tab to a certain percentage when a specific modifier or modifier combination is used on the
charge.
Modifier(s):
Enter a specific modifier or modifier combination.
Percentage of Allowed:
Enter the percentage the allowed amount should be reduced to when the specified modifier or
modifier combination is used on a charge.
Example: Modifier 80 (Assistant Surgeon) will reduce the allowed amount to 50%
396
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Multiple Procedure Discounting Tab
This tab can be used if the payer reduces the allowed amount defined for CPT4 codes on the Fee
Schedule tab to a certain percentage when those codes are setup as a “Multiple Surg”. The allowed
amount is reduced based on the charge order/sequence on the encounter.
Sequence:
Defaults a number as follows and cannot be changed:
First entry =
1
Second entry = 2
Etc.
Percentage of Allowed:
Enter the percentage the allowed amount should be reduced to when the charge falls into the
defined order/sequence on the encounter.
Example:
First charge:
The allowed amount will remain at 100%
Second charge:
The allowed amount will be reduced to 75%
Third or more charges: The allowed amount will be reduced to 50%
397
NextGen Healthcare
Link Contract to Payer(s) and Providers
The contract is attached to the appropriate payer(s) on the Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab and
the rendering providers that participate with the payer’s contract are selected.
Managed Care Contract:
Select the contract for the payer.
Participating Providers:
Select the rendering providers that participate with the payer’s contract. Providers that are not
selected are considered non-participating providers.
398
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
The following fields display only if a Managed Care Contract has been selected for the payer.
Prorate insurance balance:
Select this check-box if charge balances on an encounter are to be prorated in the Balance
Control window between the primary and secondary insurances (or between the primary
insurance and the patient if no secondary insurance exists). The prorated amount is based on
the fee for service percentage defined in the contract’s fee schedule.
NOTE: The “Prorate insurance balance” option must also be selected on the Contract >
General tab.
Transfer non-participating charges to patient:
Select this check-box to transfer the charge balances from primary insurance to the patient in the
Balance Control when a non-participating provider is selected as the rendering.
NOTE: The “Prorate insurance balance” option must be selected on the Contract >
General tab and on the Payer > Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Default non-participating provider’s accept assignment to no:
Select this check-box to set the “Assignment of Benefits” to No for the encounter when a nonparticipating provider is selected as the rendering. Assignment of Benefits is found on the Chart
> Encounters tab > Insurance sub-tab > Verification section.
399
NextGen Healthcare
Contract Exceptions
Contract Exceptions allow differences from the standard contract for allowed amounts,
reimbursed amounts, etc. to be defined. The differences can be based on any of the following:
Provider
Provider/Location
Provider/Location/Payer
Example
Dr. Jones
Dr. Jones at Westminster Office
Dr. Jones at Westminster Office for Medicare
To create a Contract Exception, right-click on the contract and select Contract Exceptions from
the menu.
The Contract Exception Maintenance window displays.
Contract Exception Name:
Enter a name for the exception being defined.
Type the first number(s) of the CPT4 item you want to locate:
Enter the first few digits of the CPT4(s) that need to have exception parameters defined.
400
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
CPT4 / Effective / Expiration / Auth Req / Refer Req:
These parameters default from the original contract setup and cannot be modified.
Non-Facility / Facility:
Define the following exceptions parameters for each CPT4 code as needed.
Allowed
Participating % and Reimbursed
Non-Participating % and Reimbursed
Authorization Required
Referring Provider Required
Co-Pay % and Amount
Example: Medicare Contract Exception for Mid-Level Providers
401
NextGen Healthcare
Link Contract Exception to Provider(s)
Once a Contract Exceptions has been created, it is linked to the appropriate rendering providers
in the Providers table > Practice tab > Group Information section.
In the below example, the Mid-Level Contract Exception is being linked to Lisa Banks, NP at all
locations for Medicare.
402
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contract Global Update
The Contract Global Update is a utility that can be used to update the Non-Facility / Facility
allowed amounts and reimbursement amounts within an existing contract. The utility uses the
RVU Library and GPCI Codes Library (optional) in the calculation of the new
allowed/reimbursement amounts.
The utility can be accessed by right-clicking on the contract and selecting Contract Global Update
from the menu.
To access the Contract Global Update, right-click on the contract and select Contract Global
Update from the menu.
The Contract Global Update window displays.
403
NextGen Healthcare
Filter Criteria
CPT4:
Starting CPT4 code in the contract to be updated with new fees
Thru CPT4:
Ending CPT4 code in the contract to be updated with new fees
Effective Date:
Enter an Effective Date for the selected CPT4 codes
NOTE: Only CPT4 codes in effect on the date specified will be updated.
Calculate Using RVU * GPCI
RVU Library:
Select the RVU Library to be used in the fee update calculation
GPCI Library:
Select the GPCI Library to be used in the fee update calculation, if applicable
Carrier/Locality:
Select the Carrier/Locality from the GPCI Library to be used in the fee update calculation,
if applicable
RVU / GPCI Calculation:
Create the fee update calculation to be used
Conversion Factor:
The conversion factor entered here will be multiplied by the total from the calculation
defined above
Anesthesia Conversion Factor:
The anesthesia conversion factor entered here, if applicable, will be multiplied by the total
from the calculation defined above
Set the New Allowed Amount to (n) % of the Calculated Payment:
The percentage entered here will be multiplied by the total from the calculation defined
above. This will become the new allowed amount in the contract for the selected CPT4
codes.
Set the New Participating Reimbursement to (n) % of the New Allowed Amount
The percentage entered here will be multiple by the new allowed amount. This will
become the expected reimbursement amount in the contract for participating providers
for the selected CPT4 codes.
Determine the New Non-Participating Allowed Amount to (n) % of the New Allowed
Amount
The percentage entered here will be multiple by the new allowed amount. This will
become the allowed amount for non-participating providers for the selected CPT4 codes.
Set the New Non-Participating reimbursement Amount to (n) % of the determined
non-participating allowed amounts:
The percentage entered here will be multiple by the non-participating allowed amount.
This will become the expected reimbursement amount in the contract for nonparticipating providers for the selected CPT4 codes.
404
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Other Values
Keep Existing Values for Old Fee Schedules:
Select this check-box to retain the current settings on the Fee Schedule tab in the
contract for the selected CPT4 codes. The settings include:
 Auth Req
Authorization Required
 Refer Req
Referring Provider Required
 √
Co-Pay Indicator
 Co-Pay %
Co-Pay Percentage
 Co-Pay Amount
Co-Pay Dollar Amount
Do not select this check-box if it is desired to change the current setting on the Fee
Schedule tab in the contract for the selected codes. The settings that can be changed
include:
Type:
Select FFS (Fee for Service) or Capitated
Auth Required:
Select this checkbox to activate Auth Req for the selected codes
Referral Required:
Select this checkbox to activate Refer Req for the selected codes
CoPay:
Select this checkbox to activate the Co-Pay Indicator ( √ ) for the selected codes
%:
If the co-pay for the selected codes should be a percentage of
the allowed amount, enter the percentage here.
$:
If the co-pay for the selected codes should be a specific dollar
amount, enter the amount here.
Update the Non Facility:
Select this option to update the Non-Facility fee row in the contract for the selected codes
Update the Facility:
Select this option to update the Facility fee row in the contract for the codes selected codes
Expire Old, and create new row in contract:
Select this option to expire the existing fee row and create a new fee row for the selected codes
Update the existing row in the contract:
Select this option to update the existing fee row for the selected codes
Effective Date:
Enter the Effective Date for the fee row
Expiration Date:
Enter the Expiration Date for the fee row
405
NextGen Healthcare
Contracts for Encounter Rate Billing
Depending on the setup and configuration of the Encounter Rate Library for a payer, a Contract
might be used to automatically adjust charges.
NOTE: Because the Encounter Rate Library can be configured to automatically adjust
charges during the billing process, a Contract to auto-adjust charges during charge
posting will typically not be needed.
Example Scenario:
The Encounter Rate Library for a payer has been configured to insert an ER SIM onto the
encounter as an additional charge. The library is configured to include only the ER SIM code and
none of the original charges on claims for the payer. The library is also configured to not autoadjust the original charges that will not be reimbursed by the payer. In this scenario, a contract
may be appropriate to auto-adjust the original charges.
If a Contract will be used to auto-adjust charges for a payer instead of using the Encounter Rate
Library for auto-adjustments, the contract may typically be setup in one of the following ways:

Contract with 80% Adjustment and 20% Co-Pay
Adjusts off 80% of each charge as it is entered, leaving a balance of 20% to be billed to a
secondary payer as co-insurance or to the patient as co-pay.

Contract with 100% Adjustment
Adjusts off 100% of each charge as it is entered, leaving a balance of $0.00.
406
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contract with 80% Adjustment and 20% Co-Pay
The below Contract setup will adjust off 80% of each charge as it is entered, leaving a balance of
20% to be billed to a secondary payer as co-insurance or to the patient as co-pay.
File Maintenance > Libraries > Contracts
Contract Library Maintenance > General Tab
Define the contract General tab parameters as follows:
Create Zero Dollar Claim:
Select this check-box
Apply Co-Pay to al Line Items:
Select this check-box
NOTE: This ensures that the 20% balance will move to the secondary insurance
or patient for all charges entered. Otherwise, the 20% balance would move to
secondary or patient on the first charge only.
Multiply Fee Schedule Co-Pay by Quantity:
Select this check-box
Automatically adjust charges:
Select this check-box
Default Auto-Adj Transaction:
Select the adjustment transaction code to be used
NOTE: This should be a unique code created specifically for the payer’s contract
encounter rate adjustments.
407
NextGen Healthcare
Contract with 80% Adjustment and 20% Co-Pay (continued)
Contract Library Maintenance > Fee Schedule Tab
Define the contract Fee Schedule tab parameters as follows for every CPT4 code that is to have
an 80% auto-adjustment applied leaving a 20% balance.
Do not include the Encounter Rate CPT4 code(s) or carve-out CPT4 codes in the below setup.
These codes should not have adjustments applied.
CPT4:
applied
Select a CPT4 code that is to have an 80% adjustment
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter the appropriate date range for the CPT4 code
Type:
Select FFS
Multiple Proc Discounting:
Select No
Allowed:
Enter $0.00
NOTE: The difference between the charge amount (SIM Library) and the
allowed amount (Contract) will be the adjustment amount. An allowed amount of
$0.00 ensures the entire charge amount will be adjusted off during charge
posting, except for the 20% co-pay amount.
408
Participating Reimbursed:
Enter 0% / $0.00
Co-Pay:
Select the Co-Pay check-box and enter the amount as
20% of the charge amount from the SIM Library
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contract with 80% Adjustment and 20% Co-Pay (continued)
File Maintenance > EPM System Master Files > Payers
Practice Tab > Other Sub-Tab
Accept financial responsibility of primary copay amt:
Select this check-box for all payers that may be secondary to the 80/20 encounter rate
payer. If not selected, the 20% balance defined in the contract will skip the secondary
payer and move the balance directly to the patient.
409
NextGen Healthcare
Contract with 80% Adjustment and 20% Co-Pay (continued)
Example Charge Posting:


410
Three charges are entered on the encounter, 99213, 71010 and 76090
All three CPT4 codes are defined in the contract to adjust off 80% of the charge amount with
the remaining 20% to go to secondary or patient responsibility
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contract with 100% Adjustment
The below Contract setup will adjust off 100% of each charge as it is entered, leaving a balance of $0.00.
File Maintenance > Libraries > Contracts
Contract Library Maintenance > General Tab
Define the contract General tab parameters as follows:
Create Zero Dollar Claim:
Select this check-box
NOTE: If not selected, encounters will go to history status after the charges have
been adjusted to $0.00 and the encounter rate SIM code will not be inserted
during the billing process.
Automatically adjust charges:
Select this check-box
Default Auto-Adj Transaction:
Select the adjustment transaction code to be used
NOTE: This should be a unique code created specifically for the payer’s contract
encounter rate adjustments.
411
NextGen Healthcare
Contract with 100% Adjustment (continued)
Contract Library Maintenance > Fee Schedule Tab
Define the contract Fee Schedule tab parameters as follows for every CPT4 code that is to have
a 100% auto-adjustment applied leaving a $0.00 balance.
Do not include the Encounter Rate CPT4 code(s) or carve-out CPT4 codes in the below setup.
These codes should not have adjustments applied.
CPT4:
applied
Select a CPT4 code that is to have a 100% adjustment
Effective/Expiration Dates:
Enter the appropriate date range for the CPT4 code
Type:
Select FFS
Multiple Proc Discounting:
Select No
Allowed:
Enter $0.00
NOTE: The difference between the charge amount (SIM Library) and the
allowed amount (Contract) will be the adjustment amount. An allowed amount of
$0.00 ensures the entire charge amount will be adjusted off during charge
posting.
Participating Reimbursed:
412
Enter 0% / $0.00
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contract with 100% Adjustment (continued)
Example Charge Posting:


Three charges are entered on the encounter, 99213, 71010 and 76090
All three CPT4 codes are defined in the contract to adjust off 100% of the charge amount
413
NextGen Healthcare
Preferences
“Best Practice” recommended settings for Enterprise and Practice Preferences for a typical client
implementation are preset in the base installation of the NextGen application.
Over the course of your implementation, your NextGen® EPM and/or EHR Implementation
Specialists will work with you to understand and modify these settings as needed to suit the
individual business needs of your organization.
Enterprise Preferences:
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Enterprise Preferences
Setting Up Enterprise Preferences
These preference settings will affect all practices within the enterprise. Enterprise
Preferences can be accessed from:


File Maintenance > System Master Files > Enterprises > Preferences button
EPM > Admin > Preferences > Enterprise menu option
Practice Preferences:
eLearning Curriculum:
Setting Up Practice Preferences
These preference settings will affect only the current practice. Therefore, settings can be
different for each practice within the enterprise. Practice Preferences can be accessed from:


File Maintenance > System Master Files > Practices > Preferences button
EPM > Admin > Preferences > Practice menu option
NOTE: A “Practice Preferences Questionnaire” is available from your NextGen® EPM
Project Manager/Coordinator or Implementation Specialist. The questionnaire briefly
describes each selection within Practice Preferences and can be completed and used by
clients to better understand their available options.
User Preferences:
These preference settings will affect only specific users. User Preferences can be created in
File Maintenance from:

EPM Practice Master Files > Default User Prefs – General / Scheduling
User Preferences created in File Maintenance are attached to groups of users or
individual users within System Administrator.
Individual users can also access and maintain their own User Preferences from:

414
EPM > Admin > Preferences > User menu option
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Enterprise Preferences
General Tab
Provider Subgrouping 1 & 2:
Provider Subgroupings are used to group providers for reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM.
They are created in Master Lists > Provider Subgroupings and are then linked in the Providers
table > System tab.
Enter labels for the two fields as they should appear on the Providers > System tab. The labels
also appear on report filters and columns in EPM.
Reason Code Subgrouping1 & 2:
Reason Code Subgroupings are used to group reason codes used during payment entry for
reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM. They are created in Master Lists > Reason Code
Subgroupings and are then linked in the Reason Codes library.
Enter labels for the two fields as they should appear in the Reason Codes library. The labels also
appear on report filters and columns in EPM.
Location Subgrouping1 & 2:
Location Subgroupings are used to group locations for reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM.
They are created in Master Lists > Location Subgroupings and are then linked in the Locations
table > Location Defaults tab.
Enter labels for the two fields as they should appear on the Locations > Location Defaults tab.
The labels also appear on report filters and columns in EPM.
415
NextGen Healthcare
Payer Subgrouping1 & 2:
Payer Subgroupings are used to group payers for reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM. They
are created in Master Lists > Payer Subgroupings and are then linked in the Payers table >
Defaults-2 tab.
Enter labels for the two fields as they should appear on the Payers > Defaults-2 tab. The labels
also appear on report filters and columns in EPM.
Contract Subgrouping1 & 2:
Contract Subgroupings are a way to group contracts. They are used to link/unlink participating
providers to those groups of contracts. They are created in Master Lists > Contract
Subgroupings and are then linked in the Contracts library > General tab.
Enter labels for the two fields as they should appear on the Contracts > General tab.
Diagnosis Subgrouping1 & 2:
Diagnosis Subgroupings are used to group ICD codes used during charge posting for reporting
purposes in NextGen® EPM. They are created in Master Lists > Diagnosis Subgroupings and
are then linked in the Diagnosis Codes library.
Enter labels for the two fields as they should appear in the Diagnosis Codes library. The labels
also appear on report filters and columns in EPM.
Task Subgrouping1 & 2:
Task Subgroupings are used to group task types for reporting purposes in NextGen® EPM. They
are created in Master Lists > Task Subgroupings and are then linked in the Task Types table.
Enter labels for the two fields as they should appear in the Task Types table. The labels also
appear on report filters and columns in EPM.
Maximum image size in bytes:
Use the up and down arrows to enter the maximum size of an image (in bytes) that can be stored
in the database. This field enables you to configure the image size and can be especially helpful
when scanning large files or small networks. When this feature is used, it also controls disk space
requirements.
Self-Pay Description:
Type a description for self-pay encounters, for example encounters for which the patient does not
have insurance.
Location Master Comment Caption:
Enter a caption to change the name of the “Directions” field on the Location Defaults tab in the
Locations master file.
Practice access for payer master file:
Select this check-box to limit a practice's access to certain payer master files. For instructions for
setting this up, see field definitions under Enabling Practice Access for Payer Master File.
Practice access for provider master file:
Select this check-box to limit a practice's access to certain provider master files. For instructions
for setting this up, see field definitions under Setting Up Practice Access for Provider Master File.
EHR manual charge processing:
Select this check-box to hold charges sent from NextGen EHR until the biller processes them in
the NextGen EPM Charge Entry dialog box. It also enables you to generate reports from the
reconciliation process.
416
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
External manual charge processing:
Select this check-box to hold charges in the Charge Holding Tank that were sent from third party
applications through the HL7 Interface. The charges are held until the user processes them in the
EPM Charge Entry dialog box. This option also enables you to generate reports from the
reconciliation process.
Archive electronic send files:
Select this check-box to archive 837 electronic claim files created in NextGen® EPM.
Archive ERA files:
Select this check-box to archive 833 electronic ERA files received from payers and imported into
NextGen® EPM.
Encounter rate billing:
Select this check-box to enable Encounter Rate Billing and to cause the Encounter Rate Library
field to display in the Payer master file (on the Other tab of the Practice tab).
Enable enterprise patient alerts:
If this check-box is selected, then when a user is adding a chart alert to a patient chart to EPM,
the user can select which practices within the enterprise will also see the alert when the patient's
information is accessed. For information about adding patient alerts, see Adding an Alert to a
Patient's Chart in the NextGen EPM User Guide.
Enable enterprise patient balance alerts:
Select this check-box to display the Patient Balance check-box displays on the Alerts tab in
Practice Preferences. When both of the check-boxes are selected, an alert displays the patient
balances for each practice that a user has access to.
Birth Mother’s full name on Relations Tab:
Select this check-box to display the “Birth Mother’s full name on Relations Tab” option in Practice
Preferences > Chart.
Archive statements:
Select this check-box to archive statements created in NextGen® EPM within the account profile
screen for each guarantor.
Save med necessity requests in chart notes:
Select this check-box to create chart notes for each Medical Necessity request submitted. This
option is enabled only if you have purchased Medical Necessity.
Archive claim acknowledgement files:
Select this check-box to archive 997 electronic claim functional acknowledgement files received
from clearinghouses and imported into NextGen® EPM.
Create tasks during claim edits:
Select the Create tasks during claim edits check-box to automatically create a worklog task when
a task fails while edits are being run against an encounter. The created task is based on the
default task set in the Claim Edits Library Maintenance dialog box in the File Maintenance Claim
Edits library.
Create tasks during billing process:
When an encounter is being billed and a task fails, a worklog task gets created. The created task
is based on the default task set in the Claim Edits Library Maintenance dialog box in the File
Maintenance Claim Edits Library.
417
NextGen Healthcare
Write EPM active information to XML file:
Select this check-box to write out an XML file any time the patient information changes. The
resulting XML file contains data elements such as user, encounter number, and HIN. One reason
you might want to write the information to an XML file is to synchronize data to another system.
Archive claim status response files:
Select this check-box to archive 277 electronic claim status files received from payers and
imported into NextGen® EPM.
Enterprise Chart:
You can configure the enterprise to permit the ICS and EHR applications to synchronize across
practices. When you activate the Enterprise Chart option on the General tab of Enterprise
Preferences, you enable users in the EHR application to view ICS images that are maintained in
any of the practices within the enterprise. When the Enterprise Chart option is not activated, an
EHR user can view only those ICS images that are maintained for the same practice.
NOTE: After you activate the Enterprise Chart option, you cannot turn it off.
Enterprise case management:
If you are sure you need this option, select the check-box to makes cases available to all
practices within the same enterprise.
NOTE: Once you activate this option, you cannot turn it off. For more information, see
Enterprise Case.
Enable enterprise batch groupings:
Select this check-box to enable users to create enterprise batches that group practice-level
transaction batches. When this check-box is selected, it enables the Enable enterprise batch
groupings check-box in the Transactions Practice Preferences.
NOTE: For more information about enabling enterprise batch groupings, see Enabling
Enterprise Batch Grouping.
Require community code:
Select this field to require users to enter the Community Health Code in the Community Code
field on the Demographics tab of the patient chart in EPM. Require this field if you must report the
code for the annual IHS (Indian Health Services) report for funding. You can also make the
Community Code field required at the practice level.
Enable multiple co-pays:
Select this check-box to enable the Co-Pays tab in the payers table in File Maintenance. This
allows co-pays by specialty to be defined for specific payers.
Enroll patients in enterprise chart:
If you select Enterprise Chart and want the patients to become enterprise patients, select this
check-box.
418
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
UDS Tab
The UDS tab is used by CHC and IHS clinics to display additional fields as a part of patient
demographics entry. This information is needed for UDS, IHS, and/or state specific reporting.
Display Person UDS Fields:
Select this checkbox to display the below fields on the Person/Patient Information window in
NextGen® EPM.
Require Homeless Status:
Select this check-box to make Homeless Status a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise.
Require Migrant Worker Status:
Select this check-box to make Migrant Worker Status a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise.
Require Language Barrier:
Select this check-box to make Language Barrier a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise.
Require Primary Medical Coverage:
Select this check-box to make Primary Medical Coverage a required entry for all people/patients
in all practices in the enterprise.
419
NextGen Healthcare
Require Public Housing Primary Care:
Select this check-box to make Public Housing Primary Care a required entry for all
people/patients in all practices in the enterprise.
Require School Based Health Center:
Select this check-box to make School Based Health Center a required entry for all
people/patients in all practices in the enterprise.
Require Tribal Affiliation:
Select this check-box to make Tribal Affiliation a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise.
Require Blood Quantum:
Select this check-box to make Blood Quantum a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise.
Require Head of Household:
Select this check-box to make Head of Household a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise
Require IHS Eligibility Status:
Select this check-box to make IHS eligibility status a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise
Require Classification/Beneficiary:
Select this check-box to make Classification/Beneficiary a required entry for all people/patients in
all practices in the enterprise
Require Descendency:
Select this check-box to make Descendency a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise
Require Family Information:
Select this check-box to make Family Information (family size and income) a required entry for all
people/patients in all practices in the enterprise
Require Veteran Status:
Select this check-box to make Veteran Status a required entry for all people/patients in all
practices in the enterprise
420
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Autoflow Stored/Procedure Tab
This tab is used only by those clients utilizing a Stored Procedure (special or custom program) in
the NextGen application for one or more practices within the enterprise. The stored procedure
would be provided by NextGen.
NOTE: Do not enter anything on this tab unless instructed to do so by a NextGen Representative
421
NextGen Healthcare
Client Defined Tab
There are 14 Client Defined fields available that can be named and used to capture additional
patient information that is not already a standard field within the NextGen® EPM application.
Once a client defined field is named in Enterprise Preferences > Client Defined tab, a new Master
List table by that name becomes available in File Maintenance. Any of the client defined fields
can be made a required entry in EPM.
Race, Language, Religion, Church and/or Ethnicity can be made required entries in EPM. In
addition, Race and Ethnicity can display on either the Demographics tab (Display General) or the
UDS tab (Display UDS) on the Patient Information window in EPM.
Client Defined Label:
Enter captions as the client defined fields should appear on the Patient Information window >
Client Defined tab in EPM.
Require Always:
Select this check-box if the client defined field should be a required entry in EPM for both
people (globe) and patient (chart) demographic records.
Require on Chart Creation:
Select this check-box if the client defined field should be a required entry in EPM for only
patient (chart) demographic records.
422
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Race / Language / Religion / Church / Ethnicity:
Require Always:
Select this check-box if the one or more of these fields should be a required entry in EPM
for both people (globe) and patient (chart) demographic records.
Race / Ethnicity:
Display General:
Select this check-box if these fields should display on the Patient Information >
Demographics tab in EPM.
Display UDS:
Select this check-box if these fields should display on the Patient Information > UDS tab
in EPM.
Include on Lookup Screen:
If desired, select one of the 14 client defined fields to be used as an additional person/patient
lookup option in EPM.
Insurance Benefit Information Client Defined:
User Defined 1 and 2:
Enter captions as the user defined fields should appear on the Insurance Maintenance
window > Benefit Information tab > Eligibility and Benefits sub-tab in EPM.
423
NextGen Healthcare
ICS Tab
This tab displays only if the system is licensed for NextGen® ICS (Image Control System).
Settings on this tab will affect the ICS application for all practices within the enterprise.
NOTE: Setup of this tab will be covered in a separate NextGen® ICS training session.
424
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Libraries Tab
The Libraries tab is used to enable “Advanced Service Item Library Mode” for all practice within
the enterprise.
Advanced SIM Library Mode provides the ability to set prices based on payer and geographic
region. Clients are able to configure their Locations into SIM Pricing Regions for the appropriate
payers. Each pricing region can be assigned a different SIM Library with prices that are specific
to that region and payer.
NOTE: Advanced SIM Library Mode will be covered in a separate WebEx training session.
425
NextGen Healthcare
External Tab
The External tab is used when an EMPI (Enterprise Master Person Index) interface is
implemented between NextGen and an external system. The specified External System and
EMPI URL will be used by all practices in the enterprise.
NOTE: Do not enter anything on this tab unless instructed to do so by a NextGen
Representative.
426
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Vendor Labels Tab
The Vendor Labels tab is used when a refund interface is implemented between NextGen® EPM
and an external system.
The tab includes 10 User-Defined (UDF) fields. The UDF fields are mapped to the ud_field1 –
ud_field10 columns in the Vendor Matching table (vendor_ext) that is used with a refund
interface.
Enter a label for each UDF field as needed for the interface. The field labels display on the
Vendor Lookup window when performing the “vendor matching” process for a refund transaction
on the Payment Entry screen in EPM.
NOTE: Do not enter anything on this tab unless instructed to do so by a NextGen
Interface Representative.
427
NextGen Healthcare
Practice Preferences
Alerts Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Alerts Tab
This tab allows the alerts to be configured for all users in the practice.
Chart Alerts
Display Alerts when accessing:
These settings control when chart-level alerts display in EPM.
Account:
Chart alerts display when a guarantor’s Account is accessed.
Chart:
Chart alerts display when a patient's Chart is accessed.
Encounter:
Chart alerts display when a patient's Encounter is accessed.
Task:
Chart alerts display when a patient's Task is accessed.
Appointment:
Chart alerts display when a patient's Appointment is accessed.
428
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
System
The System options under Chart Alerts display system-generated alerts with chart alerts.
Expired:
Alert indicating a patient has been marked as expired on the People Maintenance
window.
Co-managed:
Alert indicating a patient has been marked as co-managed on the Chart Details window.
Unapplied Pmts:
Alert indicating there are unapplied payments for the patient.
Reference Scheduling System Alerts:
The items that you have checked under the Appointment Scheduling with the System
Alerts checked in the Chart Alerts section.
After Care Days:
Alert indicating a patient has been charged for a service item with an after care period
attached to it.
Pending EHR Charges:
An alert when a user opens an encounter that has pending EHR charges.
Privacy Notice:
An alert each time a user accesses the chart of a patient who has not been issued a
Privacy Notice.
Patient Balance:
An alert with the patient balances for each practice that a user has access to displays.
This check-box displays only when the Enable enterprise patient balance alerts checkbox is selected on the General tab in Enterprise Preferences.
Open Cases:
An alert that lists all open cases on the patient's chart. The list includes the case
description, case employer, onset date and case status (Active or Inactive) so that the
user can identify exactly which cases exist.
Account Alerts
Display Alerts when accessing:
These settings control when account-level alerts display in EPM.
Account:
Account alerts display when a guarantor's Account is accessed.
Responsible Chart:
Account alerts display when a patient's Chart that the guarantor is responsible for is
accessed.
Responsible Encounter:
Account alerts display when a patient's Encounter that the guarantor is responsible for is
accessed.
429
NextGen Healthcare
Task:
Account alerts display when a patient's Task is accessed.
System
The System options under Account Alerts display system-generated alerts with Account Alerts.
Bad Debt:
Alert indicating an account has an encounter in Bad Debt status.
Outsourcing:
Alert that indicate the date that a SIM has been outsourced to a collection agency. The
outsourcing alert displays only when there is an amount in the patient bucket.
Unapplied Payments:
Alert indicating there are unapplied payments for the patient.
Authorization Alerts
Display Alerts when patient authorizations are less than:
These settings control when alerts related to authorizations display in EPM.
Encounter mode:
Alert indicating the patient’s authorizations has less than the defined number of
encounters remaining.
Units mode:
Alert indicating the patient’s authorizations has less than the defined number of charge
units remaining.
Managed Care
The Managed Care options display Contract Edits when accessing the following:
Appointment Scheduling:
Alerts regarding contract edits if the scheduled Event has member SIMS attached or the
patient has insurance.
Charge Entry:
Alerts regarding contract edits on the Charge Posting dialog box.
Appointment Scheduling
The Appointment Scheduling options display system-generated alerts with the following
Appointment Scheduling Alerts.
Future Appointments:
An alert notifying you if the patient, that you are scheduling an appointment for, has any
future appointments.
Active Recall Plans:
An alert notifying you if the patient, that you are scheduling an appointment for, has any
active recall plans.
430
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Active Wait List Items:
An alert notifying you if the patient, that you are scheduling an appointment for, has any
items on the wait list.
No Show / Cancellations:
An alert notifying you if the patient, that you are scheduling an appointment for, has
missed or cancelled appointments. You can set the number of appointments that a
patient has missed or cancelled before the notification displays, by increasing the number
with the up arrow or decreasing the number with the down arrow.
Payer
The Payer options determine when the payer alert displays. The actual text for the payer alert
comes from the Payer Defaults tab of the Add/Modify Payer Information dialog box in the master
files.
Checkin:
The payer alert during the checkin process for an encounter when the patient has that
payer attached.
Checkout:
The payer alert during the checkout process when the patient has that payer attached.
General
Show alerts every time a chart, encounter, or account is accessed:
The alerts every time a chart, encounter, or account is accessed. The default setting for
displaying alerts is one time per session, per practice, which is the first time the patient's chart,
encounter, or account is displayed.
431
NextGen Healthcare
Appt Scheduling Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Appointment Scheduling Tab
This tab allows you to setup options and default information for the appointment book for your
practice and all related service locations.
When Scheduling Appointments
Do not allow checkin of future appointments:
Select this option to prevent users from checking in patients and creating encounters for future
dates from the Appointment Book or Appointment List (in the Appointment Lookup dialog box).
Future date is defined as a date that occurs after today's date.
Do not allow checkin of cancelled appointments:
Select this option to prevent users from checking in patients and creating encounters for
cancelled appointments from the Appointment List (in the Appointment Lookup dialog box).
Do not allow unlinked patient appts:
Select this option to ensure that all appointments are linked to a patient, who is already in the
system. This will disable the right side of the Add Appointment dialog box and the user will not be
able to make an appointment without finding a patient through Patient Lookup.
NOTE: If this field is selected and the user clears the patient fields on the Patient
Information dialog box while adding a new appointment for an existing patient, the patient
fields remain enabled.
432
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Default rendering phys from patient PCP if resource is not linked:
Select this check-box to use the primary care physician from the patient chart demographics as
the default for the rendering when you create a new appointment and the selected "nonphysician" resource does not have a linked physician.
Default referring phys from rendering phys:
Select this check-box if you want the rendering physician selected on the Add/Edit Appointment
dialog box to be used as the default for the referring physician.
Enable overriding of conflicts with secured login:
Select this check-box to enable users with the appropriate rights to bypass scheduling conflicts by
entering a PIN or user name and password.
Check for conflicting appointments:
Select this check-box to display a warning message when scheduling an appointment at a time
where an appointment is already scheduled for that resource.
Check for conflicting categories:
Select this check-box to display a warning message when scheduling an appointment in a
category time that does not specify the event as a member of the category. For more information
about category setup, please refer to "Categories Tab" in the Scheduling Administration section.
Track retained appointments:
Select this option to flag any retained appointments and display them in the patient's appointment
history. A "retained" appointment is one that has been scheduled and is related to an
appointment that was cancelled or no-show.
Track cancellation reason:
Select this option to require entering the reason for canceling an appointment on the Edit
Appointment dialog box.
Track rescheduling reason:
Select this option to require entering the reason for rescheduling an appointment in the dialog box
that displays from the Edit Appointment dialog box.
Pull details from event details:
Select this option to automatically display the details (as defined on the Event Add/Edit dialog
box) on the Add/Edit Appointment dialog box each time the event is scheduled.
Print multiple fee tickets for linked appts:
Select to print fee tickets for all linked appointments. When a user attempts to print a fee ticket for
an appointment that is linked to other appointments, all fee tickets print.
Do not allow free text referring physicians:
Select to prevent users from typing in a physician name in an applicable field. Instead, users must
choose the provider from a list. The list they use is setup in the System Master Files for
Providers.
Lock appointment slot:
Select to prevent users from scheduling multiple appointments in the same time slot. When a
user is in the process of adding an appointment and accesses the Appointment Search Ahead
dialog box, the time slot is locked to prevent others from adding an appointment in the same time
slot.
433
NextGen Healthcare
Defaults
Default Time Interval:
Select a default value for the standard time interval to use when users schedule appointments in
the appointment book. The time in the Default Time Interval field becomes the default interval in
all scheduling fields that deal with time increments, such as template and resource time intervals
and event durations. This time is also used as the default duration when you are adding or
modifying an event override. This interval can be overridden if you select the Allow interval
overrides check-box.
Allow interval overrides:
Select this check-box if you need the ability to create time interval overrides at the resource,
template, and event levels.
Important: This check-box affects many areas of EPM and File Maintenance. Before you select
this check-box, you should understand its extensive effects. If the check-box is selected and you
want to clear it to prevent interval overrides, you should first make sure all intervals set for events,
event chains, resources, and templates are increments of the practice default time interval. For
example, if the default interval is 10 minutes, then all other intervals must be increments of 10
such as 10, 20, 30, and so on.
Default Start Time:
Select the default value for the standard start time when using Appointment Search Ahead to find
available appointments.
Default End Time:
Select a default value for the standard end time when using Appointment Search Ahead to find
available appointments.
Default Appt Reminder:
Enter the default letter for standard appointment reminders to be printed. This field may be
overridden when running reminders. For more information about printing appointment reminders,
see the "Forms, Letters, and Labels" chapter in the NextGen EPM User Guide.
Days in advance of scheduled date to print reminders:
Enter the default value for the number of days prior to scheduled appointment dates for reminders
to be printed.
Appt Search/Wait List Options
Allow appointment creation on uncategorized time for search ahead:
Because future appointment dates may not have assigned categories until templates are
assigned to them, you can select this option to allow users to schedule appointments at
uncategorized times (within the start and end times setup in Practice Preferences > Appt
Scheduling tab) when they are using the Search Ahead dialog box.
Prompt to defer scheduling admin changes until automated nightly process:
Select this option to defer scheduling administration changes until the nightly process. Depending
on your setup, changes to scheduling administration can take some time because the process
requires that changes are made to the appointment search engine. Because this process occurs
in real time and takes place during business hours, making such a change can take several
minutes and could impact users who are currently scheduling appointments. You could even
experience performance-related problems.
434
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Allow multiple location selections:
Select this option to specify whether to allow multiple locations to be searched in Appointment
Search Ahead in EPM. If the option is checked, then you can select more than one location to
search on in the Service Locations drop-down list on the Appointment Search Ahead dialog box.
If the check-box is not selected, then only one location can be selected to search on at one time.
Enable nearest location search:
Select this check-box to enable the distance criteria on the Appointment Search Ahead dialog
box. The criteria restricts the search to locations near a specific ZIP Code.
View Options
Disable right time legend:
Select to .hide the appointment time slots that display on the right side of the window in multi-view
and weekly view For additional information, see Hiding the Time Slots on the Right Side of the
Scheduler Book.
Required on Appt


Require rendering physician – Select this check-box to require a rendering physician
when creating an appointment.
Require referring physician – Select this check-box to require a referring physician when
creating a linked appointment.
Required on Linked Appt:










Birth Date
Day Phone
Home Phone
Primary Care Phys
SSN
Contact Preference
Sex
Demographic Client Defined fields (Church, Language, Race, and Religion) from the
Enterprise Preferences > General tab
Client Defined fields from the Enterprise Preferences > Client Defined tab
UDS fields (Homeless Status, Migrant Worker status, Language Barrier, and so on)
NOTES:
The UDS fields display only when the Enterprise Preferences >UDS tab is enabled.
If a UDS field is set as required in Enterprise Preferences, the required check marks display
with a gray background. You cannot clear these check marks in Practice Preferences.
435
NextGen Healthcare
Appointment Scheduling User-Defined
Label:
In the Label column, type a name for each text and master list type of appointment userdefined field as needed.
Type:
UDF 1 – 4 = Text
UDF 5 – 8 = Master List
Require?:
Select this option to require this field and then, select one of the following options:
Always:
Select this option to require this field every time an appointment is made.
On linked patient:
Select this option to require this field only when a linked appointment is made.
436
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
AutoFlow Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – AutoFlow Tab
The AutoFlow tab allows you to select and sequence a series of actions for processing
encounters, giving you the flexibility of setting up the system to match your clinic's flow.
NOTE: Setup of the AutoFlow Sequences table and training on Check-In and Check-Out
will be covered during Core Group training.
Describe your current check-out process and how you would like it to work with the NextGen
system. The AutoFlow Sequences built in File Maintenance are attached here. Anything
attached at the Location level will override the <All Locations> default. Likewise, anything
attached to a User will override the settings here in Practice Preferences.
437
NextGen Healthcare
Budget Accounts Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Budget Accounts Tab
NOTE: Training on Budget Plans will be covered during Advanced Training.
Budget Communication
Select the method of communication your practice uses to create budget-related notifications.
Budget Letters:
This option enables the EPM menu path: File > Print Forms > Letters > Budget Letters.
Budget letters communicate information about a plan in a separate letter. If you select
this method, you can select the default letters to print for budget plans.
Budget Statements:
This option enables the EPM menu path: File > Print Forms > Budget Statements.
Budget statements communicate dunning messages about a budget plan as additional
information printed on the guarantor's statements instead of as a separate letter. If you
select this method, you can select the default dunning messages.
Budget Letters
If you selected Budget Letters as your budget communication method, then you can select the
default letters to use with the budget plans. These budget letters come from the letter templates
setup in the Letters master file.
NOTE: If you selected Budget Statements, the budget letters here do not apply.
438
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
To set the budget letters to send for each kind of letter:
Select a default letter template for each type. When a user prints one of these letter types in
EPM, he or she can choose to use the default template or choose another.
First Letter:
Select the first letter that is sent to the guarantor after an account is setup on a budget
plan. The letter usually contains the payment terms of the budget plan. EPM only creates
this letter one time.
Normal Letter:
Select the letter to send to the guarantor on a recurring basis during the normal course of
the budget plan. This type of letter can reflect the last payment received and can act as
reminder of the next payment.
Final Letter:
Select the letter to send as the final letter for the budget plan. This letter normally shows
the final payment due and is sent when the result of the final payment is a zero balance.
Delinquent Letter:
Select the letter to send when the guarantor's budget payment is late as determined by
the budget plan terms.
If payment is not received within the number of days specified in the Number of days
after delinquency before pre-list field, the Pre-List Letter prints in the next letter cycle.
Pre-List Letter:
Select the letter to send when the guarantor has failed to meet the budget plan
obligations and will be turned over to collections. The budget plan now becomes defunct.
Underpayment Letter:
Select the letter to send (instead of the Normal Letter) when the payment received is less
than the amount defined in the budget plan.
Missed Payment Letter:
Select the letter to send (instead of the Normal Letter) when the guarantor has not sent a
payment within the number of days specified in the Allowable number of days to receive
payment from due date field. The budget plan becomes delinquent.
Budget Defaults
The Budget Defaults section defines the default options to use when EPM calculates budget plan
amounts.
Default budget type:
Select one of the following:
Perpetual:
The budget plan enables encounters to "roll-on" to an existing budget plan without have
to re-establish the plan.
Non-Perpetual:
The budget plan remains specific to the encounter.
Minimum flat dollar payment amount:
Enter the amount for the minimum allowed payment for a budget plan. Payment amount cannot
be less than this amount. A warning message displays in EPM when the amount entered on any
budget plan is less than the minimum.
439
NextGen Healthcare
Acceptable % of self-pay balance for perpetual payments:
Enter the minimum percentage of the perpetual budget plan balance that can be allowed as a
recurring payment. For example, if you enter 12% as acceptable, then the minimum payment
must be at least 12% of the total self-pay balance. A warning message displays in EPM when the
payment amount entered is less than the percentage.
Minimum payment interval:
Select the minimum number of days between payment cycles. Budget plans cannot be setup for
less than the defined interval. To allow time for statement and payment mailing, the interval
cannot be set to less than 7 days.
Maximum number of months for non-perpetual budgets:
Set the maximum length for the duration of non-perpetual budget plans. When a user creates a
non-perpetual budget plan, the expected plan duration cannot exceed the maximum. When the
value is set to zero (0), there is no maximum.
Default collection agency:
Select the collection agency to use as the default when a budget is terminated. Termination
automatically pre-lists the encounters.
NOTE: You can modify collection agencies in the Collection Agencies master file.
Days in advance of scheduled due date to print letters:
Enter the number of days before the budget "Next Letter Date" that letters should be printed. The
number you enter here depends on how often your practice prints letters. The "Next Letter Date"
is the payment due date, so in determining an appropriate number, it is helpful to factor in the
time needed to print and mail the correspondence.
For example, if you set the field to 5 days and a user sets up a Budget Payment Plan and
attempts to enter today or tomorrow as the start date, then an message displays that the
minimum start date must be at least 5 days from today.
Allowable number of days to receive payment from due date:
Enter the number of grace period days after the budget due date that payment must be received
by. This preference controls the "Must Receive By" date that optionally prints on statements and
letters. For example, if you set this preference to 15 days, and the first payment date is June 1,
then the date that the payment must be received by is June 16.
Number of days after delinquency before pre-list:
Enter the number of days that must pass after a budget plan has reached delinquent status
before it goes into pre-list status.
Number of days after pre-list before termination:
Enter the number of days that must pass after a budget plan has reached pre-list status before it
will be terminated and put on a pre-list for collections.
Default Dunning Messages:
If you selected Budget Statements as your budget communication method, select the Budget
Statements library that contains the default dunning messages to include on the statements.
You can modify the messages in the Budget Statement Messages master file and then attach the
messages to the appropriate statuses in the Budget Statement library.
440
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Charge Entry Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Charge Entry Tab
This section provides options for Charge Entry in the EPM system.
Prevent charge rendering physician modifications after practice closing:
Select this option to prevent users from changing a charge's rendering physician if the charge
was created before the closing date. Note that the charge create date does not have to be the
encounter date; a charge can be added after practice closing and the rendering does not lock
down until the practice closes again. You can still add a rendering physician if no rendering
physician has been entered for the charge.
Prevent charge referring physician modifications after practice closing:
Select this check-box to prevent users from changing the charge's referring provider on an
encounter after practice closing. This check-box only affects voidable charges.
NOTE: You must also select the Display referring providers check-box.
Prompt when voiding a charge with transactions:
Select this option to prompt users when they are voiding a charge with transactions. When this
option is selected and there are transactions associated with a charge that do not net to zero,
then the user sees a warning that they are about to void a charge with associated transactions.
The user can choose to continue. If this option is not set, then the normal warning displays to the
user asking him or her to confirm the void.
441
NextGen Healthcare
Allow future charges to be entered:
Select this check-box to allow a service date greater than the system date ("today") to be entered
on the Charge Posting dialog box.
Default only primary diagnosis on charges:
Select this check-box to set the primary diagnosis for an encounter default to the Charge Posting
dialog box. This box controls how diagnoses default to charges. This check-box controls
defaulting diagnoses in the following ways:
If this box is selected, the primary diagnosis for an encounter is defaulted to the first charge. The
diagnoses for subsequent charges for that encounter default from the previous charge.
If this box is not checked, the top four diagnoses for an encounter are defaulted to the first
charge. The diagnoses for subsequent charges for that encounter default from the previous
charge.
NOTE: There is one exception to this default behavior. When you save a charge, leave
the Charge Posting dialog box, and return to the Charge Posting dialog box to enter
another charge for the same encounter, the diagnoses will default from the first charge
and not the last charge entered.
Do not allow free text referring provider:
Select to prevent users from typing a provider name in an applicable field. Instead, users must
choose the provider from a list that is setup in the System Master Files for Providers.
Prompt to flag charge for rebill:
If this option is selected and a user updates a billed charge, the user will be prompted to manually
flag the charge for rebill.
If this option is not selected, the charge is automatically flagged for rebill. The Rebill Encounter
check-box on the Balance Control dialog box in EPM is automatically selected.
Allow auto adjustment when charge amt overridden:
Select this check-box so that when a user creates a new charge that is setup for auto adjustment
and then overrides the price, the auto adjustment is created anyway. If this check-box is not
selected and a user creates a new charge that is setup for an auto adjustment and overrides the
price, then the auto adjustment does not occur.
Additional Provider (and field caption):
Select this check-box to enable users to add an additional provider at the charge level for
reporting purposes. The Additional Provider field is commonly used when referring to a Physician
Assistant, Midwife, or Nurse Practitioner within the practice. First, select this check-box to add a
field to the Charge Posting dialog box so that users can add an additional provider. Then, the
default caption for the added field on the Charge Posting dialog box is Mid-level. To change the
field caption to best represent the additional providers in your practice, type another name in the
“Addl prov” field. Finally, select one of the following to determine the type of providers users can
select from for the field:
Practice renderings:
To show the additional providers that are setup as rendering physicians in the current
practice.
All providers:
To show all providers that are listed in the Provider master file.
442
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Maximum extended charge amount:
Select this check-box and then type a maximum charge amount in the associated field to prevent
users from manually entering a line item charge in EPM Charge Posting that is higher than that
amount. Then, if a user manually enters a charge line item in an amount that exceeds the
Maximum extended charge amount value, EPM displays a warning and does not save the charge
amount.
EHR manual charge processing:
Select this check-box to hold charges sent from NextGen EHR for a user in EPM to review and
accept before the billing process is run.
NOTE: To access the two EHR Manual Charge Processing reports in EPM, this option
must be selected in both Enterprise Preferences > General tab and in here in Practice
Preferences.
External manual charge processing:
Select this check-box to hold charges sent from a third party application through an HL7 interface
for a user in EPM to review and accept before the billing process is run.
NOTE: To access the two External Manual Charge Processing reports in EPM, this
option must be selected in both Enterprise Preferences > General tab and in here in
Practice Preferences.
Display tooth, surface, quadrant:
Select this check-box to display the dental-related fields (Tooth, Surface, Quadrants) on the
Charge Entry dialog box when users enter charges.
Display referring providers:
Select this check-box to display the referring providers in EPM Charge Posting. This field can be
used in conjunction with the Prevent charge referring physician modifications after practice
closing field described earlier in this table. EPM displays referring providers for charges received
from other applications only when the Display referring providers option is selected.
Allow multiple tooth surfaces:
Select this option to select more than one surface for a single tooth on the Charge Entry dialog
box.
Display batch information:
Select this check-box to display the Batch Info field on the Charge Posting dialog box so that
users can enter information that can be used for batch charge entry.
Differentiate Risk Adjusted diagnoses:
You can distinguish risk adjustment diagnoses from regular diagnoses. Select the Differentiate
Risk Adjusted diagnoses check-box to have the Risk Adjust Indicator display on the Add/Modify
ICD9CM Code Information dialog box. Then, set the Risk Adjustment Indicator.
Overwrite EPM narrative with EHR notes:
Select this option to, at charge creation, overwrite the EPM narrative, including the SIM narrative
if one exists, with the notes from EHR so the information can be used on claims.
443
NextGen Healthcare
Default place of service from previous charge:
Select this option so that when a user changes the place of service for a new or existing charge,
the place of service becomes the default used for subsequent charges during a Charge Posting
session only for the current encounter.
NOTE: If the user closes and then reopens the charge entry window or changes
encounters, the default place of service used becomes the one selected in the SIM
library. If this check-box is cleared, then the default place of service from the service item
library is used.
Derive place of service from encounter facility:
If you select this check-box, then while a user enters the charges in EPM during charge entry, the
place of service is determined by the Facility field on the Encounter Maintenance > General tab
instead of the Service Location field. If the check-box is cleared, then the Service Location field is
used.
Remove charge diagnoses when voiding a charge:
Select this check-box if you want all diagnoses attached to a charge to be removed when the
charge is voided.
Tax Rate:
If you want the practice to use a specific tax rate, select this check-box. If you select the checkbox, you can select an applicable Tax Rate library at the:


Practice level by selecting a library in the field next to the Tax Rate check-box.
Location level by selecting a library in the Locations master file > Defaults 2 tab > Tax
Rate Library field.
Charge Holding Tank Processing Order:
Set the code range rules that determine the order that incoming EHR and external (HL7) charges
are processed by EPM. The EHR charges listed on the Process Pending Charges dialog box are
ordered first by encounter number and then by the sequence rules setup here. Incoming charges
from an interface that go into the holding tank are processed in the order setup here when you
accept them.
Maximum number of encounters to show in encounter list:
This option controls the number of encounters that display for a patient in the Encounter field on
the Charge Posting window.


The default setting for this option is 500
If set to “0” all patient encounters are listed
Behavioral Health Base Minute Rounding Methods:
Settings define the rounding methods for Behavioral Health timed billing on self-pay encounters.
The rounding methods apply to Behavioral Health SIM codes that have been defined in the SIM
Library with 15, 30, 60, or 240 Base Minutes. The rounding method affects how the units are
calculated on a behavioral health charge for a patient based on the total time entered for the
charge.
NOTE: Rounding methods for encounters with insurance are defined for each payer on the
Payers > Defaults-2 tab.
444
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Chart Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Chart Tab
Chart
User-Defined 1 – 8 Name:
Type a label for each of the user-defined fields that you want to display on the patient's
chart. You can use these fields at any time or you can make them required entries. To
make one of these fields required at chart creation, select the corresponding Required
check-box. These user-defined fields represent information that remains constant from
encounter to encounter, for example, "organ donor." When the User-Defined Name is
created and selected as required, the information from the user-defined fields displays on
the patient's chart and the Chart tab, as well as on the Chart/Ins tab of the Appointment
Book. You can also select the fields from Patient Information in the Data Repository for
form and label templates
Require User-Defined 1 – 8:
Select this option to require the User-Defined Names 1-8 fields above at chart creation.
445
NextGen Healthcare
Required Fields
Click in the column to the right of the field that you want to make a required field when
users create new charts. The following fields can be set as required: Birth Date, Day
Phone, Home Phone, Primary Care Phys, SSN, Contact Preference, the four
Demographic Client Defined fields (Church, Language, Race, and Religion) from the
Enterprise Preferences > General tab, the Client Defined fields from the Enterprise
Preferences > Client Defined tab, and Community Code.
If the UDS fields are enabled, you can also require them (Homeless Status, Migrant
Worker status, Language Barrier, and so on).
NOTES:




The UDS fields display only when the Enterprise Preferences >UDS tab is
enabled.
If a UDS field is set as required in Enterprise Preferences, the required check
marks display with a gray background. You cannot clear these check marks in
Practice Preferences.
If you select Require SSN, a red arrow displays on the General tab and you must
either select the Exclude all unknown SSNs field or enter a Social Security
number in the Unknown SSN field on the General tab.
If you require Contact Preference, you must select the Display Contact
Preference option on the General tab.
Release of information:
Select to set the default for the release of information when a payer is attached to an encounter.
The default is stored in the insurance record and displays on the Patient Insurance - Encounter
dialog box.
Automatically assign benefits:
Select this box to automatically select the Assignment of Benefits box on the Patient Insurance Encounter dialog box on the Encounters tab of the patient's chart.
Enable patient status:
Select this option to display the:
 Patient Status tab on the People/Patient Maintenance dialog box.
 Patient Status section on the patient chart.
When a user selects the Patient Status and Pt Status Reason on the Patient Status tab, the
information also displays on the People/Patient Maintenance dialog box.
Patient status required at Chart creation:
Select this option to require users to enter a patient's status at chart creation.
Marketing plan required at Chart creation:
Select this option to require marketing information when a chart is being created. This option
allows you to track how patients found out about your practice. You can create marketing plans in
the Practice master files.
Enable practice payer specific information:
Select this check-box to setup the co-pay as practice-specific. The co-pay is pulled from the
Practice Level section of the Insurance Maintenance dialog box. If the check-box is not selected,
the co-pay will be setup as enterprise-wide. For more information, refer to the section How CoPayments are Used in the Application.
446
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Automatically reassign encounter balance responsibility:
Select this check-box to reassign the encounter balance to the next insurance (secondary or
tertiary) or to the patient balance once the insurance is posted, eg: the line item status will be
"Settled to [next payer]". Refer to the "Posting Transactions" chapter in the NextGen EPM User
Guide for more information.
Default chart guarantor to self if patient is 18 or older:
Select this option to use the patient as a default guarantor when users create charts for patient
who are 18 years or older. This feature applies to the Patient Chart > Demographics tab, and to
the Create Encounters dialog boxes.
Enable encounter payer copay:
Select this check-box to display the Encounter Co-payment field and the Copay Exempt checkbox on the Insurance Maintenance dialog box. For more information about turning on copay
exemption for an encounter, see the NextGen EPM Claims Guide.
Birth Mother’s full name on Relations Tab:
Select this check-box to display fields for the patient’s birth mother’s First, Middle, Last, Maiden
names on the Modify Patient Information > Relations tab.
NOTE: This option displays only if the “Birth Mother’s full name on Relations Tab” option
has been selected in Enterprise Preferences > General tab.
Appt Event SIM Carryover
Default to encounter:
Select this check-box to automatically populate the Charge Posting dialog box with the
associated service items when it is initially accessed if an encounter is created for an
appointment for an event.
Effective date:
Enter the date set for the SIM carryover to start.
Medical Record Number
The Medical Record Number is used in both EPM and EHR. In EPM, it displays at the top of the
patient chart.
Req at Chart creation:
Select this check-box to require assigning the Medical Record Number when the chart is
created. The default chart number is the next available number as determined by the
Counter master file. If this box is not selected, then no medical record numbers are
added to new charts.
Allow user override at Chart creation:
If you selected the Require at Chart Creation check-box, then you can select this checkbox to enable the user to override the system-generated medical record number by
entering a different chart number.
Allow preceding zeros:
If you selected the Require at Chart Creation check-box, then you can select this checkbox to have zeros precede all medical record numbers for new and existing charts in the
practice. Because the Medical Record field is a twelve-digit field, enough zeros display at
the beginning of the number to make the total number of digits equal twelve.
447
NextGen Healthcare
Claims Tab
Billing
Enable Qualifying Encounter Billing:
Select this check-box to activate qualifying encounter billing for all encounters with line
items marked as a Qualifying SIM. To complete the setup for Qualifying Encounter
Billing, you must configure one or more SIMs to be a Qualifying SIM.
Suppress zero balance claims:
Select this check-box to suppress claims with a $0 (zero) balance during batch billing.
Suppress CLIA ID from mammography claims:
Select this check-box to make Mammography Certification Codes and CLIA IDs mutually
exclusive on electronic claims. When this option is selected and the application identifies
a mammography code on a claim, it prints the mammography code and not the CLIA ID
for Medicare claims. When this option is not selected, both the mammography code and
the CLIA code are printed on the claim. Reference: For this option to work, you must set
a SIM as a Mammography Code and this code must appear on the claim. For information
on setting a SIM as a Mammography Code, see Attaching a Payer in the Service Item
Library section of the System Setup chapter.
Include Self-Pay Encounters In Claim Billing Report:
Select this check-box to include charges and encounters billed to patients when a SIM is
flagged as a patient self-pay encounter. The billing report will then display charges and
encounters billed to both payers and patients.
448
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Allow multiple Purchased Service lines on one claim:
Select this check-box to bill multiple purchased service charges for an encounter on one
claim.
If the check-box is not selected, the system generates separate claims for each
purchased service item.
Do Not Sum Units for CPT4 Code:
Select this check-box to indicate that for this practice, multiple identical charge lines are
prevented from being combined on one line and summed on the paper claim. The
identical charges display on separate lines on the paper HCFA 1500 claim or are entered
individually in an electronic send file. When the check-box is cleared (the application
default), the application sums identical line items and indicates multiple units for billing on
a paper HCFA 1500 or in an electronic send file.
NOTE: You can also set this option at the SIM or payer levels.
Disable diagnosis claim break:
Select this check-box to prevent claim breaks when there are more than four diagnoses
on a claim; an error generates and the claim is not produced because there are too many
diagnoses to bill. If the check-box is clear and there are more than four diagnoses, the
charges automatically split onto multiple separate claims as adequate to handle the
number of diagnoses.
NOTE: You can also set this option at the payer level on the Payer master file >
Payer Defaults – 2 tab.
Allow eight diagnoses:
Select this check-box to display eight diagnoses (instead of four) on the Charge Posting
window in EPM. This check-box is in both in the Claims and EHR practice preferences. If
you change the check-box for one preference, it automatically changes for the other
preference.
Anesthesia Units to Follow Primary Claim:
Select this check-box to ignore both the rounding setting in the Payer master file and the
Anesthesia Modifiers library and to instead use the total Anesthesia units that were
calculated on the Primary claim for all COBs (secondary and tertiary).
For example, if a charge/modifier combination has different unit calculations depending
on the payer, then:
When units are calculated with the payer settings, a primary Medicare claim has 10 total
anesthesia units while a primary Aetna claim has 12 total anesthesia units.
Therefore, for primary Medicare and secondary Aetna claims, both primary and
secondary claims would go out with 10 units because Medicare is the primary.
And for primary Aetna and secondary Medicare claims, both primary and secondary
claims would go out with 12 units because Aetna is the primary.
NOTE: For more information about anesthesia billing, see the Anesthesia Billing
white paper available from the Web site www.NextGen.com.
Anesthesia Units to Follow Primary Claim:
Enable billing of encounter diagnoses:
Select this option to display the Bill encounter diagnoses option in the Payer master file.
449
NextGen Healthcare
UB Claim Form
Select the information to print on the UB Claim Form
NOTE: To access the UB Claims tab in the Payer master file, you must select a Type of Facility
and a Bill Classification.
Type of Facility:
The selected Type of Facility prints in the first position of Field Locator 4 on UB claims. It
also sets the default on the Payers > Practice tab > UB sub-tab in File Maintenance and
on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab in NextGen® EPM.
Bill Classification:
The selected Bill Classification prints in the second position of Field Locator 4 on UB
claims. It also sets the default on the Payers > Practice tab > UB sub-tab in File
Maintenance and on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab in NextGen® EPM.
Frequency of Bill:
The selected Frequency of Bill prints in the third position of Field Locator 4 on UB claims.
It also sets the default on the Payers > Practice tab > UB sub-tab in File Maintenance
and on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab in NextGen® EPM.
NOTE: For regular UB billing, this field is usually set to 1. For recurring UB
claims billing, this field must be blank. This will allow the application to apply the
proper frequency based on where the encounter lies in the sequence of recurring
encounters.
Source of Admission:
This setting populates Field Locator 15 on UB claims. The selected Source of Admission
sets the default on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab in NextGen® EPM.
NOTE: “Source of Admission” is required on electronic UB / 837I claims in ASC X12
Version 5010 format.
450
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Contract Edits Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Contract Edits Tab
The Contract Edits tab displays all of the current Contract Edit Alerts. This screen enables you to
select which Contract Edit Alerts to display to specific users or groups.
Appointment Scheduling
The rendering physician is not a participating provider of this contract:
The Participating Providers field on the Other tab of the Add/Modify Payer Information
dialog box.
Authorization is required for this procedure:
The Authorization Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box.
In addition, for this contract edit to display at the appointment scheduling level, a SIM
must be attached to the event or event chain.
Referring Physician is required for this procedure:
The Referring Physician Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog
box. In addition, for this contract edit to display at the appointment scheduling level, a
SIM must be attached to the event or event chain.
The payer xyz requires notification:
The payer requires that notification is setup at the payer level on the Other tab of the
Add/Modify Payer Information dialog box.
The payer xyz requires verification:
The payer requires that verification is setup at the payer level on the Other tab of the
Add/Modify Payer Information dialog box.
451
NextGen Healthcare
The payer xyz requires authorization:
The payer requires that authorization is setup at the payer level on the Other tab of the
Add/Modify Payer Information dialog box.
Balance Control
Warning: The contract requires the primary diagnosis code to be one of the
following code(s):
The Required Diagnosis section on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the
service item entered on the Charge Entry dialog box.
Warning: According to the contract the following modifier code(s) are required for
this procedure: xyz:
The Required Modifiers section on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the
service item entered on the Charge Entry dialog box.
The rendering provider is not a participating provider of this contract:
The Participating Providers field on the Other tab of the Add/Modify Payer Information
dialog box.
Authorization is required for this procedure:
The Authorization Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box,
which is checked for the service item.
Referring Physician is required for this procedure:
The Referring Physician Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog
box.
Billing Process
Warning: The contract requires the primary diagnosis code to be one of the
following code(s):
The Required Diagnosis section on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the
service item entered on the Charge Entry dialog box.
Warning: According to the contract the following modifier code(s) are required for
this procedure: xyz
The Required Modifiers section on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the
service item entered on the Charge Entry dialog box.
Authorization is required for this procedure:
The Authorization Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box.
Referring Physician is required for this procedure:
The Referring Physician Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog
box.
452
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Charge Entry
Warning: The contract requires the primary diagnosis code to be one of the
following code(s):
The Required Diagnosis section on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the
service item entered on the Charge Entry dialog box.
Warning: According to the contract the following modifier code(s) are required for
this procedure: xyz.
The Required Modifiers section on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the
service item entered on the Charge Entry dialog box.
A $0.00 automatic adjustment has been created for this charge:
System-generated based on the information in the Automatic Adjustments section of the
Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the service item entered on the Charge Entry
dialog box.
The procedure code xyz has been defaulted onto the encounter:
System-generated based on the information on the Payer tab of the Service Item Library
Maintenance dialog box.
The diagnostic code xyz has been defaulted onto the encounter:
System-generated based on the information on the Payer tab of the Service Item Library
Maintenance dialog box.
The rendering provider is not a participating provider of this contract:
The Participating Providers field on the Other tab on the Add/Modify Payer Information
dialog box.
Authorization is required for this procedure:
The Authorization Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box.
Referring Physician is required for this procedure:
The Referring Physician Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog
box.
A $0.00 sliding fee adjustment has been created for this charge:
System-generated based on the active Sliding Fee Schedule information maintained on
the Sliding Fee Schedule Detail Maintenance dialog box and the patient having a Selfpay status for the charge.
The SIM code has an attached alert message:
The Alert Message field on the Payer tab of the Service Item Maintenance dialog box and
the payer has the contract associated with it.
Insurance Modification
Warning: The contract requires the primary diagnosis code to be one of the
following code(s):
The Required Diagnosis section on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the
service item entered on the Charge Entry dialog box.
Warning: According to the contract the following modifier code(s) are required for
this procedure: xyz:
The Required Modifiers section on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box for the
service item entered on the Charge Entry dialog box.
453
NextGen Healthcare
The rendering provider is not a participating provider of this contract:
The Participating Providers field on the Other tab on the Add/Modify Payer Information
dialog box.
Authorization is required for this procedure:
The Authorization Required check-box on the Contract Library Maintenance dialog box.
Referring Physician is required for this procedure:
Referring physician line items in EPM.
Payment Entry
The rendering physician is not a participating provider of this contract:
The Rendering column in the ledger area on the Payment Entry dialog box.
454
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Data\Fee Ticket Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Data and Fee Ticket Tab
The “Patient Data Sheet Assignment of Benefits Clause” prints at the bottom of the NextGen
hard-coded Patient Data Sheet.
Patient Data Sheet/Fee Ticket Options
Patient Data Sheet Assignment of Benefits Clause:
Type the wording that your practice uses for assignment of benefits as it should appear on the
footer of the Patient Data Sheet.
Patient Data Sheet/Fee Ticket
NOTE: Do not select the same option for both of these fields. If you do, the image and text will
overlap on the printed page.
Header Image Position:
Select Left, Center, or Right to set the position of your Header Image (Practice logo) on
Patient Data Sheets and Fee Tickets.
Header Text Position:
Select Left, Center, or Right to set the position of your Header text on your letters. The
header text that prints on Patient Data Sheets and Fee Tickets is the practice name and
address information from the practice master file.
455
NextGen Healthcare
Mask SSN on Patient Data Sheet/Fee Ticket:
Select this check-box to display only the last four digits of the Social Security numbers on
printed data sheets and fee tickets. The number displays in the format ### - ## - 1234. If
this check-box is cleared, then the numbers display in their entirety.
Fee Ticket Options
User-Defined 1 Name / User-Defined 2 Name:
On the Fee Ticket, you can choose any two of the following fields to print on the last line of the
Fee Ticket header.

















Appointment - Location
Appointment - UDF 1-2
Case Description
Case Employer
Case Number
Charts - UDF 1-8
Clinical - UDF 1-4
Encounter - Admitting
Encounter - Consult 1-2
Encounter - ENC 1-12
Encounter - UDF 1-4
Encounter Onset Date (for example, the date of injury)
Family Income
Family Size
Next Future Appointment
Primary Care Physician
SF (Sliding Fee) Discount Percent
User-Defined 3 Name:
Enter the name you want to use to label the user-defined 3 field. This information prints on the
fourth line of the fee ticket.
User-Defined 3 Data Source:
Select a data source to correspond with name entered in the User-Defined 3 Name field. The
data sources you can select include the same fields used in the User-Defined 1 & 2 Fields and
also includes two additional options:
Last Global Exp. Dt:
Pulls data from the After Care Days field on the Service Item Library Maintenance dialog
box and calculates the after-care expiration date. If the patient's chart has encounters
with multiple after-care procedures, the after-care expiration date furthest in the future
prints on the fee ticket.
Weight/Height:
Pulls data from the Height and Weight fields on the Clinical tab on the Encounter
Maintenance dialog box. This information is pulled from the last encounter.
If no data is in the field where data is being pulled from, this field is blank on the fee ticket.
However, if a name was entered in the User-Defined 3 Name field, the name prints with or
without data. This information prints on the fourth line of the fee ticket.
456
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Include Last 4 Diags on default Fee Ticket:
Select this check-box to print a patient's last four diagnosis codes and descriptions at the bottom
of the standard (default) fee ticket. These diagnosis codes are based on the most recent
encounter date and the order that the diagnosis is attached to the encounter. If less than four
codes are attached to the most recent encounter, additional codes are extracted from previous
encounters until there are four total. If this check-box is not selected, no diagnoses print on the
fee ticket. See the NextGen® EPM User Guide for additional information about printing diagnosis
codes on fee tickets.
Limit Last 4 Diags to the previous encounter:
If you select the Include Last 4 Diags on default Fee Ticket check-box, you can also select this
check-box to limit the four diagnoses to be only from the previous encounter instead of from all
previous encounters. This setting prevents too many old diagnoses from being printed on the fee
ticket.
For example, if a patient only has two diagnoses on the current encounter but has only one
diagnosis on the next most recent encounter, only the older diagnosis prints on the fee ticket.
However, if two newer diagnoses are added, that one older diagnosis will no longer print.
Include All Same Day Events for Patient on Fee Ticket:
Select this check-box to include multiple events for the same day on the patient's fee ticket. The
application can display up to three events on the fee ticket, listing them in chronological order for
the day. The events print in the Event box on the fee ticket.
When displaying more than one event on the fee ticket, the application uses the short name for
the event. Short names for events must be setup ahead of time in the Scheduling Administration
section of the application.
Hide fee ticket footer:
Select this check-box to prevent the footer from printing on the fee ticket. Instead, the fee ticket
body image stretches to the area where the footer normally prints.
Use Event Image in body if it exists:
Select this check-box to print an Event Image fee ticket when a fee ticket is attached to an
event/resource and an appointment is scheduled and an encounter is created. If this option is not
selected or an event image does not exist, the application goes to the next level to find an image
and continues this process until an image if found.
If there is, and the Practice Preference of Use Event Image in body if it exists is selected, the fee
ticket prints correctly before and after a check in.
When printing from an appointment:
Determine whether to use appointment detail or the encounter complaint when users print fee
tickets from an appointment by selecting one of the following:


Use appointment detail on Fee Ticket
Use encounter complaint on Fee Ticket
When printing from an encounter:
Determine whether to use appointment detail or the encounter complaint when users print fee
tickets from an encounter by selecting one of the following:


Use encounter complaint on Fee Ticket
Use appointment detail on Fee Ticket
457
NextGen Healthcare
EHR Tab
This tab controls various settings related to the NextGen® EHR application.
NOTE: Training on these settings will be covered during a separate EHR training session.
458
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Encounters Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Encounters Tab
User-Defined Fields:
This scrollable list box enables you to add field labels for multiple fields. The user-defined fields
include:




4 User-Defined fields
50 Encounter Specific fields
4 Clinical User-Defined fields
4 Billing & Collection fields
All fields display as selections for the Encounter Specific field in the Encounter Lookup dialog
box.
User-Defined 1 – 4:
Enter practice-specific field names to label these fields with information that the practice
would like to track in the Create Encounter and Encounter Maintenance dialog boxes and
reports.
Encounter Specific 1 – 50:
Enter the encounter-specific user-defined field labels for the encounter. Use the scroll bar
to access all Encounter Specific fields.
These fields represent information that is specific to a single encounter. They display on
the Encounter Specific tab of the Create Encounter and Encounter Maintenance dialog
boxes in NextGen EPM. If labels are not entered, then you cannot access the Encounter
Specific tab.
459
NextGen Healthcare
Clinical UD 1 – 4:
Enter the clinical user-defined field labels for the encounter. These fields are located on
the Clinical tab of the Encounter Maintenance dialog box, and represent information that
is specific to a single encounter. If a label is not entered, then the field will not display.
Bill & Collection UD 1 – 4:
Enter the user-defined field labels for the billing and collection information for the
encounter. These fields can be accessed and used in the following areas of the
application:



The Billing & Collections tab on the Encounter Maintenance dialog box
The Form and Label Data Repository
The following Accounts Receivable and Encounter reports: Billed Encounters,
Unbilled Encounters, Collections Follow-up, and Daily Encounters
Default Patient Type:
Select the default patient type to be used when creating your encounters. Patient types are
defined in the Master Lists.
Require Patient Type:
Select this check-box to require users to select a patient type when they create an encounter.
Patient types are defined in the Master Lists.
Delay Medicare Billing By [0-30] Days from Encounter Date:
Enter the number of days to hold Medicare batch billing starting from the encounter date. This
setting allows charges billed to Medicare to be held for the specified number of days before
claims are generated. For example, if the encounter date is July 1 and the hold days are set to 5,
then the hold date is July 6. The hold date is calculated when a user attaches a Medicare payer
to an unbilled encounter. The hold date then displays in the Hold Until Date field on the Billing &
Collections tab in Encounter Maintenance in EPM.
NOTE: Even though this setting works only with batch billing, users can still force billing
with demand billing for specific encounters. If an encounter is still within the allotted hold
days, it does not display during encounter lookup and, therefore, is not in the list for batch
billing. You can also delay billing for other payers. If you do so, the payer setting
overrides delayed Medicare billing.
Require Rendering Physician:
Select this check-box to require a Rendering Physician for the encounter.
Require Referring Physician:
Select this check-box to require a Referring Physician for the encounter.
Prompt to default Rendering Physician for patient's chart:
Select this check-box to display a message when a user creates an encounter that asks if the
user wants to use the rendering physician as the default.
460
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Prompt to default Referring Physician for patient's chart:
Select this check-box to display a message when a user creates an encounter that asks if the
user wants to use the referring physician as the default on the patient's chart. When you set a
referring physician to be the default for a patient's chart, the referring physician's name
automatically displays in the fields on the following dialog boxes:




The Referring Physician field on the Add Appointment dialog box
The Referring field on the Patient Chart dialog box, Encounters tab under the Providers
section
The Default Referring Physician field on the Chart Details dialog box
The Referring field on the Create Encounter dialog box
NOTE: The name for the default referring physician prints under Referring Physician on
the Patient Data Sheet in EPM.
Default Referring from Rendering Physician for Encounter:
Select this check-box to default the Referring Physician from the Rendering field when creating
an encounter. For more information on this option, refer to the Capturing General Encounter
Information section of the Encounters chapter in the NextGen EPM User Guide.
NOTE: The name for the default referring physician prints under Referring Physician on
the Patient Data Sheet in EPM.
Do not allow free text Referring Physicians:
Select this check-box to prevent users from typing in a physician name in an applicable field.
Instead, users must choose the provider from a list. This list is setup in the Provider master file.
Prompt for Bulk Rebilling Reason:
Select this check-box to require a reason for rebilling a claim. The reason then will be populated
to all encounters associated with the claim.
Copy appointment details to encounter complaint:
Select this check-box to copy appointment details to encounter complaints when someone
checks in an appointment.
At check-in, show same day encounters:
Providers:
Select the kinds of providers that you would like to capture in the encounter. The items that are
checked display on the Encounter Maintenance dialog box.
Admitting:
The admitting physician for the encounter.
First Consulting:
The primary consulting physician for the encounter.
NOTE: For Optik users, this check-box must be checked to display in the Optik
application. When you create an encounter, the First Consulting field displays on the
Create Encounter dialog box. The name you select in the First Consulting field
displays in the Consulting field on the Optik order form.
Second Consulting:
The secondary consulting physician for the encounter.
461
NextGen Healthcare
Supervisor:
Indicates an additional provider (such as a Physician Assistant, Midwife, or Nurse
Practitioner) with a Supervising Physician's credentials, based on payer requirements.
Provider information is setup on the Modify Provider Information dialog box.
Require Supervisor:
For "Incident-To" billing, select this check-box to require a supervisor on the Encounter
Maintenance dialog box. For more information on "Incident-To" billing, see the NextGen®
EPM Claims Guide.
When copying from last encounter: Copy
Select the kind of information to copy from the last encounter to the new encounter when a user
clicks the Last Enc button when scheduling an appointment in the Appointment Book in EPM. The
options are:
Encounter Details:
Copies the last encounter information to the current encounter. If the last encounter has a
patient type of new patient, the current encounter will also have a patient type of new
patient. In this case, you would want to modify the encounter information after it is copied.
Insurance:
Copies the insurance information that was applied to the last encounter to the current
encounter. This check-box bypasses a message that asks if users want to copy the
previous insurance only if the click the Last Enc button. If users do not click Last Enc, the
message will display to give the users the option to copy insurance at their discretion.
Diagnosis:
Copies the diagnosis from the last encounter to the current encounter. Diagnoses can be
copied from EPM to EPM, from EHR to EHR, from EHR to EPM or vice versa.
Require Facility
If the practice does regular UB92 claims billing, select the situation in which a user is required to
select a facility on the Create Encounter or Encounter Maintenance dialog boxes. Clear the
check-box if the practice does enhanced UB92 claims billing.
Always – Select to always require that a facility is selected.
NOTE: If you select Always, you must also select the HCFA Box 32 and the Facility
Location check-boxes on the Locations List dialog box for the Locations master file. Only
if Admit or Discharge date is populated – Select to require that a facility is selected only
when a date has been entered in the Admit Date or Discharge Date field.
Case Management:
Default Patient Type:
Select the default patient type to use when users create new encounters with new cases.
Copy referring from appt on case-related encounters – Select this check-box to use the referring
provider from the appointment as the default whenever a user creates a new encounter from an
appointment with a case attached. If the check-box is cleared, then the referring provider from the
case is the default.
462
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
When creating a new encounter, set types to:
Select the encounter type(s) that should default ion the Create Encounter dialog box for every
new encounter created.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Check with your NextGen Project Manager and/or Implementation
Specialist before selecting any of these options.



Select Billable for EPM
Select Clinical for EHR
Select Optical for Optik
463
NextGen Healthcare
External Tab
The External tab is used when an EMPI (Enterprise Master Person Index) interface and/or
Scheduling interface is implemented between NextGen an external system. The specified
External System and EMPI URL for the current practice override those defined in Enterprise
Preferences > External tab.
464
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Forms Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Forms Tab
Standard Header Information:
Use the up and down arrows to set the offset information fields that enable you to set the location
of the listed Letter Header Information. Use a positive number to move the information down or
to the right. Use a negative number to move the information up or to the left.
Credit Card Acceptance:
Select the credit cards that your practice accepts. Options include VISA, MasterCard, American
Express, and Discover. The selected credit card emblems display on the forms along with
instructions to the patient for submitting a credit card payment.
Header Options
The Header Options information displays at the top of the letter. By default, all of the check-boxes
are selected.
NOTE: If you want to print letters on demand on your practice's pre-printed letterhead, you must
clear all the Header Options check-boxes.
Show Checks Payable:
Whom to make the check payable to when making a payment.
Show Remit Address:
The remit to address for payments and correspondence.
465
NextGen Healthcare
Show Addressee
The name and address of the recipient of the letter.
Show Demand Letter Label
The type of letter being sent and the encounter number for reference.
Show Amount Return:
A field labeled Show Amount Paid Here. This field is used by the recipient to enter the
amount they are remitting.
Show Default Address / Ins Change Info:
A check-box for the recipient to check if the addressee's address or insurance information
has changed and to indicate any change on the reverse side of the letter.
Show Default Return Top Portion:
Instructions for the recipient to detach and return the top portion with their payment.
Form/Label Templates
Hide Patient Insurance name when expired or deactivated:
When selected, this option will prevent a patient’s insurance from printing on Form
Templates and Label Templates if the insurance is expired or deactivated.
NOTE: Expired/Deactivated insurance does not print on Form/Label Templates for
the following Data Repository fields:
 Patient Primary Name
 Patient Secondary Name
Export Options
Delimiter:
Select the character you want to use as a field delimiter when exporting statements to an
ASCII file.
Text Qualifier:
Select the character to be used to encapsulate and distinguish the text as a field in the
statement export file.
Stock ID:
Type the code, comprised of one letter and five digits that will populate the Stock ID
segment of the A1 header in the EDI export file that is generated from NextGen EPM.
466
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
General Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – General Tab
General Options
Check for duplicate SSN:
Use this check-box when adding a new People Maintenance record or editing existing people, to
see if another person in the enterprise has the same Social Security number. If there is a match,
you will be shown a warning message to prevent duplicate entry. The warning message can be
overridden.
Check for duplicate last name, birth date, sex:
Select this check-box to help prevent adding duplicate patients by checking to see if anyone in
the enterprise has the same last name, birth date and sex. Of course, twins of the same sex will
always display, but can be ignored.
Auto-closing:
Select this check-box to automatically close out the practice at midnight. Any activity entered after
midnight will appear on the next process date. If this is left unchecked, then the system must be
manually closed through the Practice Closing Process. For more information, see the "Closing
Out" chapter of the NextGen EPM User Guide.
Privatize patient list:
Select this check-box if you do not want your practice to display when View History (a "right-click"
option) is chosen on People/Patient Search dialog boxes.
467
NextGen Healthcare
Display city on people lookup:
Select this check-box to display the City field on the People Lookup dialog box. The City field
enables users to enter the city from a person's address as criteria when they perform a person
lookup.
Enable eligibility\referral:
Select this check-box to provide access to menu items for the Eligibility/Referral System. This
field only displays if you have purchased the Managed Care Server module.
Prompt for password when application is restored from minimized session:
Select this check-box to require users to re-enter their password when restoring a minimized
session window of the application.
Enable outsourcing:
Select this check-box to enable users who are working with a patient chart to outsource the
patient's outstanding charges to an external collection agency. For more outsourcing information,
see the chapter "Collections" in the NextGen EPM User Guide.
Allow alphanumeric characters in SSN:
Select this option so that the Social Security number field accepts the entry of any combination of
upper or lower-case characters and numbers, not to exceed a maximum of nine characters.
Exclude expired patients default:
Select this check-box to have the Exclude Expired Patients check-box always selected by default
on the Patient Lookup dialog box.
Enable Case Management:
Select this check-box to make the Case Management features available.
Allow encounter payers to be edited when case is attached:
Select to enable users to change the payers that are selected on Encounter Insurance Selection
dialog box. If the check-box is not selected, then users cannot change the payers that are
selected on Encounter Insurance Selection dialog box if the payers are the same ones listed on
the case. However, users can still open the insurance and edit the information. If the payers on
the encounter are different from the ones on the case, then the user can change the payers in the
encounter.
Display contact preference:
Select this check-box so that EPM displays the Contact Preference field on the Person and
Patient Demographic dialog boxes. The field enables users to specify the method to use when
they contact a patient. You can make contact preference information required in Practice
Preferences on the Chart tab and on the Appt Scheduling tab.
Display L4SSN on person lookup results:
Select this check-box to display only the last four digits of the Social Security numbers in the
results of a person lookup. The SSN column in the results displays the numbers in the format
### - ## - 1234. If this check-box is cleared, then the SSNs display in their entirety.
Check for duplicate payer name, address, or contact phone:
This setting makes EPM compare the payer name that a user types to all other payer names in
the Payer master file. If this option is enabled when a new insurance is attached to a person, a
check is performed for an existing payer based on the payer name, address, or contact phone
number. The user can then select from a list of existing payers or can ignore the list and type the
new plan name. This setting takes effect only in conjunction with the Payer master Prevent
modifying plan name on insurance maint check-box.
468
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Force the selection of an existing payer name, address, or contact phone:
Select this option so that when a user is attaching insurance to an encounter and is notified of a
potential existing payer, the Ignore button is disabled on the Potential Existing Payer dialog box
and they must select an existing payer. To enable this check-box, you must select the Check for
duplicate payer name, address, or contact phone check-box.
Exclude all unknown SSNs:
This field is enabled when the Require SSN check-box is selected on the Chart tab. Select this
check-box to exclude unknown Social Security numbers from the check for duplicate SSNs.
Unknown SSNs include 123-45-6789 and numbers in which all digits are the same (for example,
222-22-2222).
NOTE: When this check-box is selected, the Unknown SSN field is disabled.
Unknown SSN:
This field is enabled when the Require SSN check-box is selected on the Chart tab. Enter a
Social Security number in the Unknown SSN field that your practice uses as the default number
when a patient, such as a newborn infant, does not have a Social Security number. Because this
number can be applied to multiple patients, it is excluded from the check for duplicate SSNs.
Default Area Code:
Enter the area code that is used most frequently in your practice. This will default in the area code
for any phone number found in the system, but can be overwritten as necessary.
Payer User-Defined 1 Name:
Enter the name you want to assign to the payer. Once this field has been assigned a label it will
appear on the Add Payer Information dialog box under the Practice tab > Other tab.
Auto Logout Interval:
Use the up and down arrows to set the number of minutes that NextGen EPM uses to determine
when to automatically log you out if you are not using the system. For example, if you want the
system to log you out if you have not used it for 20 minutes, then enter "20" here. If you do not
want to use this feature, then enter "0".
Auto Minimization Interval:
Use the arrows to set the number of seconds that NextGen EPM remains viewable when it is not
being used. If that time passes and there has been no activity, the EPM automatically minimizes.
The minimization time interval is set in 15-second increments. The default value is zero. If the
interval is set to zero, automatic minimization does not occur. Whenever you change this interval,
EPM must be restarted for the setting to take effect.
Advisor Message:
Enter information that you want to display in the upper left area of the Advisor in NextGen EPM.
Advisor Hyperlink:
Type the URL of a Web page to attach to the Advisor Message. When users open the Advisor in
EPM, the message displays as a hyperlink that they can click on to view the associated Web
page.
NOTE: The Advisor Hyperlink only works when there is information in the Advisor
Message.
469
NextGen Healthcare
Medical Necessity State:
Select the state/location code from the Medical Necessity State drop-down list. The code is
broken down into a two digit state and one digit location (section of a state) code that enables you
to select a state and location according to the Local Medical Review Policy databases. The
location code is used for some states, but not all states.
This state displays as the default in the Medical Necessity State field on the Medical Necessity
dialog box used to submit a request. The Medical Necessity State field is required.
NOTE: This field only displays if you are licensed for Medical Necessity.
First Quarter Starts On:
If your practice needs to customize when the first quarter starts, select the starting date of the first
quarter. This setting customizes the fiscal year for EPM reporting, appointment lookup, eligibility
referral lookup, and waitlist lookup. For example, if you select the date Apr 1, then the first quarter
on reports ranges from April 1 to June 30.
Person Lookup Search By:
Select the default to use on the Patient Lookup dialog box for searching for patients by:
Med Rec Nbr
Person Nbr
Other ID Number
(Medical Record Number)
(Person Number)
Req on Relationship:
Click in the column to the right of the field that you want to make a required field when users
create or update a relationship to a person. These preferences apply when you validate a new or
existing contact, head of household, relationship, or insured. The following fields can be set as
required: Birth Date, Sex, Address, City, State, and Zip.
NOTE: When you update a chart or encounter guarantor, the address, city, state, and
ZIP code are always required. Date of birth and sex are always required when the
guarantor is not "Self".
Status Bar Information:
To display customized text in the status bar of EHR, EPM, and ICS, type the text in this field.
470
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Holidays Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Holidays Tab
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that you wait to enter the Holidays until after your Schedules
have been templates on the Resource’s calendar in Scheduling Administration.
Description:
Type a name for the holiday.
Start Date:
Enter the date that the holiday starts.
End Date:
Enter the date that the holiday ends.
Start Time:
Enter the time that the holiday starts.
End time:
Enter the time that the holiday ends.
471
NextGen Healthcare
Suspend Appointment Scheduling:
Select the check-box to prevent appointments from being scheduled on the holiday. If someone
tries to schedule a resource on a holiday, a message informs that the date is a global holiday and
the resource cannot be scheduled. Also, the resource is not available for Appointment Search
Ahead for the holiday or for a multiple-day event chain that includes the holiday.
When you select this check-box, you can select additional resource and category options.
NOTE: You can override this setting for a specific resource in the Scheduling Admin in
NextGen EPM.
Stop BBP:
Select the check-box to prevent the BBP schedules from running packages on the holiday. See
the NextGen® BBP User Guide for more information
NOTE: You can override this setting for a specific schedule in the Background Business
Processor.
Apply Holiday to These Resources:
Select the resources that you want to create template exceptions for based on the holiday
information.
NOTE: The template exceptions are created, but the appointment slot information does
not update until the nightly process runs or the process is manually run.
Apply Category To Resource's Templates
Select the category to apply to the time slots that are within the company holiday date and time
range.
NOTE: If you do not choose a category, then the existing categories that are present in
the resource's templates are removed and no category is assigned.
472
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Imaging Tab
This tab controls various settings related to the NextGen® ICS application.
NOTE: Training on ICS will be covered during a separate training session.
473
NextGen Healthcare
Invoices Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Invoices Tab
Invoice Options
Minimum Invoice Amount:
Select this check-box to designate a minimum balance to be used for printing an invoice.
For example, you might not want to spend the amount on postage if the account has a
zero balance.
Invoice Sort By:
Select one of the following sorting options: option to sort and print invoices in alphabetical
order by employer name or by invoice ID. Click the drop-down arrow and select either
Employer Name or Invoice ID. If you choose to sort invoices in alphabetical order by
employer name, the invoice ID is used as a secondary sort. For example, if you have
multiple invoices to print, all the invoices will first sort in alphabetical order. If there are
multiple invoices for one employer, those invoices will then be sorted in ascending order
by invoice number.
Show Grid Lines:
Select this option to include grid lines on invoices. By default, this check-box is not
selected. In addition, the setting of the Show Grid Lines check-boxes on the Demand
Invoices and Practice Invoices always overrides the setting on this check-box.
474
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Include Invoices of Status:
Select one of the following to print invoices with a status of:



Rebilled
Unbilled
Both Rebilled and Unbilled
Invoice History Options
Update last invoice dates:
Select this check-box to update the "Last Invoice Print Date" and the "Next Print Date" in
the employer's account profile each time an invoice is printed. The invoice status will also
be changed to "Billed".
Auto Note:
This feature is not available at this time.
Default header message
Type the message that you want to print at the top of the invoice. It can be up to 40
characters long. This is a good place to put in your practice's phone number used for
inquiries.
Default footer message:
Type the message that you want to print on the bottom of the statement. It is
recommended that you do not use hard returns (ENTER key) in the message.
475
NextGen Healthcare
Itemized Bills Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Itemized Bills Tab
Default header message:
Type the message that you want to print at the top of the statement. It can be up to 40 characters
long. This is a good place to put in your practice's phone number used for inquiries.
Default footer message:
Type the message that you want to print on the bottom of the statement. It is recommended that
you do not use hard returns (ENTER key) in the message.
Auto produce Itemized Bill when billing self-pays:
Select this check-box to automatically generate an itemized bill when billing for self-pay
encounters.
Suppress printing charge zero balance Itemized Bills:
Select this check-box to suppress the printing of itemized bills for self-pays with zero dollar
balances. When this check-box is checked, all charges selected to be billed for each encounter
will be totaled. If the total of the charges equals zero, the Itemized Bill will not print. This option
only applies if the Auto produce Itemized Bill when billing self-pays check-box is checked. The
default for the Suppress printing charge zero balance Itemized Bills check-box is unchecked. This
applies to both batch mode and demand mode.
476
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Detail Display Mode:
Select one of the following display options:
Show SIM:
Displays the SIM number and description
Show CPT4/Diag/Tax ID:
Displays the CPT4 code and description, the primary diagnosis for the charge, and the
tax ID for the rendering physician (for the encounter). For additional information, refer to
the Billing Encounters chapter of the NextGen® EPM User Guide.
Show unposted payments on Itemized Bill:
Select this check-box to display transactions that have been entered but not posted.
Suppress voided charges:
Select this check-box to suppress voided charges so they do not appear on the encounter
itemized bill.
Suppress transaction activity:
Select this check-box to suppress transactions so they do not appear on the encounter itemized
bill.
477
NextGen Healthcare
Libraries Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Libraries Tab
The default Libraries used by the practice are attached here.
Default Libraries
Diagnosis Code Library;
Select the Diagnosis Library to be used in the selected practice.
Service Item Library:
Select the Service Item Library to be used in the selected practice.
Claim Modifier Library:
Select the default Claim Modifier Library to be used for all payers in the selected practice,
if applicable.
NOTE: Payer specific libraries can be linked to those payers in the Payers table
> Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
NDC Library:
Select the NDC Library to be used in the selected practice.
478
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Claim Edits Library:
Select the default Claim Edits Library to be used for all payers in the selected practice.
NOTE: Payer specific libraries can be linked to those payers in the Payers table
> Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Self-Pay SIM Exception:
Select the SIM Exception to be used for all self-pay patients in the selected practice, if
applicable.
Eligibility Profile Library:
Select the default Eligibility Profile Library to be used for all RTS payers in the selected
practice, if applicable.
NOTE: Payer specific libraries can be linked to those payers in the Payers table
> Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Behavioral Health Billing Library:
Select the default Behavioral Health Billing Library to be used for all payers in the
selected practice, if applicable.
NOTE: Payer specific libraries can be linked to those payers in the Payers table
> Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Claim Print Library:
Select the default Claim Print Library to be used for all payers in the selected practice.
NOTE: Payer specific libraries can be linked to those payers in the Payers table
> Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Remittance Profile Library:
Select the default Remittance Profile Library to be used for all ERA payers in the selected
practice, if applicable.
NOTE: Payer specific libraries can be linked to those payers in the Payers table
> Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Claim Status Profile Library:
Select the default Claim Status Profile Library to be used for all RTS payers in the
selected practice, if applicable.
NOTE: Payer specific libraries can be linked to those payers in the Payers table
> Practice tab > Libraries sub-tab.
Non-Coordinate SIM Library:
Select the default Non-Coordinated SIM Library to be used for all payers in the selected
practice, if applicable.
SIM Maintenance Options
SIM fields: show dept, modality and component:
Select this check-box to display the Department, Modality and Component fields in the
Service Item Library.
479
NextGen Healthcare
Medication Tab
The Medication tab includes settings that impact the Medications Module in NextGen® EHR.
NOTE: These settings will be covered during a separate EHR training session.
480
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
NextGenEDI Uploading Tab
The NextGenEDI Uploading tab is for clients that utilize the services available from QSI/NextGen
for printing and mailing their statements and/or letters generated in EPM. By entering the client’s
NextGenEDI login credentials, statement and letter export files can be automatically uploaded
from EPM to QSI/NextGen when the files are created.
NOTE: These settings will be covered during a separate training session.
481
NextGen Healthcare
Order Module Tab
This includes three tabs (All, Lab/Rad, Imm) with settings that impact the Orders Module in
NextGen® EHR.
NOTE: These settings will be covered during a separate EHR training session.
482
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Patient Information Bar Tab
This tab includes settings that impact the patient information bar at the top of the screen in
NextGen® EHR.
NOTE: These settings will be covered during a separate EHR training session.
483
NextGen Healthcare
Patient Pay Tab
The Patient Pay tab is used only by clients utilizing the Patient Payment Import feature in
NextGen® EPM. With this feature, patient payments are sent directly to a bank. The bank then
generates an electronic 835 formatted file for those patient payments and sends the file to the
practice. The practice then imports the electronic payment file into EPM much like an ERA file
from insurance.
Patient Pay Import
Default Transaction Code:
Select the default transaction code to use during Patient Pay import.
Do not post to encounters in a bad debt status:
Select this check-box to prevent automatically posting money to encounters in Bad Debt
status during Patient Pay import. If the only available encounters are in Bad Debt status,
the patient payment is treated as an unapplied payment.
Do not post to accounts on a budget:
Select this check-box to prevent posting payments to accounts that are in budget status.
Include tracking description in Import Posting Report:
Select this check-box to append the tracking description to the description on the Import
Posting Report. This expansion of the tracking description enables the report to report
back credit card information when it is present in the Patient Pay ERA file.
Visa / Discover / MasterCard / Other / American Express / Check:
Select the Transaction Code to be used with each type of patient payment.
484
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Payment Processing Tab
The Payment Processing tab is for clients utilizing an integrated payment processing service
between NextGen® EPM and a third party vendor such as TransFirst or InstaMed. This
functionality sends a real-time electronic transaction from EPM to the third party vendor when a
patient credit card or check payment is entered in EPM. The vendor then returns a real-time
approval or denial transaction back to EPM.
485
NextGen Healthcare
Printing Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Printing Tab
The Printing tab allows for the selection of specific printers to which documents generated from
NextGen® EPM should be sent. Preferences for orientation (landscape vs. portrait), printer tray,
and number of copies can also be defined.
These printer settings apply to all users within the practice. However, each user has the ability to
make alternate printer selections in their General User Preferences > Printing tab. User
Preference settings will override these Practice level settings.
Available Documents:
The various documents that can be printed from NextGen® EPM are displayed. To define a
printer for a specific document, right-click on that document and select Open from the menu.
Printer Name / Orientation / Tray / Size / # Copies:
Select the printer, orientation, tray, size, and number of copies for the selected document
486
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Provider Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Provider Tab
Up to 12 types of providers can be recorded for patients on the Patient Information window >
Providers tab. For example, a Family Practice/Internal Medicine clinic may want to record the
various types of specialists that their patients see. Examples might include OB/Gyn,
Cardiologist, Dermatologist, etc.
The types of providers to be recorded for patients in the practice are defined on this tab.
NOTE: Primary Care Provider (PCP), Rendering Provider and Referring Provider are
standard fields within the NextGen application.
Provider 1 – 12:
Enter up to 12 types of providers for the practice.
NOTE: The actual providers that will be recorded for patients must exist in File Maintenance >
System Master Files > Providers table.
487
NextGen Healthcare
Reports Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Reports Tab
Report Server
This section is used only by clients utilizing the NextGen® Report Server. The selections
made here determine which types of reports in NextGen® EPM cannot be run from the
NGProd database but must be run from the Report Server instead.
Report Options
Default External Charge Import Agent:
Select this option to set the DocuScan agent to whatever you want and still be able to run
the DocuScan report. If this field is blank, the default used will be DocuScan File Import.
Report Header/Footer Defaults
Line Wrap Text:
Select this option to wrap information in a report column to the next line when all the
information does not fit on a single line. If this check-box is not selected, an ellipsis (...)
prints at the end of the line when the information does not fit.
Show Practice Title:
Select this option to automatically select the Practice Title check-box on the Customize
Report Header/Footer dialog box. The practice name then displays in the header of all
applicable reports.
488
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Resources Tab
The Resources tab includes external resource settings that impact the Problems, Procedures,
Medications, Allergies and Orders Modules in NextGen® EHR.
NOTE: These settings will be covered during a separate EHR training session.
489
NextGen Healthcare
RTS Tab
The RTS tab includes settings that impact Real-Time Transaction Server functionality within
NextGen® EPM.
NOTE: Setup and training for the RTS module will be covered in a separate training
session by a NextGen® RTS representative.
490
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Sliding Fee Tab
The Sliding Fee tab is used only by clients utilizing Sliding Fee Schedules in NEXTEGEN® EPM.
Sliding Fee Schedules are most commonly used by CHC clients providing automatic discounts
and adjustments to charges for patients meeting specific family size and annual income criteria.
Disable sliding fee adjustments for encounters that have insurance attached:
Select this check-box to disable the ability to perform a “demand” sliding fee adjustment on the
remaining patient balance after insurance has paid.
NOTE: This options affects encounter based sliding fee schedules only.
Disable sliding fee adjustments for encounters that have a zero balance:
Select this check-box to disable sliding fee adjustments on encounters that already have a
balance of $0.00
Allow family size and income re-verification override:
Select this check-box to display the following prompt to users during charge posting on
encounters where the number of Re-Verify Days has been exceeded. By clicking “Yes”, sliding
fee adjustments will be applied even though the family size/income information has not been
updated.
491
NextGen Healthcare
Display Percent of Poverty:
Select this check-box to display Percent of Poverty in patient charts as defined in the Patient
Responsibility table in File Maintenance.
NOTE: See the Patient Responsibility section of this workbook for more information.
If amount due is less than minimum value or flat rate, do not slide:
Select this check-box to prevent positive sliding fee adjustments to increase the amount due up to
the defined minimum value/flat rate. This would occur in cases where the balance is less than
the minimum value/flat rate.
Sliding Fee Alerts:
Select or deselect one or more sections of the System Alert for sliding fee patients to customize
what is displayed to users.
Sliding Fee Adjustment Rounding:
Select whether or not sliding fee adjustments should be rounded. Options include the following:



Round down at 4, up at 5
Only round up
Do not round
Sliding Fee Adjustment Type:
Select one of the following:

Real-time Adjustments
Sliding Fee Adjustments will take place real-time during charge posting

Batch Adjustments
Sliding Fee Adjustments will be processed for multiple encounters in batch mode from
the File > Processes > Sliding Fee Batch Adjustment menu
NOTE: This setting affects both Encounter Based and Line Item Based schedules.
492
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Statements Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Statements Tab
Statement Options
Acct Minimum Statement Amt Range:
Select this check-box if the Account Minimum Statement Amount Range is to be used to
designate the balance an account must have in order to qualify to receive a statement.
Guarantors with an account balance within the defined range will qualify to have a statement
generated.
From / To:
Enter the dollar amounts that define the balance an account must have in order to qualify
to receive a statement.
One of the following two options must be selected. The selected option will be used to determine
whether or not an account meets the defined Acct Minimum Statement Amount Range.
Acct Patient Balance Only:
Select this option if the patient balance on all encounters for the account should
determine if a statement will be generated. The total patient balance on all encounters
must fall within the defined Account Minimum Statement Amount Range defined above in
order for the guarantor to qualify to receive a statement.
493
NextGen Healthcare
Acct Patient + Insurance Balance:
Select this option if the patient balance plus insurance balance on all encounters for
the account should determine if a statement will be generated. The total patient plus
insurance balance on all encounters for the account must fall within the defined Account
Minimum Statement Amount Range defined above in order for the guarantor to qualify to
receive a statement.
Show only encounters with patient balance:
This option is available only if the Acct Patient Balance Only option has been selected above.
Select this check-box if only those encounters on the account with an outstanding patient balance
should display on the statement. If an encounter has an outstanding insurance balance but no
patient balance, the encounter will not display on the statement. If this option is not selected, all
encounters with an outstanding balance will display on the statement, whether the balance is out
to insurance or to patient.
Check for statement exceptions:
Select this check-box if a Statement Exceptions Report should generate during the statement run
process showing any encounters that do not have a rendering provider.
Display credit balances on statement:
Select this option if the total Unapplied Credits (account and encounter) should display on the
statement. An unapplied credit is a patient payment that has been entered but not applied to a
charge.
NOTE: The total unapplied credits for an account/guarantor will display in the footer of
the statement in place of the defined “Default footer message” defined below.
Display detail information on statement:
Select this check-box for “detail” statements. Detail statements will display a separate line for
each charge on the encounter. Additional lines for each posted transaction (payment,
adjustment, refund) will display below the charge.
Do not select this check-box for “non-detail” statements. Non-detail statements will display a
separate line for each charge on the encounter. Total posted transactions (payments,
adjustment, refunds) will be included on the same line as the charge.
Insurance payments generate statements:
Select this check-box if accounts should receive an additional statement in the next run because
an insurance payment was posted to one or more encounters for the account.
Display encounter nbr on detail info stmt:
Select this check-box to show the encounter number on the detail statements.
NOTE: This only applies if the “Display detail information on statement” option is
selected above.
Display full patient name on detail info stmt:
Select this check-box to display the patient's full name in the ledger section of the statement in
the format Last name, First name. If this check-box is not selected, only the first name displays on
the statement.
Exclude last / history payment:
Select this check-box to exclude encounters that were paid in full since the last statement from
appearing on the next statement. If this option is not selected, encounters that were paid in full
will appear on the next statement showing the payment and a $0.00 balance.
494
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Display practice phone number:
Select this check-box to show the practice's phone number in the header section of statements.
NOTE: The practice phone number from the Practices table in File Maintenance is used.
Show grid lines:
Select this check-box to print alternating rows of gray and white grid lines in the body section of
statements.
Exclude void charge/ transaction activity:
Select this check-box to prevent voided charges and their associated transactions from appearing
on statements.
Include outsourced charges:
Select this check-box to include any encounters/charges that have been outsourced to an
external agency on statements.
NOTE: The outsourcing feature in NextGen® EPM is enable in Practice Preferences >
General tab.
Include remit phone number on export:
Select this check-box to include the practice's phone number in the header section of statements
that are exported to a third party for processing (printing/mailing).
NOTE: The practice phone number from the Practices table in File Maintenance is used.
Prefix practice ID onto account number:
Select this check-box to prefix account numbers on statements (printed or exported) with the four
digit “Practice ID” from the Practices table in File Maintenance. The account numbers will appear
as 16 digit numbers. For example: 0001000000001234 where 0001 is the practice ID and 1234
is the account number.
NOTE: For exported statements, the third party vendor must be able to accommodate
this extended number format.
Order by patient name within each statement:
Select this check-box to display multiple patients/family members on a single statement in
alphabetical order by first name. If not selected, patients/family members will display in numerical
order by encounter number.
Suppress SSN from statement:
Select this check-box to prevent a patient’s SSN from printing on statements when an employer is
the guarantor on the encounter. This is for patient privacy purposes.
495
NextGen Healthcare
Statement History Options
Update last statement dates:
This check-box sets the default for the Update Last Statement Dates option on the Statement
Options window used when processing statements. If selected, the option will be preselected
and the Last Statement Print Date will therefore be updated on the Account Profile window for all
guarantors/accounts in the statement run.
Update dates on forced statements:
This check-box sets the default for the Update Dates on Forced Statements option on the
Statement Options window used when processing statements. If selected, the option will be
preselected and the Last Statement Print Date will therefore be updated on the Account Profile
window for any guarantor/account that had the Generate Statement Next Run option selected.
Upload export file to NextGenEDI:
Statement Breaks
Select one of the following:
Break by guarantor:
Select this option to print one statement for accounts/guarantors that includes all patients
on the account.
Break by patient:
Select this option to print multiple statements for accounts/guarantors. A separate
statement will print for each patient on the account.
Print One Statement
Select one of the following:
For Each Practice:
Select this option to print one statement for accounts/guarantors that includes encounters
from all rendering providers at all locations within the practice.
For Each Provider:
Select this option to print multiple statements for accounts/guarantors. A separate
statement will print for each rendering provider seen within the practice.
For Each Location:
Select this option to print multiple statements for accounts/guarantors. A separate
statement will print for each location visited within the practice.
496
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Number of Days Between Statements
Existing Accounts:
Select the Number of Days between Statements for existing accounts. This number represents
the number of days in the statement cycle. When a statement is generated for an existing
account/guarantor, the number of days defined must pass before the account/guarantor will
qualify for their next statement.
New Accounts:
Select the Number of Days between Statements for new accounts. A new account is created
when a guarantor is selected for the first time on a patient’s encounter. This number represents
the number of days that must pass from the date of that encounter before a new
account/guarantor will qualify for their first statement.
NOTE: When NextGen® EPM is first implemented, all accounts/guarantors are
considered to be new accounts.
Statement Sort By
Select one of the following:
Account ID:
Select this option to sort each batch of statements numerically by account number.
Last Name:
Select this option to sort each batch of statements alphabetically by account last name.
Pay This Amt:
Select this option to sort each batch of statements by the dollar amount in the Please Pay
This Amount box found in the footer of statements. The account with the largest amount
will print first in the batch and the account with the smallest amount will print last.
Zip Code:
Select this option to sort each batch of statements numerically by zip code.
497
NextGen Healthcare
Late Fee
Click this button to set the default parameters for late fees on accounts/guarantors that are
delinquent with their payments. When generating statements, a late fee will be added to the
statement for any account/guarantor that meets the defined parameters.
Default header message:
Enter a message (up to 40 characters) that will print in the header section of statements.
Default body message:
Enter a message (up to 40 characters) that will print in the body section of statements after the
last encounter listed.
Default footer message:
Enter a message (up to 255 characters) that will print in the footer section of statements.
NOTE: If the “Display credit balances on statement” option is selected above, the total
unapplied credits for an account/guarantor will display in the footer of the statement in
place of the defined “Default footer Message”.
Acceptable Payment Parameters
The Statement Counter on the Account Profile window is incremented by 1 each time a statement
is generated for an account/guarantor. If the account/guarantor remits a payment that meets the
parameters defined here, the Statement Counter will automatically be reset to 0.
Minimum flat dollar payment amount:
Select this check-box to define an acceptable payment dollar amount. For example, if
set to $50.00, the statement counter will be reset to 0 for any account/guarantor that
remits a payment greater than or equal to $50.
Acceptable % of self-pay balance:
Select this check-box to define an acceptable payment percentage amount. For
example, if set to 50%, the statement counter will be reset to 0 for any account/guarantor
that remits a payment greater than or equal to 50% of their outstanding self-pay balance.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If both a flat dollar amount and a percentage amount are defined,
the account/guarantor payment must meet both parameters in order for the Statement
Counter to reset for the account. The counter does not reset if one OR the other
parameter is met. The counter resets if one AND the other parameter is met.
498
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Example 1:
Minimum flat dollar payment amount = $25
Acceptable % of self-pay balance = 100%
If the guarantor has a $5 balance, a $5 payment will not reset the statement counter to 0
because even though it’s 100% of the balance, it is still less than the minimum flat dollar
amount defined.
Example 2:
Minimum flat dollar payment amount = $5
Acceptable % of self-pay balance = 100%
If the guarantor has a $25 balance, a $20 payment will not reset the statement counter to
0 because even though it’s greater than $5, it is still less than acceptable % of self-pay
balance defined.
Default Dunning Messages:
Select the appropriate set of Dunning Messages to appear on statements.
NOTE: The messages are related to the age of the account/guarantor’s outstanding selfpay balance.
Statement Aging Date
Select one of the following:
Charge Service Date:
Select this option if the outstanding balances should be aged at the bottom of the
statement based on the Service Date indicated on the charges.
Encounter Patient Responsibility Date:
Select this option if the outstanding balances should be aged at the bottom of the
statement based on the Patient Responsibility Date indicated on the encounter.
NOTE: This date occurs on the encounter when the balances on all charges have been
settled to the Pat Amt bucket and there is no remaining balance in the Ins1, Ins2 or Ins3
Amt buckets in Balance Control.
Encounter Date:
Select this option if the outstanding balances should be aged at the bottom of the
statement based on the Billable Date indicated on the encounter.
499
NextGen Healthcare
Tasks Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Tasks Tab
The Tasks tab is used in conjunction with the Worklog Manager module in NextGen® EPM.
NOTE: Setup of this tab and training on Worklog Manager will be covered during
Advanced Training or during a separate WebEx training session.
Required Fields:
Select the fields that should be required when a user creates a new task:









500
Subject
Details
Status
Priority
Assigned To
Start Date
Follow Up Date
Expiration Date
Task Subgrouping 1 & 2
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
When Status is Completed:
Select the fields that should be required when a user completes a task:



Require Completed By
Require Completion Date
Require Completion Reason
Select the fields that should default information when a user completes a task:


Default Completed By with Current User
Default Completion Date with Current Date
Select the fields that should not be modified when a user completes a task:



Do Not Allow Past Completion Dates
Do Not Allow Modification of Completion Date
Do Not Allow Modification of Completed By
Claim Edits
Skip claim edit with completed tasks:
Select this option to allow claim edits to pass when the task associated with it is complete. If the
preference is turned on and the severity is set to something other than Warning, then when an
edit triggers and there is already a completed task associated with it, the severity resets to
Warning for that line item on the Claims Productions Status report. This severity allows the claim
to be created clean when it otherwise would have created a dirty claim.
NOTE: The default is that this setting is turned off, therefore, any claim edit continues to
display regardless of whether the tasks are completed. The claim edit is still created with
the severity you assigned to it in Claim Edit Library Maintenance.
501
NextGen Healthcare
Taxes Tab
The Taxes tab includes settings related to the application of taxes to charges in EPM.
Enable Tax Charges:
Select this check-box to enable Tax Rate functionality for the practice.
Tax Rate Library
Select the default Tax Rate Library to be utilized by the practice.
Enable Tax Exemptions:
Select this check-box to enable Tax Exemption functionality for the practice.
Tax Exemption Library:
Select the Tax Exemption Library to be utilized by the practice.
Consider Rx status for taxes:
Specific SIM codes may be tax exempt for patients that have a prescription on file for those services.
Select this check-box if the “Rx on File” indicator on charges sent from EHR should be used to
determine if the charges are tax exempt based on settings in the Tax Exemption Library. An “Rx”
column displays on the Charge Posting screen. Charges sent from EHR with an “Rx on File”
indicator will have a green checkmark in the “Rx” column.
Do not select this check-box if the “Rx on File” indicator on charges sent from EHR should not be
used to determine if the charges are tax exempt.
502
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Roll up tax charges on patient statements and encounter bills:
Select this check-box to have all tax charges display as a singled rolled up tax code with a total
tax amount on patient Statements and Encounter Bills.
Caption:
This field is required if the above option is selected. Enter a caption for the single rolled
up tax code and tax amount on Statements and Encounter Bills.
Apply all tax charges at line item level:
Select this check-box to have all tax charges applied at the line item level. If selected, Tax Rate
Libraries cannot be setup in File Maintenance to apply tax charges at the encounter level.
NOTE: If the “Enable Advanced Service Item Library Mode” option has been enabled in
Enterprise Preferences > Libraries tab, this option will be automatically selected and
disabled so it cannot be changed. All taxes will be applied at line item level.
Summarize taxes with line items in charge entry:
Select this check-box to display a “Summarize Taxes” option on the Charge Posting screen. If
the “Summarize Taxes” option is enabled, all tax charges will be summed and displayed on the
same line as the “parent” charge in a separate “Tax” column. If the “Summarize Taxes” option is
not enabled, all tax charges will be listed separately below the “parent” charge.
By not selecting this check-box, a “Summarize Taxes” option is not available on the Charge
Posting screen. All tax charges will always be listed separately below the “parent” charge.
NOTE: This option is disabled if the “Apply all tax charges at line item level” option has
not been selected.
503
NextGen Healthcare
Trans Codes Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Transaction Codes Tab
Default Transaction Codes
Patient Cash:
Select the transaction code to default onto the Payment Entry window for every patient
payment entered. Users must change the default code on the Payment Entry window
when a payment type other than the default is being entered. Leave blank to not set a
default code.
Patient Adjustment:
Select the transaction code to default onto the Payment Entry window for every patient
adjustment entered. Users must change the default code on the Payment Entry window
when an adjustment type other than the default is being entered. Leave blank to not set
a default code.
Account Cash:
Select the transaction code to default onto the Payment Entry window for every account
payment entered. Users must change the default code on the Payment Entry window
when an account payment type other than the default is being entered. Leave blank to
not set a default code.
Account Adjustment:
Select the transaction code to default onto the Payment Entry window for every account
adjustment entered. Users must change the default code on the Payment Entry window
when an account adjustment type other than the default is being entered. Leave blank to
not set a default code.
504
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
NextMD Payment:
Select the transaction code to default onto the Payment Entry window for every patient
payment received via the NextGen® Patient Portal (NextMD).
System Generated Transaction Codes
Applied Encounter/Invoice Credit:
Select the ZApplied Encounter/Invoice Credit transaction code. This code will be used
when a user applies an encounter/invoice unapplied credit to one or more charges on the
encounter. NOTE: This reduces the balance of the charge(s) on the encounter.
Applied Encounter/Invoice Debit:
Select the ZApplied Encounter/Invoice Debit transaction code. This code will be used
when a user applies an encounter/invoice unapplied credit to one or more charges on the
encounter. NOTE: This reduces the amount of unapplied credits on the encounter.
Applied Account Credit:
Select the ZApplied Account Credit transaction code. This code will be used when a user
applies an account unapplied credit to charges on one or more encounter.
NOTE: This reduces the balance of the charge(s) on the encounter.
Applied Account Debit:
Select the ZApplied Account Debit transaction code. This code will be used when a user
applies an account unapplied credit to charges on one or more encounter.
NOTE: This reduces the amount of unapplied credits on the account.
Transfer Credit to Account:
Select the ZTransfer Credit to Account transaction code. This code will be used when a
user clicks the Xfer Credit button on the Payment Entry window to transfer an encounter
unapplied credit to the account.
NOTE: This removes the unapplied credit amount from the encounter.
Receive Credit on Account:
Select the ZReceive Credit on Account transaction code. This code will be used when a
user clicks the Xfer Credit button on the Payment Entry window to transfer an encounter
unapplied credit to the account.
NOTE: This increases the amount of unapplied credits on the account.
Bad Debt Credit:
Select the ZBad Debt Credit transaction code. This code will be used when a user
processes an encounter with one or more charges to Bad Debt (collections).
NOTE: This removes the self-pay balance on the encounter.
Bad Debt Debit:
Select the ZBad Debt Debit transaction code. This code will be used when a user
processes an encounter with one or more charges to Bad Debt (collections).
NOTE: This increases the bad debt balance on the encounter.
Void Charge:
Select the ZVoid Charge transaction code. This code will be used when a user clicks the
Void button on the Charge Posting window to remove a charge that was entered in error.
NOTE: This reverses the original charge amount and quantity.
505
NextGen Healthcare
Transactions Tab
eLearning Course:
Setting Up Practice Preferences – Transactions Tab
This section provides options related to transaction (payments, adjustments, refunds) entry in EPM.
Default Transaction Spreading
These settings control how the system will spread money being posted against multiple charges
on the Payment Entry window.
NOTE: Users can override the default spreading option selected here by highlighting a
charge on the Payment Entry window, right-clicking, and selecting Spread from the
menu.
Transaction Source:
Select either Patient or Third Party (insurance) and then select one of the following options:
First In / First Out (FIFO):
For payments posted to a single encounter, the first charge on the encounter will be paid
in full, followed by the second charge on the encounter, etc. until the payment amount is
exhausted.
For payments posted to multiple encounters, the encounter with the oldest Service Date
will be paid in full, followed by the encounter with the second oldest Service Date, etc.
until the payment amount is exhausted.
506
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
First In / First Out - Pat Resp Date:
For payments posted to a single encounter, the first charge on the encounter will be paid
in full, followed by the second charge on the encounter, etc. until the payment amount is
exhausted.
For payments posted to multiple encounters, the encounter with the oldest Patient
Responsibility Date will be paid in full, followed by the encounter with the second oldest
Patient Responsibility Date, etc. until the payment amount is exhausted.
Weighted distribution:
For payments posted to a single encounter, a portion of the payment is applied to all
charges on the encounter. The amount applied to each charge is determined by each
charge’s percentage of the total.
For payments posted to multiple encounters, the encounter with the oldest Service Date
will be paid in full, with a portion of the payment applied to all charges on the encounter,
followed by the encounter with the second oldest Service Date, etc. until the payment
amount is exhausted. The amount applied to each charge is determined by each
charge’s percentage of the total
Reason Codes Options
Default Reason Code Library:
Select the default Reason Code Library to be used on the Payment Entry window for payments
from all payers in the selected practice.
NOTE: Payer specific libraries can be linked to those payers in the Payers table >
Practice tab > Transactions sub-tab.
Patient Reason Code Library
Select the default Reason Code Library to be used on the Payment Entry window for payments
from all patients in the selected practice.
Write Off Remaining Patient Balance:
Select the adjustment transaction code that will automatically adjust off the patient balance when
the Write Off Remaining Patient Balance option is checked in the Reason Code Library for the
reason code used during manual payment entry.
NOTE: This does not apply to ERA payments. ERA payments use the adjustment code
selected in the Reason Code Library.
Write Off Remaining Payer Balance:
Select the adjustment transaction code that will automatically adjust off the insurance balance
when the Write Off Remaining Patient Balance option is checked in the Reason Code Library for
the reason code used during manual payment entry.
NOTE: This does not apply to ERA payments. ERA payments use the adjustment code
selected in the Reason Code Library.
507
NextGen Healthcare
Payment Entry Defaults
Utilize unapplied credit as payment:
Select this check-box to use unapplied credits as payments. If the check-box is not selected,
unapplied credits are applied as adjustments.
NOTE: If you select the check-box, the following fields change to contain payment
transaction types:
Free text line item reason codes:
Select this check-box to allow users to type line item reason codes during payment entry instead
of selecting the reason codes from a list. When users type multiple reason codes, they must
separate them with commas - for example, CO18, CO42, PR1. If any of the typed codes are
incorrect, then the incorrect codes display along with the list of reason codes from the Reason
Code library that the users can select.
Use payer default bad debt tran codes:
Select this check-box to allow the default bad debt transaction codes defined for payers to
automatically display in Payment Entry when insurance payments/adjustments are entered on a
bad debt encounter.
Default contract amounts when payer selected:
Select this check-box to use the Allowed, Adjustment and Payment amounts defined in the
Contracts library as the default amounts during payment entry in EPM.
Show bad debt charges (Account Level):
Select this check-box to make bad debt charges display in Payment Entry in EPM when Account
is selected in the Source field. If this check-box is not selected, the bad debt charges do not
display.
Show all line items:
Select this check-box to have the Show All Line Items check-box selected by default on the
Payment Entry dialog box.
Enable Transaction Notes:
Select this check-box to display the Notes free-text comment field on the Payment Entry screen in
EPM.
Use settled up status:
Select this check-box to settle a balance upwards during manual payment entry when the
secondary payer pays before the primary payer. Then, when the primary pays, the balance skips
the secondary payer and settles to the tertiary payer or to the patient.
Use settled up status with ERA:
Select this check-box to settle a balance upwards during ERA payment processing when the
secondary payer pays before the primary payer. Then, when the primary pays, the balance skips
the secondary payer and settles to the tertiary payer or to the patient.
508
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Batch Posting Defaults
Enable batch sub-batches:
Select this check-box to setup sub-batches when setting up batch header records. For more
information on sub-batches, see the Posting Transactions chapter of the NextGen EPM User
Guide.
Enable batch balancing with Adjustments:
Select this check-box to enable the Total Adjusted field on the Batch Maintenance dialog box in
EPM so that users can include the total amount of adjustments in the batch balancing criteria.
Enterprise Transactions
Enable Enterprise Batch Groupings:
Select this check-box to enable users to include transaction batches from this practice in batch
groupings. Batch groupings enable users to enter, balance, and post transactions from multiple
practices. This check-box is enabled only when the Enable Enterprise Batch Groupings checkbox is selected on the Enterprise Preferences > General tab.
509
NextGen Healthcare
Wait List Tab
The Wait List tab is used in conjunction with the Real-Time Wait List process in the NextGen®
EPM Worklog Manager module.
NOTE: Setup of this tab and training on Worklog Manager will be covered during
Advanced Training or during a separate WebEx training session.
Enable Real-Time Waitlist Processing:
Select this check-box to enable the Real-Time Waitlist Process within the NextGen® EPM
Worklog Manager module.
Waitlist Interim Appt Automatic Cancellation Reason:
Select the Appointment Cancellation Reason to be used when the Real-Time Waitlist Process
automatically cancels a patient’s interim appointment.
Minimum Lead Time To Generate A Waitlist Worklog Task:
Set the minimum lead time necessary to contact a waitlisted patient and get them into the
practice for an appointment time slot that recently became available. For example, if a time slot
opens up for 90 minutes from now, there may not be enough time to contact the waitlisted patient
and get them into the practice. Therefore, a task should not be generated and assigned to a
user. However, if a time slot opens up for 240 minutes from now, there is plenty of time to
contact the patient and get them into the practice. Therefore, a task should be generated and
assigned to a user.
510
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
File Maintenance > Code Tables
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Code Tables
Code Tables
Code Tables are a set of system level tables that come pre-defined with the NextGen system.
They are pre-defined to meet standard specifications. Within each table, new items cannot be
created. However, the description for existing items can be modified and items can be hidden as
needed.
Code Tables
Code Table
Description
Allergy Severity
The Allergy Severity is used in the NextGen® EHR Allergies module.
The code indicates the severity of a patient’s allergy. It is part of
CCHIT certification and is the required subset to qualify the severity of
an allergy on a CCD (Continuity of Care Document) document. After
the code is entered it can be used by interfaces (Rosetta) and CCD
generation. The codes are:
1 – Mild
2 – Mild to Moderate
3 – Moderate
4 – Moderate to Severe
5 – Severe
6 – Fatal
Bill Classification
Bill Classification is used as the second digit of the three digit code
that prints in field locator 4 (Type of Bill) on UB claims. The code
indicates the type of bill for the service performed on the claim.
511
NextGen Healthcare
Code Table
Description
City Type
City Type is used in the Zip Codes table to classify cities for
government reporting.
Claim Types
Claim Type is used in the “Process as Claim Type” field on the Payers
> System tab. The claim type affects box 1 on 1500 claims.
Confidentiality
The Confidentiality code table indicates the confidentiality of the CCD
(Continuity of Care Document) document and how the information is
shared. It is part of CCHIT certification and is required for document
exchange within a Regional Health Information Organization (RHIO).
Rosetta uses the code for CCD generation. The codes are:
Normal: Sharing for normal use
Restricted: Sharing for authorized personnel
Delay Reason Code
Delay Reason Code is used on the Encounter Maintenance > Billing &
Collections tab. It is included on claims as an indicator as to why there
was a delay in filing a claim for an encounter.
Employment Statuses
Employment Status is used on the Employer Maintenance screen. It
indicates the status of the patient’s employment with the employer
being entered.
Insurance Types
Insurance Type is used in the “Insurance Type Code” field on the
Payers > System tab.
Location Designation
Location Designation is used in the Locations table. It indicates the
“type of facility” the patient visited for treatment. HL7 interfaces
sending Syndromic Surveillance information to public health agencies
use the location from the encounter and send the corresponding code
value for the Location Designation in the HL7 message. The codes
are:
Emergency Care
Medical Specialty
Primary Care
Urgent Care
Marital Statuses
Marital Status is used on the Person/Patient Information >
Demographics tab. The marital status affects Box 8 on 1500 claims
and Field Locator 17 on UB claims.
Medicare Secondary
Payers
Medicare Secondary Payers codes are used on the Insurance
Maintenance screen. It is included on claims as an indicator as to why
Medicare was selected as the secondary payer on an encounter.
Medication Dosage
Form
512
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Code Table
Description
Occurrences
Occurrences are used on the Encounter Maintenance screen. It
describes the type of occurrence for the date that appears in box 14
on 1500 claims. Depending on the code selected, a state and onset
date/time may also be required.
Occurrence Codes
Occurrence Codes are used on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab
> Occurrence Codes sub-tab. The occurrence codes affect Field
Locators 31-36 on UB claims.
Patient Status
Designation
Patient Status Designation is used on the Add/Modify Patient
Information > Status tab. It indicates the patient’s status with the
provider regarding immunizations. The status is required for
transmissions to Immunization Registries and indicates whether the
sending provider organization considers the patient as active. The
codes are:
Active
Inactive
Inactive - Lost to follow-up (cancel contract)
Inactive - Moved or gone elsewhere (cancel contract)
Inactive Permanently inactive (Do not reactivate or add new
entries to the record)
Unknown
Places of Service
Place of Service is used in the Service Item Library, the Locations
table and/or the Charge Posting screen. The place of service affects
box 24B on 1500 claims.
Plan Types
Plan Type is used on the Payers > Payer Defaults-1 tab. Plan Type is
needed for lab interfaces.
PRO Procedures
PRO (Professional Review Organization) Procedure codes are used
on the Chart > Encounters tab > Insurance sub-tab > Verification
section.
Quadrants
Quadrants are used on the Charge Posting screen when entering
dental charges. The quadrant indicates the area of the mouth on
dental claims.
Relationships
Relationships are used on the Person/Patient Information screen for
anyone related to a patient. Relationships are entered for insurance,
guarantor and/or contact purposes.
513
NextGen Healthcare
Code Table
Description
Rx Type
The Rx Type code table indicates the medication type. It is a part of
CCHIT certification and is the required subset to qualify the
prescription type in a CCD document. After the code is entered in the
Medication module of NextGen EHR, it can be used by interfaces
(Rosetta) and CCD generation. The codes are:
O: Over-the-counter
F: Prescriptions
Sexes
Sexes are used on the Person/Patient Information > Demographics
tab.
Signature Source
Signature Source is used in the “Source of Signature” field on the
Payers > Payer Defaults-1 tab. The signature source affects boxes 12
and 13 on 1500 claims.
Source of Admission
Source of Admission is used on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab.
The source of admission affects Field Locator 15 on UB claims.
State
State is used in the Zip Codes table and anywhere else that an
address is entered.
Student Status
Student Status is used on the Person/Patient Information >
Demographics tab.
Support Role Type
Patient Status Designation is used on the Add/Modify Patient
Information > Relations/Roles tab. It indicates the “type of role” a
person has in relationship to the patient. HL7 interfaces sending
Syndromic Surveillance information to public health agencies use the
corresponding code value for the Support Role Type in the HL7
message. The codes are:
Caregiver
Emergency Contact
Next of Kin
Surface
Surface is used on the Charge Posting screen when entering dental
charges. The surface is indicated on dental claims.
Time Zone
Time Zone is used in the Zip Codes table.
Tooth
Tooth is used on the Charge Posting screen when entering dental
charges. The tooth is indicated on dental claims.
Type of Admission
Type of Admission is used on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab.
The type of admission affects Field Locator 14 on UB claims.
Type of Facility
Type of Facility is used as the first digit of the three digit code that
prints in Field Locator 4 (Type of Bill) on UB claims. The code
indicates the type of facility where the service was performed on the
claim.
514
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Code Table
Description
Type of Service
Type of Service is used in the CPT4 Codes table to indicate the type
of service performed.
Value Codes
Value Codes are used on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab >
Value Codes sub-tab. The value codes affect Field Locators 39-41 on
UB claims.
UB Condition Codes
Condition Codes are used on the Encounter Maintenance > UB tab >
Condition Codes sub-tab. The value codes affect Field Locators 18-28
on UB claims.
Veteran Status
Veteran Status is used on the Person/Patient Information > UDS tab.
It indicates whether the person/patient is a veteran.
515
NextGen Healthcare
Scheduling Administration
eLearning Curriculum:
eLearning Course:
Appointment Scheduling Administration
Appts – Setting Up the Appointment Book
Scheduling Administration controls the Appointment Book in NextGen® EPM. The tables within
this setup are practice level. Therefore, Scheduling Administration must be completed for each
practice in which appointments will be made.
Scheduling Administration is accessed from the Admin > Scheduling Admin menu option within
NextGen® EPM.
Practice Preferences > Appt Scheduling Tab
Before starting the Scheduling Administration setup, a couple of settings must be made in
Practice Preferences on the Appt Scheduling tab.
Default Time Interval:
Select one of the following as the default time interval for the appointment book. The selection
made here should accommodate the majority of the Resources, if not all, for which appointments
will be made.
5 minutes / 10 minutes / 15 minutes / 20 minutes / 30 minutes / 60 minutes
Allow interval overrides:
Select this check-box if the Default Time Interval selected above will not meet the needs of all
Resources. This allows the time interval to be set differently for those Resources as needed.
516
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Classes
Classes are used to group Resources. When users click the Appointment Search icon in the
appointment book to find an available appointment, they are able to search by individual resource
or by a class of resources. Searching by class is useful if it is desired to scan the schedules for
multiple resources when trying to find the first available appointment.
Classification:
Enter a name for the Class being defined.
Available Resources:
All Resources created in Scheduling Admin > Resources tab are displayed.
Member Resources:
Select the Resources to be included in the Class being defined by selecting them on the left side
and moving them to the right side by use of the blue arrows.
517
NextGen Healthcare
Resources
A Resource is a person, place or thing for which appointments will be scheduled.
Resource:
Enter a name for the Resource being defined as it should display in the Appointment Book.
Type:
Select one of the following for the Resource being defined: Person, Place, Thing
Available on Holidays:
Select this check-box if the Resource being defined is available for appointments on holidays.
NOTE: Holidays are defined in Practice Preferences > Holidays tab.
Time Interval:
The Default Time Interval specified in Practice Preferences > Appt Scheduling tab is displayed.
Select a different time interval for the Resouce being defined if needed.
518
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
General Tab
Detailed Description:
Enter a free typed comment about the Resource being defined. This comment does not display
to end users in the Appointment Book.
Physician Link:
Select the provider from the Providers table that should be linked to the Resource being defined.
The selected provider will default as the Rendering Provider on all appointments made for the
Resource in NextGen® EPM. Therefore, all appointments will display in the Inbox within the
NextGen® EHR Workflow module for the selected provider.
User Link:
Select the user from System Administrator that should be linked to the Resource being defined.
The “To Do List” for the user selected, from the Daily View of the Appointment Book, will print on
a Day Timer Report printed for the Resource.
Daily / Weekly Templates:
Select the type of templates that will be created for the Resource being defined.
Available Classes:
All Classes created in Scheduling Admin > Classes tab are displayed.
Member Classes:
Select the Class(es) to which the Resource being defined should be a member. Select one or
more Classes from the left side and move them to the right side by use of the blue arrows.
Templates Button:
This will be discussed later in the Templates section.
519
NextGen Healthcare
External Tab
The External tab is used when interfaces will be implemented between NextGen and one or more
external systems. This tab allows a cross-reference to be defined between the NextGen resource
and the external system resource.
NOTE: A NextGen Interface Analyst will review the appropriate setup during the interface
implementation.
External ID:
The alpha-numeric ID assigned by the vendor for the Resource being defined.
External System:
Select the vendor for the interface
520
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Events
Events are the various types of appointments that will be scheduled in the Appointment Book.
NOTE: NextGen® Import Wizard can be used to load this table.
Event:
Enter a name for the Event being defined.
Short:
Enter a short description for the Event being defined. The short description can be up to 3 alphanumeric characters. It displays in the Appointment Book next to the patient’s name.
Details:
Enter a free typed comment about the Event being defined. This comment displays to end users
in the Appointment Book and in the Work Flow module in NextGen® EHR.
521
NextGen Healthcare
Successor Event:
Select an Event that should be scheduled after the Event being defined. During check-in of the
current event, the following prompt displays:
Duration:
Select the duration for the Event being defined that accommodates the majority of the Resources,
if not all, for which the Event will be scheduled.
Require linked patient appointment:
Select this check-box if the Event being defined should always have a patient linked to it. For
example, an Adult Physical event would require a patient, but a Meeting event would not.
Exclude printing appointment reminders:
Select this check-box if the Event being defined should not qualify for appointment reminder
letters.
Print chart tracking outguide:
This check-box displays only if the system is licensed for the NextGen® Chart Tracking module.
NOTE: Chart Tracking is a legacy module that is no longer available to clients.
Require note template:
Select this check-box for the Event being defined if users should be required to complete a
Micrsoft® Word document template (.dot) when the event is scheduled.
NOTE: The document template is specified on the Note Template tab.
Require marketing data:
Select this check-box if the Event being defined should require users to capture a Marketing Plan
when the event is being scheduled.
Default Class for Appointment Search:
Select the Class that should default when users click the Appointment Search icon in the
appointment book to find the first available time slot for the Event being defined.
Background Color:
Click the button to select a background color for the Event being defined. The color will display to
users in the Appointment Book on the time slots where the Event is scheduled.
Foreground Color:
Click the button to select a foreground color for the Event being defined. The color will display
the patient’s name in the selected color to users in the Appointment Book.
522
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Overrides Tab
The Overrides tab is used to define a duration for specific Resources that differs from the
standard duration defined for the Event.
Resource:
Select the Resource that requires a different duration for the Event being defined.
Duration:
Select the duration for the Resource.
523
NextGen Healthcare
Default Resource Tab
The Default Resource tab is used when an appointment for an Event should always default onto
one or more schedules in addition to the Resource for which the appointment is already being
scheduld.
For example, when a Procedure event is scheduled with Dr Welby, the appointment should also
default onto the schedule for the Procedure Room.
Click the yellow folder.
Available Resources:
All Resources created in Scheduling Admin > Resources tab are displayed on the left.
Included Resource(s):
Select the Resource(s) to which the Event being defined should always default. Select one or
more Resources from the left side and move them to the right side by use of the blue arrows.
524
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Limits Tab
The Limits tab is used when the numbers of appointments that can be made for the Event being
defined should be limited. The limits are defined per Resource.
525
NextGen Healthcare
SIMs Tab
The SIMs tab is used as a means of adding automatic charges to an encounter created from the
Event being defined.
The specified SIM code(s) will default onto the Charge Posting screen and the user is prompted
as seen below:
526
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Locations Tab
The Locations tab is used when appointments for the Event being defined should only be
scheduled at specific locations.
Click the yellow folder.
Available Locations:
All Locations created in File Maintenance that were defined to “Display in Scheduling” are
displayed on the left.
Included Location(s):
Select the Location(s) at which the Event being defined should only be scheduled. Select one or
more Locations from the left side and move them to the right side by use of the blue arrows.
527
NextGen Healthcare
External Tab
The External tab is used when interfaces will be implemented between NextGen and one or more
external systems. This tab allows a cross-reference to be defined between the NextGen event
and the external system appointment type.
External ID:
The alpha-numeric ID assigned by the vendor for the Event being defined.
External System:
Select the vendor for the interface
528
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Note Template Tab
The Note Template tab is used when users should be required to complete a Microsoft® Word
document template (.dot) when the Event being defined is scheduled.
Click the yellow folder.
Available Templates:
All Microsoft® Word document templates (.dot) that were created and imported into NextGen®
EPM are displayed on the left.
Included Template(s):
Select the Template(s) that should be completed by users when the Event being defined is
scheduled. Select one or more Templates from the left side and move them to the right side by
use of the blue arrows.
529
NextGen Healthcare
Event Chains
You can effectively block the necessary time needed for a series of events by creating an Event
Chain, with each event referred to as an Event Chain Member.
Event Chain:
Enter a name for the Event Chain being defined.
Short:
Enter a short description for the Event Chain being defined. The short description can be up to 3
alpha-numeric characters.
Details:
Enter a free typed comment about the Event Chain being defined. This comment does not
display to end users in the Appointment Book.
Event Sequence Matters:
Select this check-box if the Events included in the Event Chain being defined must be scheduled
in the defined order.
Allow Events to Span Multiple Days:
Select this check-box if the Events included in the Event Chain being defined can be scheduled
across multiple days.
Linked Events:
Select this check-box if the Events included in the Event Chain being defined should be checkedin simultaneously and therefore linked to a single patient encounter.
Allow Event Durations Override:
Select this check-box if users should be able to override the duration defined for each Event
included in the Event Chain when it is being scheduled.
Available Events:
All Events created in Scheduling Admin > Events tab are displayed on the left.
530
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Member Events:
Select the Events that should be included in the Event Chain being defined. Select two or more
Events from the left side and move them to the right side by use of the blue left/right arrows.
Once selected, the events can be put into a preferred sequence by use of the blue up/down
arrows.
Event Chain Interval:
Right-click on the first Event in the Event Chain being defined. Set the time Interval, Scale and
Apply To parameters for the second event in the chain.
531
NextGen Healthcare
Categories
Categories are groupings of Events. The Categories will be used when creating Weekly/Daily
Templates for Resources. Each Category is placed onto specific time slots within a template,
therefore restricting the types of Events that can be scheduled during the specified times.
A color is defined for each Category that will be seen by users in the Appointment Book.
Category:
Enter a name for the Category being defined as it should display to users in the Appointment
Book.
Background Color:
Click the yellow folder to select a background color for the Category being defined. The color will
display to users in the Appointment Book on the time slots to which the Category is assigned.
Foreground Color:
Click the yellow folder to select a foreground color for the Category being defined. The color will
display the patient’s name in the selected color to users in the Appointment Book.
Available Events:
All Events created in Scheduling Admin > Events tab are displayed on the left.
Member Events:
Select the Events that should be included in the Category being defined. Select one or more
Events from the left side and move them to the right side by use of the blue arrows.
Prevent appointments in this category:
Select this check-box if the Appointment Search feature in the appointment book should ignore
time slots to which the Category being defined has been applied. For example, a category for
Lunch should be ignored by the Appointment Search.
532
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Weekly Templates
Weekly Templates are created for Resources whose schedules can be accommodated through
one or more Monday through Friday templates.
NOTE: Sunday and Saturday can also be included in a template if needed.
Template:
Enter a name for the Template being defined. The template name will display to users in the
Multi-View within the appointment book.
Associated Color:
Click the yellow folder to select a color for the Template being defined. The color will display
when the template is assigned to specific weeks within the Resource’s calendar.
NOTE: Red cannot be selected as it is reserved for Template Exceptions.
Daily Template:
Select a Daily Template that is to be applied to one or more days within the Weekly Template
being defined.
Time Interval:
Select a time interval for the Template being defined that matches the time interval for the
Resource for which the template is being created.
Category:
Select a Category that is to be applied to specific time slots within the Template being defined.
533
NextGen Healthcare
Color:
The color defined for the selected Category above displays.
Service Location:
Select a Location that is to be applied to specific time slots within the Template being defined.
Color:
The color defined for the selected Location above displays.
Once the above selections have been made, apply them to the template as follows:

By use of the Shift key and the Arrow keys on the keyboard, highlight the appropriate
Day/Time/Location slots to which the above selected parameters will be applied.

Right-click and select one of the following:
Apply Category
Apply Location
Apply Both Category/Location
Apply Daily Template
534
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Daily Templates
Daily Templates are created for Resources whose schedules cannot be accommodated through
one or more Monday through Friday weekly templates.
Template:
Enter a name for the Template being defined. The template name will display to users in the
Multi-View within the appointment book.
Associated Color:
Click the yellow folder to select a color for the Template being defined. The color will display
when the template is assigned to specific days within the Resource’s calendar.
NOTE: Red cannot be selected as it is reserved for Template Exceptions.
535
NextGen Healthcare
Category:
Select a Category that is to be applied to specific time slots within the Template being defined.
Color:
The color defined for the selected Category above displays.
Service Location:
Select a Location that is to be applied to specific time slots within the Template being defined.
Color:
The color defined for the selected Location above displays.
Time Interval:
Select a time interval for the Template being defined that matches the time interval for the
Resource for which the template is being created.
Once the above selections have been made, apply them to the template as follows:

By use of the Shift key and the Arrow keys on the keyboard, highlight the appropriate
Time/Location slots to which the above selected parameters will be applied.

Right-click and select one of the following:
Apply Category
Apply Location
Apply Both
536
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Apply Templates
Weekly or Daily Templates are applied to the calendar for each Resource. To access the
calendar, open a Resource and click the Template button.
537
NextGen Healthcare
Apply Weekly Templates
To Apply a Weekly Template to Specific Weeks:



Highlight the desired template on the right
Click on each week on the calendar to which the selected template will be applied
Click the Apply button
To Apply a Weekly Template to Specific Months:



Highlight the desired template on the right
Click on each month on the calendar to which the selected template will be applied (eg: March 2012)
Click the Apply button
To Apply a Weekly Template to a Year:



538
Highlight the desired template on the right
Click on the year on the calendar (eg: 2012)
Click the Apply button
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Apply Daily Templates
To Apply a Daily Template to Specific Days:



Highlight the desired template on the right
Click on each day on the calendar to which the selected template will be applied
Click the Apply button
To Apply a Daily Template to the Same Day for the Entire Month:



Highlight the desired template on the right
Click on the day of the month on the calendar to which the selected template will be
applied (eg: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri)
Click the Apply button
To Apply a Daily Template to Specific Months:



Highlight the desired template on the right
Click on each month on the calendar to which the selected template will be applied (eg: March 2012)
Click the Apply button
To Apply a Daily Template to a Year:



Highlight the desired template on the right
Click on the year on the calendar (eg: 2012)
Click the Apply button
539
NextGen Healthcare
Template Exceptions
Template Exceptions are used to make a one-time change to a template that was previously
applied to a Resource’s calendar.
NOTE: Permanent changes to a template should be done on the original template from the
Weekly Templates or Daily Templates tab within Scheduling Administration.
To Make an Exception to a Previously Applied Template:







Highlight the week (for weekly resources) or the day (for daily resources) to which the
exception will be made
Right-click and select Exception from the menu
The current template applied to the selected week/day displays
Select the new Category and/or Location to be used in the exception
By use of the Shift key and the Arrow keys on the keyboard, highlight the appropriate
Time/Location slots to which the selected category/location will be applied
Right-click and select one of the following:
Apply Category
Apply Location
Apply Both
Click the OK button
NOTE: Weeks or Days that have had an exception applied will display in red on the calendar.
540
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Fee Tickets
Example NextGen Fee Ticket
541
NextGen Healthcare
NextGen Fee Tickets can be utilized in EPM at any of the following four levels. Therefore,
multiple fee tickets can be created if needed and then imported into EPM to accommodate the
needs of each Practice, Provider, and/or Location.

Practice:
Fee ticket used by all providers in all locations within the practice

Practice > Provider:
Fee ticket used by specific providers within the practice

Practice > Event > Provider:
Fee ticket used by specific providers for specific types of appointments (events)

Practice > Location > Provider:
Fee ticket used by specific providers at specific locations
The NextGen Fee Ticket consists of a header section, a body section, and a footer section.
Fee Ticket Header and Footer
The Fee Ticket header and footer sections are hard-coded in the NextGen® EPM application.
There are a few options available in Practice Preferences > Data\Fee Ticket tab for slight
customizations to these sections.
Fee Ticket Body
The fee ticket body section is created by the client in Microsoft® Excel using a special worksheet
with a static red line border. This worksheet can be obtained from your NextGen® EPM
Implementation Specialist. It is important to stay within the red line border when creating a fee
ticket body. This ensures that when the Excel file is converted and then imported into EPM, it fits
correctly between the hard-coded header and footer sections.
542
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Example Fee Ticket Body in Microsoft® Excel
Supported File Formats
Once a fee ticket body has been created in Microsoft® Excel (.XLS) using the special worksheet
with a static red line border, it must be converted to one of the following file formats before it can
be imported into NextGen® EPM:




.EMF
.WMF
.BMP
.JPEG
Enhanced Windows Metafile
Windows Metafile
Windows Bitmap
JPEG Image
543
NextGen Healthcare
Convert Excel Format to Supported Format using Microsoft® PowerPoint
Microsoft® PowerPoint can be used to convert fee tickets from .XLS format to either .EMF or
.WMF format by completing the following steps:

Open the fee ticket in Microsoft® Excel.

If worksheet gridlines are displayed, they should be turned off so they don’t appear in the
final version of the fee ticket. To turn gridlines off, click the View tab on the Excel toolbar
and uncheck the Gridlines check-box.

Highlight all cells within the red line border by starting in the lower right hand cell and
dragging the mouse to the upper left hand cell.

Copy the highlighted cells as a picture by clicking the Paste button and then select As
Picture > Copy as Picture from the menu.
544
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8

In the Copy Picture window, select the As shown when printed option.

Click the OK button.

Minimize Microsoft® Excel.

Open Microsoft® PowerPoint.

Right-click on the blank slide and select Paste from the menu.
545
NextGen Healthcare

Right-click on the pasted image and select Save as Picture from the menu.

In the Save As Picture window, do the following:
o
o
o
546
Save In:
File Name:
Save As Type:
Select the destination directory where the file is to be saved.
Enter a name for the file being saved.
Select either Enhanced Windows Metafile (.EMF) or Windows Metafile (.WMF).
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8

Click the Save button.

Close Microsoft® PowerPoint and Excel.
Example Fee Ticket Body converted with Microsoft® PowerPoint
547
NextGen Healthcare
Convert Excel Format to Supported Format using Microsoft® Paint
Microsoft® Paint can be used to convert fee tickets from .XLS format to either .BMP or .JPEG
format by completing the following steps:

Open the Microsoft® Excel fee ticket.

If worksheet gridlines are displayed, they should be turned off so they don’t appear in the
final version of the fee ticket. To turn gridlines off, click the View tab on the Excel toolbar
and uncheck the Gridlines check-box.

Highlight all cells within the red line border by starting in the lower right hand cell and
dragging the mouse to the upper left hand cell.

Copy the highlighted cells by right-clicking the mouse and selecting Copy from the
menu (or press Ctrl+C on the keyboard).
548
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8

Minimize Microsoft® Excel.

Open Microsoft® Paint.
NOTE: Paint can be accessed on most workstations by clicking on Start > All
Programs > Accessories > Paint

From the Edit menu, select Paste (or press Ctrl+V on the keyboard).
NOTE: If the following message displays, click Yes to continue:
“The image in the clipboard is larger than the bitmap. Would you like the bitmap enlarged?”

The pasted cells appear with a dotted line border. Press the Esc key (Escape) to remove
the border.

Click the File menu and select Save As.
549
NextGen Healthcare

In the Save As window, do the following:
o
o
o
Save In:
File Name:
Save As Type:
Select the destination directory where the file is to be saved.
Enter a name for the file being saved.
Select either 256 Color Bitmap (.BMP) or JPEG.
NOTE: The default type may be 24-bit Bitmap which could result in an image that
is too large to import into NextGen® EPM. Either the 256 Color Bitmap option or
the JPEG option should be selected instead.

Click the Save button.
NOTE: If the following message displays, click Yes to continue:
“Saving into this format may cause some loss of color information. Do you want to continue?”

550
Close Microsoft® Paint and Excel.
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Example Fee Ticket Body converted with Microsoft® Paint
551
NextGen Healthcare
Import Converted Fee Ticket into NextGen® EPM
Fee tickets can be imported into NextGen® EPM by completing the following steps:

From NextGen® EPM desktop, click on the File > Tools > Image Explorer menu option
Import a Fee Ticket for the Practice




Click on +Practices, then +Fee Tickets on the left side of the screen.
Right-click on the Practice name on the right side of the screen and select Import Image
from the menu.
Browse to find the converted fee ticket file and click the Open button.
The status now shows as Image Exists for the practice.
Import a Fee Ticket for a Practice > Provider




552
Click on +Providers, then +Fee Tickets, then the Practice name on the left side of the
screen.
Right-click on the Provider name on the right side of the screen and select Import
Image from the menu.
Browse to find the converted fee ticket file and click the Open button.
The status now shows as Image Exists for the practice/provider.
NextGen® PM System Configuration Training Workbook for CHC, Version 5.8
Import a Fee Ticket for a Practice > Event > Provider




Click on +Providers, then +Fee Tickets, then +Practice Name, then +Events, then the
specific Event name on the left side of the screen.
Right-click on the Provider name on the right side of the screen and select Import
Image from the menu.
Browse to find the converted fee ticket file and click the Open button.
The status now shows as Image Exists for the practice/event/provider.
Import a Fee Ticket for a Practice > Location > Provider




Click on +Providers, then +Fee Tickets, then +Practice Name, then +Locations, then
the specific Location Name on the left side of the screen.
Right-click on the Provider name on the right side of the screen and select Import
Image from the menu.
Browse to find the converted fee ticket file and click the Open button.
The status now shows as Image Exists for the practice/location/provider.
553
Download PDF